Professional Documents
Culture Documents
When alignments are stored, they are stored completely (thus not only the user's own values). Upon
restore the microscope will compare the values being reloaded. If the values are identical to the values in
the next higher existing level, the values are not stored in the user's own alignments.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 5
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
2 Alignment procedures
Below is a list of alignment procedures. Some of the procedure steps may not be visible (dependent on
user level 'user' or 'expert'). Some alignments like STEM, EFTEM and Lorentz may also be absent, since
they depend on the hardware configuration of the instrument.
General notes:
• In principle some alignments could be combined in single steps, thereby reducing the number of
steps. In practice, it is then often forgotten to one of the possible alignments, with the consequence
that one alignment is then misaligned. Alignment procedure steps generally therefore perform only a
single alignment at a time.
• In an alignment procedure some steps may be skipped when using Next and Previous. This is done
to skip those alignments that are not sensitive to changes in operating conditions (like pivot points),
so that the procedure only follows the more often-used alignments. The visual indication which
alignments are skipped and which are executed, takes the form of two different icons in front of the
subprocedure step. Where the icon is a blue arrow on a white background, pointing to the right (into
the subprocedure) the subprocedure is not skipped. Where the arrow points down on a yellow
background, the subprocedure is skipped.
• Some alignment procedures start with a preparation step. This step can be necessary because
otherwise the entry point for the whole procedure would be in a 'skipped' subprocedure (see previous
point).
Gun
• Gun tilt
• Gun tilt pivot point
• Gun shift
• Spot-size dependent gun shift
Beam HM-TEM
• Preparation
• Minicondenser lens
• Beam shift pivot point
• Beam tilt pivot point
• Dynamic conical dark field pivot point HM (STEM systems only)
• Dynamic conical dark field distortion HM (STEM systems only)
• Rotation center
• Calibrate Trackball
• Beam shift calibration
• Beam tilt calibration
• Dynamic conical dark field beam tilt calibration HM (STEM systems only)
• Spot size-intensity calibration
• Coma-free amplitude
• Coma-free pivot points
• Coma-free alignment
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 6
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Image HM-TEM
• Preparation
• Image shift pivot point HM
• Diffraction shift pivot point SA
• SA objective lens preset
• Diffraction shift pivot point Mh
• Mh preset and alignment
• SA magnifications alignment
• Diffraction shift pivot point Mi
• Mi preset and alignment
• Align diffraction pattern
• Align camera lengths
• Image shift calibration
• Diffraction shift calibration
• Beam shift - image shift calibration
• Off-axis TV HM image alignment (only if off-axis TV installed)
• Off-axis TV diffraction alignment (only if off-axis TV installed)
Beam LM
• Preparation
• Beam shift pivot point
• Beam tilt pivot point
• Rotation center
• Calibrate Trackball
• Beam shift calibration
• Beam tilt calibration
• Spot size-intensity calibration
Image LM
• Preparation
• Image shift pivot point
• Diffraction shift pivot point
• LM magnifications alignment
• Align LAD pattern
• Image shift calibration
• Diffraction shift calibration
• Beam shift - image shift calibration
• Off-axis TV LM image alignment (only if off-axis TV installed)
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 7
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Beam Nanoprobe
• Preparation
• Beam shift pivot point
• Beam tilt pivot point
• Dynamic conical dark field pivot point Nanoprobe (STEM systems only)
• Dynamic conical dark field distortion Nanoprobe (STEM systems only)
• Rotation center
• Calibrate Trackball
• Beam shift calibration
• Beam tilt calibration
• Dynamic conical dark field beam tilt calibration Nanoprobe (STEM systems only)
• Spot size-intensity calibration
Image Nanoprobe
• SA objective lens preset
• Mh objective lens preset
• Mi objective lens preset
• Align diffraction pattern
• Beam shift - image shift calibration
Stigmators
• Condenser
• Condenser stigmator shunt
• Objective
• Diffraction
HM-STEM
• Preparation
• Objective / Intensity preset
• Beam tilt pivot points
• Rotation center
• Beam shift pivot points
• Align diffraction pattern
• Detector alignment
• Scan distortion adjustment
• Default scan rotation
• AC shunt
• Calibration
LM-STEM
• Preparation
• Intensity preset
• Beam shift pivot points
• Align diffraction pattern
• Detector alignment
• Scan distortion adjustment
• Default scan rotation
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 8
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
EFTEM HM
• Preparation
• HM Image-shift pivot points
• SA Diffraction-shift pivot points
• Mh Diffraction-shift pivot points
• Mi Diffraction-shift pivot points
• Mh Pre-alignment
• SA Image-shift pre-alignment
• Mi Image shift pre-alignment
• Mh Image-shift alignment
• SA Image-shift alignment
• Mi Image-shift alignment
• SA and Mi Cross-over correction alignment
• Camera length pre-alignment
• Camera length alignment
EFTEM LM
• Preparation
• Image-shift pivot points
• Diffraction-shift pivot points
• Image-shift pre-alignment
• Image-shift alignment
EFTEM Nanoprobe
• SA preset
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 9
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
The emitted electrons that pass through the Wehnelt aperture are focused into a
cross-over between the cathode and anode. This cross-over acts as the electron
source for the optics of the microscope.
The size of the cross-over is determined by the type of filament, the electric field between cathode and
anode and by the exit angles of the electrons from the filament. At low bias voltages, electrons are
emitted from a larger area of the curved tip of the filament, causing a higher divergence of emission
angles and thus a larger source size. Higher emission therefore not necessarily improves the brightness
(a performance parameter of the emitter, measured in A/cm²srad). In addition, higher emission increases
the Coulomb interaction between electrons - the so-called Boersch effect - (some get accelerated, others
decelerated) which increases the energy spread.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 10
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
The FEG emitter is placed in a cap (suppressor) which prevents electron emission from the shaft of the
emitter and the heating filament (very similar to the Wehnelt of the
thermionic gun). Electron emission is regulated by the voltage on the
extraction anode. Underneath the extraction anode of the FEG is a
small electrostatic lens, the gun lens. This lens is used to position the
first cross-over after the gun in relation to the beam-defining aperture
(usually the C2 aperture). If the gun lens is strong, the cross-over lies
high above the aperture while a weak gun lens positions the cross-
over close to the aperture, giving a high current but at the expense of
aberrations on the beam. A strong gun lens is therefore used where small, intense and low-aberration
electron probes are needed (diffraction, analysis and scanning), while a weak gun lens is used when
high currents are important (TEM imaging). In the latter case, the beam is spread and the aberrations do
not affect the area within the field of view.
3.2 Lenses
The lenses in electron microscopes are electromagnetic lenses (the only exception being the gun lens in
the FEG instruments, which is an electrostatic lens). These lenses all consist of a coil, through which an
electrical current flows, and a magnetic circuit, which is a piece of magnetic alloy with a specific shape.
The current flowing through the coil generates a magnetic field in the magnetic circuit. Where the circuit
is interrupted (the gap), the magnetic field goes out into the vacuum and creates the lens field that is
used for focusing the electron beam. How the lens works is determined by the shape of the pole piece
(the part of the magnetic circuit where the bore and gap are). Water flows through pipes to remove the
heat generated by the electron current in the lens coil.
Changing the current through the lens coil changes the magnetic field and thus the strength of the lens.
Although electromagnetic lenses and electrons behave quite differently from light lenses and light, the
general principles of light optics can be applied and the electromagnetic lenses can be described for
convenience like the lenses of light optics.
The magnification system of the microscope consists of a set of five lenses: the objective, diffraction,
intermediate, projector 1 and projector 2 lenses. Except in low-magnification (LM) mode, the objective
lens is always the strongest lens in the microscope, magnifying between about 20 and 50x, depending
on the type of objective lens.
The individual lenses of the magnification (or projector) system are not controlled directly by the
operator, but instead the microscope contains a number of magnifications for image and diffraction
mode, each with its own settings of the magnifying lenses. The only lenses that are controlled directly by
the operator are the objective lens (for focusing the image) and the diffraction lens (for focusing the
diffraction pattern).
In LM mode the objective lens is switched (nearly) off in order to achieve the smallest magnifications.
With the objective lens off, the diffraction lens is used for focusing the image. The electron-optical
configuration in LM is reversed with respect to the high-magnification range: the functions of the
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 12
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
objective and diffraction lenses and stigmators switch as do the functions of the objective and selected-
area apertures.
Lens and aperture functions in HM (objective lens on) and LM (objective lens off)
In principle a single deflection coil is sufficient for a particular action, provided that it is mounted at the
level where its action is needed. In practice, such arrangements are not feasible due to space limitations
or other constraints. All deflections are done therefore through double deflection coils that are situated at
another level in the microscope.
A deflection coil is a set of coils on either side of the electron beam. If
one is given a positive magnetic field and the other one a negative one,
the electrons in the beam will be attracted by the positive field and
repelled by the other, leading to a deflection towards the positive coil.
The actual coils are extended over arcs of 120°. The arcs are used to
generate a homogeneous magnetic field.
Each microscope has three sets of double deflection coils: the gun coils just underneath the electron gun
(or underneath the high-tension accelerator in case of 200 or 300 kV instruments); the beam deflection
coils above the objective lens; and the image deflection coils below the objective lens. An additional,
more simple, one-directional coil forms the microscope shutter that is used for exposure of the negatives.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 13
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Because of the importance of pure shift and pure tilt, considerable effort is spent in correctly aligning the
deflection coils. No two electron microscope columns are exactly identical and slight differences that
exist between deflection coils make it necessary to align the coils by means of setting pivot points. A
pivot point is simply a point around which the beam will pivot (like the analogue of the seesaw in the
children's' playground). The alignment of the pivot point determines the relation between the two coils
used, making sure that the beam pivots around the correct point.
The concept of the pivot point is probably easiest to understand for beam deflection coils in a simplified
microscope consisting of a double deflection coil followed by a lens with equal distances between the
deflection coils and between the lower coil and the image plane above the lens.
If a combination of beam shift and beam tilt is needed, then the settings for these are simply added. In
the example above, setting beam tilt plus beam shift would involve setting an angle 2a on the upper coils
and -3a on the lower coil.
Setting the pivot points is done by deflecting the beam with a wobbler and minimising any movement - of
the beam in the diffraction plane in the case of beam shift (no tilt should occur) and of the beam in the
image in the case of beam tilt (no shift should occur). A wobbler is a mechanism for rapidly switching a
microscope element or function from a negative value to an identical but positive value; it can thus be on
beam shift or beam tilt, image shift, a stigmator, objective-lens current, high tension, etc., even though
the traditional meaning is the beam-tilt aid for focusing the TEM image.
Since a beam tilt is visible in diffraction as a diffraction shift, beam shift pivot points are set in
diffraction mode, while beam tilt pivot points are set in image mode - where a beam shift will be
visible.
Where it is important, pivot point alignment has two adjustable directions - a main one and the
perpendicular correction. If the coils were perfect, the latter would not be necessary. In practice a small
correction may be needed, because the lower coils is rotated slightly relative to the upper one. If the
perpendicular correction is unnecessary (e.g. for the gun tilt pivot points), then only the main direction is
adjustable (only the Multifunction X knob works).
3.4 Stigmators
Even though considerable effort is spent in order to ensure high lens quality, none of the lenses in a
microscope is 100 percent perfect. Small inhomogeneities remain or can come about later, for instance
by dust adhering to a pole piece or by magnetism or charging of the specimen itself. These imperfections
cause a loss of rotational symmetry of the lens. In one direction the lens will therefore focus more
strongly than in the perpendicular direction, causing an asymmetry called astigmatism. This image defect
is corrected by the stigmator.
The stigmator consists of a quadrupole, which basically is a lens whose astigmatism can be varied
continuously. The quadrupole has four elements, arranged at 90 degrees around the beam. These
elements are used together in two sets, with each set lying on opposite sides of the beam. If one set is
given a positive value and the other a negative, then the positive elements will attract the electrons and
have a defocusing effect, while the negative elements repel the electrons and focus (green arrows). The
resulting astigmatism (dark red ellipse) cancels the astigmatism in the electron lens (making the beam
round: red circle). The actual design of the stigmators inside the microscope is - as with the deflection
coils - more complicated and based on a magnetic field (field direction and strength shown by blue
arrows). Each stigmator consists of two of the elements, one mounted above the other and rotated by
45° with respect to each other. Each of these elements is controlled by one of the Multifunction knobs (X
and Y directions). The combination of two elements allows correction of the astigmatism in any direction.
Microscopes have three sets of stigmators: the condenser stigmator to make the focused beam circular;
the objective stigmator to correct astigmatism in the high-magnification (M, SA) image and the low-angle
diffraction (LAD) pattern; and the diffraction stigmator to correct astigmatism in the diffraction pattern and
the low-magnification (LM) image.
The quadrupoles used as stigmator can only correct second-order astigmatism. Fortunately (or perhaps
logically), this is the strongest astigmatism found. Third-order astigmatism is usually apparent only in the
so-called caustic image. This type of image is obtained when a strongly convergent beam is focused into
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 16
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
a small spot, as can be the case for a diffraction pattern or nanoprobe. Occasionally, fourth-order
astigmatism is observed when small, dirty objective apertures are used.
Because the stigmator settings vary from one mode to another and between various spot sizes, a
number of independent stigmator values are stored by the microscope.
With a parallel beam incident on the specimen (grey), the objective lens
focuses the electrons into a cross-over whose position coincides with
the back-focal plane (and thus the true diffraction focus).
When the beam is convergent (but not wholly focused), there still is a
cross-over but it is displaced from the back-focal plane upwards (in the
extreme case, a fully focused beam, the cross-over lies at the image
plane).
If the diffraction pattern is not focused properly, there are a number of consequences:
• The camera length can be wrong
• The diffraction will be rotated away from its proper orientation
• The pattern may be distorted
• Alignments such as beam shift pivot points can be wrong
• The scanning magnification can be wrong due to misaligned pivot points
Due to the absence of a clear criterion, we end up with a chicken-and-egg situation (what was first, the
chicken or the egg?). For example, if it can be assumed that the shift pivot points are correct, then it is
easy to establish the correct diffraction focus by wobbling a beam shift and minimising diffraction-pattern
movement. However, the pivot points can only be aligned correctly if the diffraction pattern is focused
properly.
In order to resolve this situation, we have determined Intensity settings for the different modes (LM, HM-
TEM and Nanoprobe) for a parallel beam. These Intensity settings are preset in the alignment
procedures, making it easy to find diffraction focus (the spot-pattern condition). After the alignment have
been done (camera length focus), the diffraction focus can also be found by simply pressing the
Eucentric focus button (this resets the variable diffraction focus to zero). With this method for
establishing diffraction focus, the SA aperture is not (and should not be) used.
The shadow image (in this case from SAED diffraction) can be understood from the diagram below.
When a parallel illuminates an area of the specimen, all transmitted (bright-field) beams converge in a
single cross-over in the back-focal plane of the objective lens. In this cross-over we cannot distinguish
between beams coming from the different parts of the specimens, because all beams go through a
single point (ideally). However, above or below the back-focal plane, the beams do not go through a
single point but - in three dimensions - they form a disk and each point in the disk corresponds to an
area of the specimen.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 18
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
In SAED the shadow image is obtained by changing the diffraction focus (FOCUS). In CBED the shadow
image is obtained by defocusing the beam on the specimen (INTENSITY).
In the shadow image, there are a couple of effects dependent on the direction of defocusing (under- or
overfocus). In going from under- to overfocus the shadow image:
• Flips by 180°.
• Inverts the contrast.
Because of these effects, one should work consistently (either always underfocus or always overfocus).
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 19
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
4 Gun procedure
Procedure
The gun tilt alignment consists of two steps:
• A step for preparation and finding light.
• A step to set the gun tilt itself.
Description
Gun alignment consists of two parts: gun tilt and gun shift. The gun tilt alignment makes sure that the
electron beam enters the microscope (that is, the C1 - spot size - lens) parallel to the optical axis, while
gun shift ensures that the beam goes through the center of the C1 lens.
The gun tilt is aligned simply by maximizing the intensity (with a useful guide often being the exposure
time measured on the screen). For fine-tuning at high magnifications use the direct alignments and the
criteria outlined under FEG alignment.
Since gun tilt alignment implies no gun shift (which would be visible as a beam shift), it should be
possible to align the gun tilt without movement of the beam. If this is not the case, the gun tilt pivot points
are not aligned properly.
Procedure
The gun tilt pivot point alignment consists of four steps:
• A step for preparation.
• Two steps to align the pivot points for the x and y directions.
And a final step to redo the gun tilt itself (because the pivot points affect the gun tilt, the latter step can
be necessary).
Procedure
The gun shift alignment consists of two steps:
• A first step in which spot 9 is centered with the beam deflection coils.
• A second step in which spot 3 is centered with the gun deflection coils.
The two steps are repeated until the change in gun shift is very small. In the gun shift procedure the
spot-size dependent gun shift values for spots 3 and 9 are reset to zero (for proper alignment the spot-
size dependent gun shift should therefore be done after the gun shift procedure).
Description
Gun alignment consists of two parts: gun tilt and gun shift. The gun tilt alignment makes sure that the
electron beam enters the microscope (that is, the C1 - spot size - lens) parallel to the optical axis, while
gun shift ensures that the beam goes through the center of the C1 lens.
When spot size 9 is used (or any spot size above that), the C1 lens is strong. Under these conditions all
aberrations of the microscope system above it are demagnified by the lens (C1 works in the opposite
way of the magnification system; instead of magnifying the image, it makes the image of the source - the
electron gun - smaller). Thus the demagnification of the misalignment of the gun shift is much smaller for
spot 9 than for spot 3, so spot 9 gives the reference ('no' gun shift) and spot 3 defines the gun shift itself.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 21
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Procedure
The spot-size dependent gun shift alignment consists of three steps:
• A first step in which spot 5 is centered with the beam deflection coils.
• A second step in which spot 9 is centered with the beam deflection coils (spot 5 is done first because
spot 9 may be difficult to find, especially if the beam is defocused).
• A third step in which all spots except 11 are centered (setting the spot-dependent gun shift).
• A fourth step in which spot 11 is centered (as far as it will go - it may become blocked by a fixed
aperture when shifted too far).
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 22
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Method:
C2 aperture centering:
• Focus spot and center it on the screen
• Turn INTENSITY overfocus (clockwise)
• Center aperture until illuminated area is symmetrical around the screen center.
Eucentric height: with the CompuStage switch on the Alpha wobbler and minimize image movement by
changing the Z height.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• Two preparation steps for setting up the image and diffraction pattern, respectively.
• A step in which the minicondenser lens can be adjusted.
Note: The Minicondenser lens can be used to change the optics of the condenser system (e.g. the
convergence angles in microprobe and nanoprobe modes depend on the minicondenser lens setting). It
should be noted, however, that changing the minicondenser lens has a number of consequences:
• Because the Minicondenser lens is located below the beam deflection coils, changes of the lens
affect many beam alignments.
• Strong changes of the Minicondenser lens may result on strong beam drift (the lens doesn't have any
water-cooling, since it releases its heat to the objective lens itself).
• Changing the Minicondenser lens affects the field of view that can be illuminated, especially when
small objective apertures are used.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps:
• Two preparation steps for setting up the image and diffraction pattern, respectively.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Notes:
• The shift 'wobble' may have one beam position blocked by the specimen. If no second beam is
visible when turning MF-X, then (re)move the specimen.
• Diffraction focus: the Intensity setting is preset to a fixed value that gives a parallel incident beam
which in turn should give a spot diffraction pattern. If the pattern is not focused, it should be focused
with the diffraction lens (FOCUS), not Intensity.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• One preparation step for setting up the image.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Note: Unlike the shift pivot point (previous subprocedure), the tilt pivot point is sensitive to objective-
lens focus.
5.5 Dynamic conical dark field pivot point HM (STEM systems only)
Purpose: Align beam tilt pivot point = make sure that the beam does not shift when it is tilted.
Importance: ESSENTIAL for keeping the beam centered during dynamic conical dark-field imaging.
Method: A tilting beam must remain centered on the specimen (so the tilt pivot point coincides with the
specimen). The tilt wobble done by the microscope should give no beam shift, so only one spot should
be visible in the image.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps :
• One preparation step for setting up the image.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Notes:
• The AC beam tilt pivot point is sensitive to objective-lens focus.
• The AC beam tilt pivot point is used only for Dynamic Conical Dark Field.
• Because TIA drives the beam in Dynamic Conical Dark Field, TIA must be running during execution
of this alignment.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 24
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Purpose: Make sure that the beam tilt describes a circle as seen in diffraction.
Importance: ESSENTIAL for proper dynamic conical dark-field imaging.
Method: A tilting beam must remain centered on the specimen (so the tilt pivot point coincides with the
specimen). The tilt wobble done by the microscope should give no beam shift, so only one spot should
be visible in the image.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of five steps :
• One preparation step for setting up the image.
• One step in which the diffraction pattern is centered.
• One step in which the static beam tilt on the AC coils is adjusted until the beam is at the 4 cm circle.
• Two steps in which the beam scans around and the distortion is adjusted until the movement is
circular. The major part of the distortion should be corrected in the first step, any residual distortion in
the second. Repeat the last two steps as often as needed.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps:
• One preparation step for setting up the image.
• A step in which the rotation center is aligned.
Notes:
• The rotation center is an alignment that is based on a beam tilt, hence its appearance in the Beam
alignment procedure and not the Image alignment procedure.
• For proper high-resolution alignment of the objective lens on 200 and 300 kV instruments, rotation
center is only suitable as a first step. Coma-free alignment should be used as the final objective-lens
alignment.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps :
• In the first step the beam is shifted to the center of the screen. For this purpose the alignment value
is used while the user value is reset to zero.
• In the second step, the direction of the beam shift is aligned with respect to the movement by the
trackball. When the trackball is moved from left to right, the beam should also move from left to right
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 25
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
on the screen. If the beam moves in a different direction, adjust the direction with the Multifunction Y
knob.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps:
• In the first step the beam is accurately centered on the screen.
• In the second step, the beam is shifted with Multifunction X to the 40 mm circle. Then the displayed
value for the beam shift is adjusted to the correct value with the Multifunction Y.
• The third and fourth steps repeat the first and second steps but now for the Y direction of the beam
shift.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of five steps:
• The first step is a preparation step for the diffraction mode.
• In the second step the diffraction pattern must be centered accurately (on the center of the viewing
screen or the tip of the beam stop).
• In the third step, the beam is tilted (this is, the diffraction pattern is shifted) with Multifunction X to
bring a ring to the center and the beam tilt value is adjusted with Multifunction Y to the correct value.
• The fourth and fifth steps repeat the procedure of the second and third steps for the Y diffraction
shift.
Description
The beam tilt is converted through the calibration procedure into to physically meaningful units. The
beam tilt can be read off in the flap-out of the Alignment Control Panel and is used in the Dark Field
Control Panel.
5.11 Dynamic conical dark field beam tilt calibration HM (STEM systems only)
Purpose: Calibrate the AC beam tilt (dynamic conical dark field) to physically meaningful values.
Importance: ESSENTIAL for meaningful beam tilt values in dynamic conical dark field and for ensuring
a match between static and dynamic conical dark field.
Method: Tilt the beam and adjust the displayed value of the beam tilt using Multifunction X,Y.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 26
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps :
• The first step is a preparation step for the diffraction mode.
• In the second step the diffraction pattern must be centered accurately (on the center of the viewing
screen or the tip of the beam stop).
• In the third step, the beam is tilted (this is, the diffraction pattern is shifted) with Multifunction X to
bring a ring to the center and the beam tilt value is adjusted with Multifunction Y to the correct value.
Description
The beam tilt is converted through the calibration procedure into to physically meaningful units. The
beam tilt can be read off in the flap-out of the Alignment Control Panel and is used in the Dark Field
Control Panel.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps:
• One preparation step in which the beam is focused for spot size 3.
• A step in which all spot sizes are focused.
Note: The condenser system (C1 and C2 lenses) is normalized when the spot size is changed to make
the spot setting better reproducible.
Description
The Intensity (C2 lens) and spot size (C1 lens) settings are not independent. In order to give the same
effect for all spot sizes, the Intensity is changed whenever spot size is changed. In addition to the
preprogrammed changes, individual instruments differ slightly in their relation between C1 and C2. The
spot size-intensity calibration allows adjustment for this individual behavior. For the Intensity Zoom and
Intensity Limit functions this procedure defines the Intensity settings at which the beam is focused, which
is essential for proper operation of these functions.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 27
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Method:
C2 aperture centering:
• Focus spot and center it on the screen
• Turn INTENSITY overfocus (clockwise)
• Center aperture until illuminated area is symmetrical around the screen center.
Eucentric height: with the CompuStage switch on the Alpha wobbler and minimize image movement by
changing the Z height.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps:
• Two preparation steps for setting up the image and diffraction pattern, respectively.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Note: Diffraction focus. The Intensity setting is preset to a fixed value that gives a parallel incident beam
which in turn should give a spot diffraction pattern. If the pattern is not focused, it should be focused with
the diffraction lens (FOCUS), not Intensity.
Description
The alignment of the pivot points of the image deflection coils is essential to the proper functioning of
many other alignments and calibrations: image shifts, diffraction shifts, detector alignments and
measurement functions.
The image coils pivot points (image shift and diffraction shift) alignment is reasonably insensitive to the
operating conditions and normally needs to be done only once. It is important that the image coils pivot
points are aligned prior to aligning other parts of the microscope where the image coils are used,
otherwise the latter alignments may have to be redone. Alignments where the image coils are used are
those where images or diffraction patterns are moved (image shift, diffraction shift/diffraction alignment).
A common consequence of a diffraction shift that has not been aligned is a mismatch between the image
detail selected with the selected area aperture and the area actually contributing to the diffraction
pattern. When the image coils have not been aligned properly, image and diffraction shift are not
uncoupled and the diffraction shift will also cause an image shift, thereby moving the image detail out of
the selected area aperture.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• A preparation step for setting up the image.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Description
The alignment of the pivot points of the image deflection coils is essential to the proper functioning of
many other alignments and calibrations: image shifts, diffraction shifts, detector alignments and
measurement functions.
The image coils pivot points (image shift and diffraction shift) alignment is reasonably insensitive to the
operating conditions and normally needs to be done only once. It is important that the image coils pivot
points are aligned prior to aligning other parts of the microscope where the image coils are used,
otherwise the latter alignments may have to be redone. Alignments where the image coils are used are
those where images or diffraction patterns are moved (image shift, diffraction shift/diffraction alignment).
Misaligned diffraction shift pivot point. Aligned diffraction shift pivot point.
Procedure
• The alignment procedure consists of two steps:
• A preparation step in which the SA image is focused at an intermediate magnification.
• A step in which the highest SA magnification must be focused.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 29
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
A common consequence of a diffraction shift that has not been aligned is a mismatch between the image
detail selected with the selected area aperture and the area actually contributing to the diffraction
pattern. When the image coils have not been aligned properly, image and diffraction shift are not
uncoupled and the diffraction shift will also cause an image shift, thereby moving the image detail out of
the selected area aperture.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• A preparation step for setting up the image.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
In the preparation step the P1 lens is maximized (with MF-X) to reduce the effective magnification. Still,
the beam (when wobbling in the next two steps) may be difficult to find.
Description
The alignment of the pivot points of the image deflection coils is essential to the proper functioning of
many other alignments and calibrations: image shifts, diffraction shifts, detector alignments and
measurement functions.
The image coils pivot points (image shift and diffraction shift) alignment is reasonably insensitive to the
operating conditions and normally needs to be done only once. It is important that the image coils pivot
points are aligned prior to aligning other parts of the microscope where the image coils are used,
otherwise the latter alignments may have to be redone. Alignments where the image coils are used are
those where images or diffraction patterns are moved (image shift, diffraction shift/diffraction alignment).
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered (with the specimen stage) in the highest SA
magnification.
• A step in which the lowest Mh magnification is focused and aligned relative to the highest SA
magnification.
• A step in which all other Mh magnifications are focused and aligned.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 30
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Notes:
• The magnification system (projector lenses) is normalized when the magnification is changed to
make the image position better reproducible.
• The instruction 'center illumination' with MF-X,Y is correct ! When the magnification is changed from
the highest SA to the lowermost Mh, the beam will remain in the same position but the whole image
may be shifted. Bringing the beam to the center first by shifting the image - not the beam - allows one
to see the image feature and then center it.
Use the following procedure if the beam is not visible at the normal Mh magnification:
• Toggle the MF-X control to the P1 lens (press R2).
• Turn the MF-X knob a bit clock-wise.
• Change the Intensity setting and see if the beam can be found.
• Repeat the previous two steps until the beam is seen. Note that at very much changed P1 setting,
the image is partly blocked by an aperture (the differential pumping aperture between the column and
the projection chamber) so not the whole screen can be illuminated.
• If the image is out of focus, focus it.
• Toggle back to MF-X,Y control to the image shift and center the beam (and image).
• Turn the magnification once up and down (this resets the P1 lens to its proper value).
• Focus and center the image.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two or four steps, dependent on the presence of absence of
Parfocal Magnification Series (last two steps):
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered (with the specimen stage) in the highest SA
magnification.
• A step in which all SA magnifications are aligned relative to the highest SA magnification.
• A preparation step in which the highest SA magnification is focused accurately.
• A step in which all other SA magnifications are focused accurately.
Notes:
• The magnification system (projector lenses) is normalized when the magnification is changed to
make the image position better reproducible.
• The highest SA magnification is the reference image for the whole microscope, with regard to focus
(eucentric focus preset) and image shift.
A common consequence of a diffraction shift that has not been aligned is a mismatch between the image
detail selected with the selected area aperture and the area actually contributing to the diffraction
pattern. When the image coils have not been aligned properly, image and diffraction shift are not
uncoupled and the diffraction shift will also cause an image shift, thereby moving the image detail out of
the selected area aperture.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• A preparation step for setting up the image.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Description
The alignment of the pivot points of the image deflection coils is essential to the proper functioning of
many other alignments and calibrations: image shifts, diffraction shifts, detector alignments and
measurement functions.
The image coils pivot points (image shift and diffraction shift) alignment is reasonably insensitive to the
operating conditions and normally needs to be done only once. It is important that the image coils pivot
points are aligned prior to aligning other parts of the microscope where the image coils are used,
otherwise the latter alignments may have to be redone. Alignments where the image coils are used are
those where images or diffraction patterns are moved (image shift, diffraction shift/diffraction alignment).
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered (with the specimen-stage) in the lowest SA
magnification.
• A step in which the highest Mi magnification is focused and aligned relative to the lowest SA
magnification.
• A step in which all Mi magnifications are aligned relative to the highest Mi magnification.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 32
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Note: The magnification system (projector lenses) is normalized when the magnification is changed to
make the image position better reproducible.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of one step in which a shadow from the aperture (if visible) is moved
so it does no longer obstruct the image.
Notes:
• If an aperture casts a shadow in the image for the lowermost Mi magnification, but this shadow does
not move with the change of the Multifunction knob settings, and instead another aperture comes into
view and starts blocking the beam, the original shadow is not that of the differential pumping
aperture, but of the fixed SA aperture. The latter aperture cannot be "moved" by changing the optics.
• Because of the need to have the beam (which in this case means the diffraction pattern) centered
properly in the differential pumping aperture, it is not possible to change the position of the diffraction
pattern when you enter diffraction from an Mi magnification (because that would ruin this alignment).
In principle you should always go to diffraction from an SA magnification.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of a single step.
Description
The diffraction shift has two components, an alignment value and a variable 'user' value. If properly
aligned, the alignment value will have the diffraction pattern centered on the screen. It then is only
necessary to reset the 'user' value to zero to have the pattern back at the screen center.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• A preparation step in which the image is focused.
• A step in which the reference camera length (~500 mm) is focused and centered.
• A step in which all other camera lengths are focused and centered.
Notes:
• The magnification system (projector lenses) is normalized when the magnification is changed to
make the diffraction pattern position better reproducible.
• For each camera length the focus setting is stored during this alignment.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps :
• A preparation step in which the Mh image is focused.
• A step in which the reference camera length (~500 mm) is focused and centered.
Notes:
• In principle, always go into diffraction from an SA magnification, not from Mh magnification for proper
diffracting conditions.
• For the Mh magnification camera lengths, only a single setting is needed, comparable to the SA
diffraction alignment. The differences between individual camera lengths is handled by the same
settings as done in the SA camera length alignment. The need for a separate value is due to the
separation of the diffraction alignment for Mi on the one hand (used for the cross-over shift) and SA
and Mh.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps:
• In the first step the beam is accurately centered on the screen.
• In the second step, the beam is shifted with Multifunction X to the 40 mm circle. Then the displayed
value for the image shift is adjusted to the correct value with the Multifunction Y.
• The third and fourth steps repeat the first and second steps but now for the Y direction of the image
shift.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 34
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Description
The image shift calibration provides the conversion factor for the image shift used in measuring and for
the beam shift - image shift.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of five steps:
• The first step is a preparation step for the diffraction mode.
• In the second step the diffraction pattern must be centered accurately (on the center of the viewing
screen or the tip of the beam stop).
• In the third step, the diffraction pattern is shifted with Multifunction X to bring a ring to the center and
the diffraction shift (nm value or angle) is adjusted with Multifunction Y to the correct value.
• The fourth step repeats the procedure of the third step for the Y diffraction shift.
Description
The diffraction shift is converted through the calibration procedure into to physically meaningful units
such as Bragg angles and d spacings (in the latter case the Bragg Law formula is used). The diffraction
shift can be read off in the flap-out of the Alignment Control Panel and is used in the Measuring Control
Panel.
Note: This procedure is complicated by the fact that it is not easy to tell how far the beam-shift/image-
shift should be changed. The on-line help file therefore contains a control that indicates the status of the
beam-shift/image-shift, beam coils and image coils.
Using this you change the beam shift-image shift until either:
• the beam is at the screen edge.
• the beam shift-image shift is more than 50% (bar
becomes green) OR one of the coils is more than 80%
(bar becomes red).
Procedure
The calibration procedure consists of six steps:
• In the first step the beam is shifted to the center of the screen. For this purpose the alignment value
is used while the user value is reset to zero. At the same time the image shift is set to zero.
• In the second step, the image shift X is changed until the above control indicates a suitable shift, the
microscope beeps (at the limit of the image shift) or the beam moves off the screen (the latter
typically happens when the calibration has not been done yet).
• In the third step the beam is recentered using the Multifunction X,Y. If the microscope beeped during
the second step, continue, otherwise step back and repeat the second and third steps (so the final
calibration is done with the image shift at its limit).
• The fourth and fifth steps repeat the same procedure as the second and third steps, but this time for
the Y image shift.
• The final step just ensures that the image-beam shift is reset to zero after the procedure is finished.
Description
The Tecnai microscope has a function for image shift where the beam position is automatically
compensated to keep the beam on the area of interest (what is currently seen on the viewing screen).
The beam shift compensation must be calibrated before it will work properly.
Note 1: The off-axis TV camera is located about 7 cm from the center of the viewing screen between W
and WNW (where N is defined as the direction furthest away from the operator). The image can be
shifted to the TV camera by selecting manual mode and the Off-axis TV in the Detector Configuration
Control Panel.
Note 2: The shift of the image to the off-axis TV uses the image shift coils below the objective lens. The
effect of these coils is magnified by the magnification system. The highest magnifications therefore give
no problems but some of the lowermost magnifications may be out of reach of the range of these coils.
In addition, any other use of these coils (e.g. for the Image-Beam shift) will also affect the range of
attainable magnifications.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps :
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered on the viewing screen (with the specimen
stage) in the highest SA magnification.
• A step in which the highest SA magnification is centered on the off-axis TV.
• A step in which the Mh magnifications are centered on the off-axis TV.
• A step in which all other SA magnifications are centered on the off-axis TV (as far as attainable, see
Note 2 above).
Note 1: The off-axis TV camera is located about 7 cm from the center of the viewing screen between W
and WNW (where N is defined as the direction furthest away from the operator). The diffraction pattern
can be shifted to the TV camera by selecting manual mode and the Off-axis TV in the Detector
Configuration Control Panel.
Note 2: The shift of the diffraction pattern to the off-axis TV uses the image shift coils below the objective
lens. The effect of these coils is magnified by the magnification system. The highest camera lengths
therefore give no problems but some of the lowermost camera lengths may be out of reach of the range
of these coils. In addition, any other use of these coils (e.g. for the Image-Beam shift) will also affect the
range of attainable camera lengths.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps :
• A preparation step in which the image is focused in the SA magnification range.
• A preparation step in which the diffraction pattern is centered on the viewing screen.
• A step in which the diffraction pattern is centered on the off-axis TV.
• A step in which all other camera lengths are centered on the off-axis TV (as far as attainable, see
Note 2 above).
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 37
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
7 Beam LM Procedure
Method:
C2 aperture centering:
• Focus spot and center it on the screen
• Turn INTENSITY overfocus (clockwise)
• Center aperture until illuminated area is symmetrical around the screen center
Eucentric height: with the CompuStage switch on the Alpha wobbler and minimize image movement by
changing the Z height.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps:
• Two preparation steps for setting up the image and diffraction pattern, respectively.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Notes:
• The shift 'wobble' may have one beam position blocked by the specimen. If no second beam is
visible when turning MF-X, then (re)move the specimen.
• Diffraction focus: in LAD the objective lens (which is here the focusing lens) is switched to fixed
setting. To focus the diffraction pattern to a spot pattern the Intensity should be used, not the Focus.
Only if the pattern cannot be focused with the Intensity should the Focus knob (objective lens) be
used. In the latter case, turn the Intensity completely overfocus (clockwise), then focus the LAD
pattern with the Focus knob.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• One preparation step for setting up the image.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps:
• One preparation step for setting up the image.
• A step in which the rotation center is aligned.
Note: The rotation center is an alignment that is based on a beam tilt, hence its appearance in the Beam
alignment procedure and not the Image alignment procedure.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps :
• In the first step the beam is shifted to the center of the screen. For this purpose the alignment value
is used while the user value is reset to zero.
• In the second step, the direction of the beam shift is aligned with respect to the movement by the
trackball. When the trackball is moved from left to right, the beam should also move from left to right
on the screen. If the beam moves in a different direction, adjust the direction with the Multifunction Y
knob.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps:
• In the first step the beam is accurately centered on the screen.
• In the second step, the beam is shifted with Multifunction X to the 40 mm circle. Then the displayed
value for the beam shift is adjusted to the correct value with the Multifunction Y.
• The third and fourth steps repeat the first and second steps but now for the Y direction of the beam
shift.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of five steps:
• The first step is a preparation step for the diffraction mode.
• In the second step the diffraction pattern must be centered accurately (on the center of the viewing
screen or the tip of the beam stop).
• In the third step, the beam is tilted (this is, the diffraction pattern is shifted) with Multifunction X to
bring a ring to the center and the beam tilt value is adjusted with Multifunction Y to the correct value.
• The fourth and fifth steps repeat the procedure of the second and third steps for the Y diffraction
shift.
Description
The beam tilt is converted through the calibration procedure into to physically meaningful units. The
beam tilt can be read off in the flap-out of the Alignment Control Panel and is used in the Dark Field
Control Panel.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps:
• One preparation step in which the beam is focused for spot size 3.
• A step in which all spot sizes are focused.
Note: The condenser system (C1 and C2 lenses) is normalized when the spot size is changed to make
the spot setting better reproducible.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 40
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Description
The Intensity (C2 lens) and spot size (C1 lens) settings are not independent. In order to give the same
effect for all spot sizes, the Intensity is changed whenever spot size is changed. In addition to the
preprogrammed changes, individual instruments differ slightly in their relation between C1 and C2. The
spot size-intensity calibration allows adjustment for this individual behavior. For the Intensity Zoom and
Intensity Limit functions this procedure defines the Intensity settings at which the beam is focused, which
is essential for proper operation of these functions.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 41
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
8 Image LM Procedure
Method:
C2 aperture centering:
• Focus spot and center it on the screen
• Turn INTENSITY overfocus (clockwise)
• Center aperture until illuminated area is symmetrical around the screen center
Eucentric height: with the CompuStage switch on the Alpha wobbler and minimize image movement by
changing the Z height.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps:
• Two preparation steps for setting up the image and diffraction pattern, respectively.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Note: Diffraction focus: in LAD the objective lens (which is here the focusing lens) is switched to fixed
setting. To focus the diffraction pattern to a spot pattern the Intensity should be used, not the Focus.
Only if the pattern cannot be focused with the Intensity should the Focus knob (objective lens) be used.
In the latter case, turn the Intensity completely overfocus (clockwise), then focus the LAD pattern with
the Focus knob.
Description
The alignment of the pivot points of the image deflection coils is essential to the proper functioning of
many other alignments and calibrations: image shifts, diffraction shifts, detector alignments and
measurement functions.
The image coils pivot points (image shift and diffraction shift) alignment is reasonably insensitive to the
operating conditions and normally needs to be done only once. It is important that the image coils pivot
points are aligned prior to aligning other parts of the microscope where the image coils are used,
otherwise the latter alignments may have to be redone. Alignments where the image coils are used are
those where images or diffraction patterns are moved (image shift, diffraction shift/diffraction alignment).
Method: Minimize the movement of the image. The microscope 'wobbles' the LAD diffraction shift which
should cause no image shift.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• A preparation step for setting up the image.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Description
The alignment of the pivot points of the image deflection coils is essential to the proper functioning of
many other alignments and calibrations: image shifts, diffraction shifts, detector alignments and
measurement functions.
The image coils pivot points (image shift and diffraction shift) alignment is reasonably insensitive to the
operating conditions and normally needs to be done only once. It is important that the image coils pivot
points are aligned prior to aligning other parts of the microscope where the image coils are used,
otherwise the latter alignments may have to be redone. Alignments where the image coils are used are
those where images or diffraction patterns are moved (image shift, diffraction shift/diffraction alignment).
8.4 LM images
Purpose: Aligning the LM-magnification image with the M image and all LM image magnifications with
each other.
Importance: CONVENIENCE for finding the same image feature centered when crossing from M to LM
(or vice versa) and within the LM range.
Method: Focus the image (LM magnification) and center the recognizable image feature with MF-X,Y.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered (with the specimen stage) in the lowest Mi
magnification.
• A step in which the whole LM range is aligned with the Mi magnification.
• A step in which all LM magnifications are aligned relative to the highest LM magnification.
Note: The magnification system (projector lenses) is normalized when the magnification is changed to
make the image position better reproducible.
Description
The alignment uses two different values:
• One value determines the shift of the whole LM range relative to the lowermost Mi magnification (and
is thus a shift of the whole LM range)
• The other values determine the shifts between individual LM magnifications (defined as the shift
between a particular magnification and the highest LM magnification).
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of a single step.
Description
The diffraction shift has two components, an alignment value and a variable 'user' value. If properly
aligned, the alignment value will have the diffraction pattern centered on the screen. It then is only
necessary to reset the 'user' value to zero to have the pattern back at the screen center.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps:
• In the first step the beam is accurately centered on the screen.
• In the second step, the beam is shifted with Multifunction X to the 40 mm circle. Then the displayed
value for the image shift is adjusted to the correct value with the Multifunction Y.
• The third and fourth steps repeat the first and second steps but now for the Y direction of the image
shift.
Description
The image shift calibration provides the conversion factor for the image shift used in measuring and for
the beam shift - image shift.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of five steps:
• The first step is a preparation step for the diffraction mode.
• In the second step the diffraction pattern must be centered accurately (on the center of the viewing
screen or the tip of the beam stop).
• In the third step, the diffraction pattern is shifted with Multifunction X to bring a ring to the center and
the diffraction shift (nm value or angle) is adjusted with Multifunction Y to the correct value.
• The fourth step repeats the procedure of the third step for the Y diffraction shift.
Description
The diffraction shift is converted through the calibration procedure into to physically meaningful units
such as Bragg angles and d spacings (in the latter case the Bragg Law formula is used). The diffraction
shift can be read off in the flap-out of the Alignment Control Panel and is used in the Measuring Control
Panel.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 44
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Note: This procedure is complicated by the fact that it is not easy to tell how far the beam-shift/image-
shift should be changed. The on-line help file therefore contains a control that indicates the status of the
beam-shift/image-shift, beam coils and image coils.
Using this you change the beam shift-image shift until either:
• the beam is at the screen edge.
• the beam shift-image shift is more than 50% (bar
becomes green) OR one of the coils is more than 80%
(bar becomes red).
Procedure
The calibration procedure consists of six steps:
• In the first step the beam is shifted to the center of the screen. For this purpose the alignment value
is used while the user value is reset to zero. At the same time the image shift is set to zero.
• In the second step, the image shift X is changed until the above control indicates a suitable shift, the
microscope beeps (at the limit of the image shift) or the beam moves off the screen (the latter
typically happens when the calibration has not been done yet).
• In the third step the beam is recentered using the Multifunction X,Y. If the microscope beeped during
the second step, continue, otherwise step back and repeat the second and third steps (so the final
calibration is done with the image shift at its limit).
• The fourth and fifth steps repeat the same procedure as the second and third steps, but this time for
the Y image shift.
• The final step just ensures that the image-beam shift is reset to zero after the procedure is finished.
Description
The Tecnai microscope has a function for image shift where the beam position is automatically
compensated to keep the beam on the area of interest (what is currently seen on the viewing screen).
The beam shift compensation must be calibrated before it will work properly.
For a schematic diagram of the beam shift-image shift, see section 6.16.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 45
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Note 1: The off-axis TV camera is located about 7 cm from the center of the viewing screen between W
and WNW (where N is defined as the direction furthest away from the operator). The image can be
shifted to the TV camera by selecting manual mode and the Off-axis TV in the Detector Configuration
Control Panel.
Note 2: The shift of the image to the off-axis TV uses the image shift coils below the objective lens. The
effect of these coils is magnified by the magnification system. The highest magnifications therefore give
no problems but some of the lowermost magnifications may be out of reach of the range of these coils.
In addition, any other use of these coils (e.g. for the Image-Beam shift) will also affect the range of
attainable magnifications.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps :
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered on the viewing screen (with the specimen
stage) in the highest LM magnification.
• A step in which the highest LM magnification is centered on the off-axis TV.
• A step in which all other LM magnifications are centered on the off-axis TV (as far as attainable, see
Note 2 above).
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 46
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Method:
C2 aperture centering:
• Focus spot and center it on the screen
• Turn INTENSITY overfocus (clockwise)
• Center aperture until illuminated area is symmetrical around the screen center
Eucentric height: with the CompuStage switch on the Alpha wobbler and minimize image movement by
changing the Z height.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps:
• Two preparation steps for setting up the image and diffraction pattern, respectively.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Notes:
• The shift 'wobble' may have one beam position blocked by the specimen. If no second beam is
visible when turning MF-X, then (re)move the specimen.
• Diffraction focus: the Intensity setting is preset to a fixed value that should give a (nearly) parallel
incident beam which in turn should give a spot diffraction pattern. In order to keep the diffraction
focus the same as in the microprobe mode (where it can be set more reliably), the pattern should be
focused (after it has been focused properly in microprobe) with the Intensity, not Focus.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• One preparation step for setting up the image.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Note: Unlike the shift pivot point (previous steps), the tilt pivot point is sensitive to objective-lens focus.
9.4 Dynamic conical dark field pivot point Nanoprobe (STEM systems only)
Purpose: Align beam tilt pivot point = make sure that the beam does not shift when it is tilted.
Importance: ESSENTIAL for keeping the beam centered during dynamic conical dark-field imaging.
Method: A tilting beam must remain centered on the specimen (so the tilt pivot point coincides with the
specimen). The tilt wobble done by the microscope should give no beam shift, so only one spot should
be visible in the image.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps :
• One preparation step for setting up the image.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Notes:
• The AC beam tilt pivot point is sensitive to objective-lens focus.
• The AC beam tilt pivot point is used only for Dynamic Conical Dark Field.
• Because TIA drives the beam in Dynamic Conical Dark Field, TIA must be running during execution
of this alignment.
9.5 Dynamic conical dark field distortion Nanoprobe (STEM systems only)
Purpose: Make sure that the beam tilt describes a circle as seen in diffraction.
Importance: ESSENTIAL for proper dynamic conical dark-field imaging.
Method: A tilting beam must remain centered on the specimen (so the tilt pivot point coincides with the
specimen). The tilt wobble done by the microscope should give no beam shift, so only one spot should
be visible in the image.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps :
• One preparation step for setting up the image.
• One step in which the diffraction pattern is centered.
• One step in which the static beam tilt on the AC coils is adjusted until the beam is at the 4 cm circle.
• A final step in which the beam scans around and the distortion is adjusted until the movement is
circular.
smallest step (focus step 1), focus the beam (Intensity) and increase the wobble (focus step). Adjust the
rotation center until the beam expands and contracts concentrically.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps:
• One preparation step for setting up the image.
• A step in which the rotation center is aligned.
Note: The rotation center is an alignment that is based on a beam tilt, hence its appearance in the Beam
alignment procedure and not the Image alignment procedure.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps :
• In the first step the beam is shifted to the center of the screen. For this purpose the alignment value
is used while the user value is reset to zero.
• In the second step, the direction of the beam shift is aligned with respect to the movement by the
trackball. When the trackball is moved from left to right, the beam should also move from left to right
on the screen. If the beam moves in a different direction, adjust the direction with the Multifunction Y
knob.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps:
• In the first step the beam is accurately centered on the screen.
• In the second step, the beam is shifted with Multifunction X to the 40 mm circle. Then the displayed
value for the beam shift is adjusted to the correct value with the Multifunction Y.
• The third and fourth steps repeat the first and second steps but now for the Y direction of the beam
shift.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of five steps:
• The first step is a preparation step for the diffraction mode.
• In the second step the diffraction pattern must be centered accurately (on the center of the viewing
screen or the tip of the beam stop).
• In the third step, the beam is tilted (this is, the diffraction pattern is shifted) with Multifunction X to
bring a ring to the center and the beam tilt value is adjusted with Multifunction Y to the correct value.
• The fourth and fifth steps repeat the procedure of the second and third steps for the Y diffraction
shift.
Description
The beam tilt is converted through the calibration procedure into to physically meaningful units. The
beam tilt can be read off in the flap-out of the Alignment Control Panel and is used in the Dark Field
Control Panel.
9.10 Dynamic conical dark field beam tilt calibration Nanoprobe (STEM systems only)
Purpose: Calibrate the AC beam tilt (dynamic conical dark field) to physically meaningful values.
Importance: ESSENTIAL for meaningful beam tilt values in dynamic conical dark field and for ensuring
a match between static and dynamic conical dark field.
Method: Tilt the beam and adjust the displayed value of the beam tilt using Multifunction X,Y.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps :
• The first step is a preparation step for the diffraction mode.
• In the second step the diffraction pattern must be centered accurately (on the center of the viewing
screen or the tip of the beam stop).
• In the third step, the beam is tilted (this is, the diffraction pattern is shifted) with Multifunction X to
bring a ring to the center and the beam tilt value is adjusted with Multifunction Y to the correct value.
Description
The beam tilt is converted through the calibration procedure into to physically meaningful units. The
beam tilt can be read off in the flap-out of the Alignment Control Panel and is used in the Dark Field
Control Panel.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 50
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps:
• One preparation step in which the beam is focused for spot size 3.
• A step in which all spot sizes are focused.
Note: The condenser system (C1 and C2 lenses) is normalized when the spot size is changed to make
the spot setting better reproducible.
Description
The Intensity (C2 lens) and spot size (C1 lens) settings are not independent. In order to give the same
effect for all spot sizes, the Intensity is changed whenever spot size is changed. In addition to the
preprogrammed changes, individual instruments differ slightly in their relation between C1 and C2. The
spot size-intensity calibration allows adjustment for this individual behaviour. For the Intensity Zoom and
Intensity Limit functions this procedure defines the Intensity settings at which the beam is focused, which
is essential for proper operation of these functions.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 51
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps:
• A preparation step in which the SA image is focused at an intermediate magnification.
• A step in which the highest SA magnification must be focused.
Note: Although the objective lens is at a different setting for a focused nanoprobe image relative to the
focus setting for a microprobe image, this does not imply that the microscope imaging system is altered
in some way. The difference between the objective-lens settings is caused by the minicondenser lens
whose setting has an effect on the magnetic field of the objective lens, so that in nanoprobe a slightly
higher current is needed to obtain the same electron-optical effect as in microprobe.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• A preparation step in which the image is focused for the highest SA magnification.
• A step in which the lowermost Mh magnification is focused.
• A step in which all other Mh magnifications are focused.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• A preparation step in which the lowermost SA magnification is focused.
• A step in which the highest Mi magnification is focused.
• A step in which all Mi magnifications are focused.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of a single step.
Description
The diffraction shift has two components, an alignment value and a variable 'user' value. If properly
aligned, the alignment value will have the diffraction pattern centered on the screen. It then is only
necessary to reset the 'user' value to zero to have the pattern back at the screen center.
The diffraction pattern alignment setting is the only setting that is separate for microprobe and
nanoprobe modes. The user diffraction shift as well as the diffraction alignments between the different
camera lengths are common for the two modes.
Procedure
The calibration procedure consists of six steps:
• In the first step the beam is shifted to the center of the screen. For this purpose the alignment value
is used while the user value is reset to zero. At the same time the image shift is set to zero.
• In the second step, the image shift X is changed until the above control indicates a suitable shift, the
microscope beeps (at the limit of the image shift) or the beam moves off the screen (the latter
typically happens when the calibration has not been done yet).
• In the third step the beam is recentered using the Multifunction X,Y. If the microscope beeped during
the second step, continue, otherwise step back and repeat the second and third steps (so the final
calibration is done with the image shift at its limit).
• The fourth and fifth steps repeat the same procedure as the second and third steps, but this time for
the Y image shift.
• The final step just ensures that the image-beam shift is reset to zero after the procedure is finished.
Description
The Tecnai microscope has a function for image shift where the beam position is automatically
compensated to keep the beam on the area of interest (what is currently seen on the viewing screen).
The beam shift compensation must be calibrated before it will work properly.
For a schematic diagram of the beam shift-image shift, see section 6.16.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 53
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
11 Stigmator Procedure
The stigmator current wobble will result in two images, which will overlap when the stigmators are
aligned correctly. It is advisable to use a specimen with relatively large, easily recognized image detail.
The stigmator current wobble will result in two images, which will overlap when the stigmators are
aligned correctly. It is advisable to use a specimen with relatively large, easily recognized image detail.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 55
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
12 HM-STEM Procedure
For STEM alignment a number of pre-conditions must be met, otherwise no proper alignment can be
done:
First, the specimen must be at the eucentric height. To do this properly, go to the Nanoprobe mode and
press the Eucentric Focus button. The objective lens current is now set to the proper value for
Nanoprobe (provided the SA objective preset has been aligned properly). Then bring the specimen into
focus with the Z height of the specimen stage. (By doing it this way you will attain a more reproducible
setting than by using the alpha wobbler.)
Third, Tem Imaging & Analysis (TIA) must be running when for STEM alignment.
Fourth, the settings for the Preview view mode must be set so as to give an image size of 512x512
pixels and a frame time of approximately 6 seconds.
Finally, the Bright-Field (BF) detector must be selected (and all other detectors deselected) in the
STEM Detector Control Panel.
Important:
• The specimen must be at the eucentric height. To do this properly, go to the Nanoprobe mode and
press the Eucentric Focus button. The objective lens current is now set to the proper value for
Nanoprobe (provided the SA objective preset has been aligned properly). Then bring the specimen
into focus with the Z height of the specimen stage. (By doing it this way you will attain a more
reproducible setting than by using the alpha wobbler.)
• During STEM alignment TIA (Tem Imaging & Analysis) must be running.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 56
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps :
• A first step (using the Nanoprobe mode settings) in which the specimen is brought to focus (the
eucentric height, which should have been aligned in the Nanoprobe image alignment previously) by
adjusting the Z height.
• A second step in which the image is focused (setting the objective-lens preset for HM-STEM) and
next the beam is focused (setting the intensity preset). If necessary stigmate the image (if the image
is astigmatic, the beam will also appear astigmatic but this is due to the image, not to the shape of
the beam itself, and if you "stigmate" the beam with an astigmatic image, you will actually make the
beam (and thus the STEM image) astigmatic. Note: Since we want to have the same objective-lens
setting in Nanoprobe and HM-STEM, the alternative to setting it by looking at the image is to make
sure you can observe the objective-lens excitation (%; e.g. by dragging it into a status display panel
or popping up the System status) and making the value in step two the same as in step one.
• A third step in which the microscope is switched to diffraction and the diffraction pattern is centered.
• A fourth similar to step three but now for all spot sizes (except 3 which has been done already).
Description
In principle there is no a priori requirement in scanning to define the objective-lens setting as the same
as that in TEM imaging. The only requirement for STEM imaging is that the beam can be focused on the
specimen, which can be done through a range of objective-lens/intensity setting combinations. In
practice it is, however, not very convenient to use an objective-lens setting that differs appreciably from
that in TEM imaging for various reasons:
• Some of the settings of Nanoprobe and STEM imaging are shared (they use the same setting;
change one in Nanoprobe and the change will work through in STEM, and the other way around). An
example is the alignment of the diffraction pattern. Some of these settings are quite sensitive to
objective-lens current so it would be necessary to re-align the Nanoprobe and STEM upon switching
from one to the other. It would be possible to decouple these settings (make them different for
Nanoprobe and STEM) but that would increase the complexity of the alignments.
• If Nanoprobe and STEM have the same objective-lens setting, one can inspect the beam (e.g. for
stigmation) in STEM by stopping the scan, moving the beam to the center, and switching to (TEM)
imaging (out of diffraction). The beam is now visible while the TEM image is also in focus. If the
objective-lens setting was different, the beam would look defocused in TEM imaging (but it is focused
on the specimen if the STEM image is in focus). Changing the focus (objective-lens setting) to obtain
a focused beam is possible, but this leads to an objective-lens setting different from that actually
used in STEM which in turn leads to changes in astigmatism, rotation center, etc., so it is never
possible to be sure that the beam is properly set when changing back to STEM imaging.
Important:
• The specimen must be at the eucentric height. To do this properly, go to the Nanoprobe mode and
press the Eucentric Focus button. The objective lens current is now set to the proper value for
Nanoprobe (provided the SA objective preset has been aligned properly). Then bring the specimen
into focus with the Z height of the specimen stage. (By doing it this way you will attain a more
reproducible setting than by using the alpha wobbler.)
• During STEM alignment TIA (Tem Imaging & Analysis) must be running.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• One preparation step for setting up the image.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Note: The tilt pivot point set in this subprocedure is the same as the Nanoprobe beam-tilt pivot point.
The alignment is repeated here to ensure that the rotation center alignment in STEM can be done
properly.
Important:
• The specimen must be at the eucentric height. To do this properly, go to the Nanoprobe mode and
press the Eucentric Focus button. The objective lens current is now set to the proper value for
Nanoprobe (provided the SA objective preset has been aligned properly). Then bring the specimen
into focus with the Z height of the specimen stage. (By doing it this way you will attain a more
reproducible setting than by using the alpha wobbler.)
• During STEM alignment TIA (Tem Imaging & Analysis) must be running.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of five steps:
• A preparation step in which the beam is focused. The image must be focused by setting the
specimen to the proper eucentric height (by now the eucentric focus for STEM should have been
defined).
• A second step in which the beam is (temporarily - for this alignment procedure) defocused.
• A third step in which the image movement is minimized.
• A fourth step in which the beam is centered and focused.
• A fifth step in which the condenser aperture is aligned properly.
Note: If the aperture required considerable re-alignment, one should step back through the procedure
and repeat from step 2 onwards.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 58
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Important:
• The specimen must be at the eucentric height. To do this properly, go to the Nanoprobe mode and
press the Eucentric Focus button. The objective lens current is now set to the proper value for
Nanoprobe (provided the SA objective preset has been aligned properly). Then bring the specimen
into focus with the Z height of the specimen stage. (By doing it this way you will attain a more
reproducible setting than by using the alpha wobbler.)
• During STEM alignment TIA (Tem Imaging & Analysis) must be running.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of five steps:
• A preparation step in normal SA (Microprobe mode) in which the image is focused.
• A second step in SA diffraction (Microprobe mode) which the diffraction pattern is focused and
centered. Here the pattern is the TEM pattern which is a spot pattern.
• A third step in which the diffraction focus in STEM (Nanoprobe mode) is centered (NOT focused!).
Now it is the STEM (convergent-beam) pattern which has disks, not spots. The correct focus for the
pattern is defined in the previous step.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned ( the Multifunction X knob sets the pivot
points, the Multifunction Y the perpendicular correction).
Perform this alignment carefully. Pivot-point misalignment can have considerable effect on the STEM
magnification calibration, and perpendicular correction misalignment can lead to distortion in the STEM
image.
Important:
• The specimen must be at the eucentric height. To do this properly, go to the Nanoprobe mode and
press the Eucentric Focus button. The objective lens current is now set to the proper value for
Nanoprobe (provided the SA objective preset has been aligned properly). Then bring the specimen
into focus with the Z height of the specimen stage. (By doing it this way you will attain a more
reproducible setting than by using the alpha wobbler.)
• During STEM alignment TIA (Tem Imaging & Analysis) must be running.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps:
• In the first step the normal TEM is focused and the beam is centered.
• In the second step the normal TEM diffraction pattern is focused properly (focus the diffraction
pattern to a spot pattern on the basis of a preset intensity setting).
• In the third step, the microscope is switched to STEM and the STEM diffraction pattern (now a disk
pattern) is centered.
• In the fourth step, each camera length is centered on the screen and focused.
Notes:
• This alignment affects the same diffraction alignment parameter as the diffraction alignment for
nanoprobe. The focusing of the individual camera lengths is the same as in the HM Image camera
lengths procedure. These alignments are repeated in this HM-STEM alignment subprocedure for
convenience.
• The focusing of the camera lengths is repeated here because it can be done more accurately in
STEM. Once we know that the beam-shift pivot points are correct, we know that any movement of
the diffraction pattern must be due to a diffraction focus that is away from the back-focal plane.
Focusing can thus be done by minimizing movement.
• For the movement of the diffraction pattern in STEM, it is important to make a distinction between
any movement seen during the 'normal' scan and during the flyback (the rapid beam movement back
to the beginning of the next scan line). During the flyback the beam often cannot keep up due to the
inertia in the optics and the diffraction pattern may make an irregular swing. During the flyback the
diffraction pattern typically has much less intensity than during the normal scan, producing an
irregular line of lower intensity. The flyback should be ignored when it comes to minimizing
movement.
Important:
• The specimen must be at the eucentric height. To do this properly, go to the Nanoprobe mode and
press the Eucentric Focus button. The objective lens current is now set to the proper value for
Nanoprobe (provided the SA objective preset has been aligned properly). Then bring the specimen
into focus with the Z height of the specimen stage. (By doing it this way you will attain a more
reproducible setting than by using the alpha wobbler.)
• During STEM alignment TIA (Tem Imaging & Analysis) must be running.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 60
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• In the first step the diffraction pattern (for a camera length of ~500mm) is centered on the viewing
screen with the screen down.
• In the second step the off-axis shift is activated and the same camera length is centered on the
STEM detectors, first by moving the pattern to the approximate position with the screen down, then
with the screen up by looking at the detector signal.
• In the final step, a number of camera lengths is centered on the detector. Which camera lengths are
to be aligned is somewhat instrument-dependent (see below).
Always check that the pattern is centered properly for the whole image (if part of it is dark, the alignment
is not correct).
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 61
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Notes:
• It is useful to activate the Scope function on the STEM Imaging Control Panel. This function displays
the detector signal levels on a fixed scale and thereby makes it easier to judge the alignment (the
STEM image has its contrast and brightness re-adjusted after an image has been collected, which
makes it difficult to judge the signal levels from the detector).
• The near-axis position (where the STEM Bright-Field/Dark-Field detector assembly is located) is at
~30 mm from the screen center to the ENE (slightly away from the screen center to the top right).
This physical position is of course the same for all camera lengths but the actual diffraction shifts
required to get there depend on the camera length (which magnifies the diffraction shift), so the
settings are dependent on the camera length.
• Because hysteresis can have considerable effect on the diffraction-pattern position, you should use
the normalization facility whenever the optical conditions have changed (the automatic
normalizations take care of this, so it is advised to keep them enabled).
• Some of the lowermost camera lengths are too small to reach the near-axis detector (typically the
camera length must be at least 90 mm). There is no point in trying to align these. Simply go on to the
next camera length.
• Some of the large camera lengths will overlap the bright-field disk onto the dark-field detector and are
therefore of little use. You can skip these camera lengths as well.
• When the camera length changes, the signal on the detectors will change, so it will be necessary to
adjust contrast and brightness. For this purpose, the alignment procedure makes it easy to switch to
detector control by pressing R2 (toggle between detector alignment and BF detector control).
• Since the size of the Condenser aperture determines the beam convergence angle, it also
determines the size of the diffraction disks and thereby what the effective camera lengths are for
BF/DF imaging (if the central beam is too large, it will fall on the DF detector). To determine if the
beam doesn't have long tails due to the combined effects of spherical aberration and large
convergence angles (and thus poorly defined spots), you can observe the focused beam in
nanoprobe mode (for the particular condenser aperture). Normally the two smallest condenser
apertures are the ones that are suitable for STEM.
• Some camera lengths are difficult to use at low STEM magnifications because the spherical
aberration of the diffraction lens makes it impossible to have the diffraction remain sufficient
stationary to keep it on the detectors (the pattern described by the central-beam disk looks like a bird
flying, with its wings flapping up and down). Either use higher magnifications or other camera lengths
in those cases.
Important:
• The specimen must be at the eucentric height. To do this properly, go to the Nanoprobe mode and
press the Eucentric Focus button. The objective lens current is now set to the proper value for
Nanoprobe (provided the SA objective preset has been aligned properly). Then bring the specimen
into focus with the Z height of the specimen stage. (By doing it this way you will attain a more
reproducible setting than by using the alpha wobbler.)
• During STEM alignment TIA (Tem Imaging & Analysis) must be running.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 62
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of five steps:
• The first step is a preparation step to center and focus the beam.
• In the second step a STEM image must be made of a cross-grating specimen.
• In the third step the scan rotation is set so the horizontal lines of the cross-grating are horizontal in
the STEM image. The rotation required should be less than ~15° (see note below).
• In the fourth step the distortions are adjusted. Multifunction X controls the trapezoid distortion (the
vertical lines of the grating are not perpendicular to the horizontal lines), while the Multifunction Y
adjusts the relative strengths of the horizontal and vertical scans (rectangular distortion).
• A check on the previous alignment with the image rotated by 90°.
If necessary, iterate steps three and four (see also notes below).
Notes:
• It is essential that the pivot point alignment has been done properly before the distortion adjustment
is done.
• The cross-grating used must be inserted into the microscope in such a way that the horizontal and
vertical lines in the grating are roughly parallel to the horizontal and vertical in the image when the
scan rotation (and the default scan rotation) is close to 0° (within ~15°), otherwise the alignment is
very difficult (requires many iterations). Judge whether the orientation of the cross-grating is suitable
in the second or third step of the procedure. If the orientation is further away from 0°, remove the
specimen holder from the microscope and rotate the specimen until its orientation is suitable for this
alignment.
• The distortions of the image may be judged more easily by drawing a square in the image. Click on
the Image Selection Tool toolbar button in TIA , click in the top left quadrant of the image and drag
the cursor to bottom right while keeping the Shift key on the keyboard pressed down (the latter forces
the image selection drawn to remain square). It is then easy to count the number of cross-grating
squares in the horizontal and vertical dimensions and making sure that the numbers are the same.
• Description
• The deflection coils used in the microscope are not all equal and exactly the same from one
microscope to another. There are therefore alignment procedures that will result in adjustments that
compensate for the variation in the coils. For the deflection coils used in TEM operation, the two
adjustable parameters are the pivot points and the perpendicular correction. The pivot adjusts for the
difference in strength between upper and lower coil (e.g the X coil). The perpendicular correction
adjusts for a rotation between the upper and lower coils (e.g. the upper and lower X coils) by adding
a small deflection to the other lower coil (in that case the lower Y coil). For use in TEM this is
sufficient.
• In STEM, however, additional adjustments are necessary, otherwise image distortions (stretch of one
direction relative to the other and angular distortion) appear. These adjustments correct for the
difference in strength between the X and Y coils and for any deviation from 90° between the X and Y
coils. In principle this can be done both for the upper and lower coils separately but in practice this is
too difficult to align and a single adjustment is sufficient.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps:
• The first step is a preparation step to center and focus the beam on the viewing screen.
• In the second step the beam is scanned so the scan frame is visible on the viewing screen. Change
the rotation correction setting until the scan line (the fast scan direction) goes from left to right (W to
E) on the screen and the scan frame (the slow scan direction) goes from top to bottom.
Note: The movement of the beam during scanning can be described as follows:
• Move the beam to the starting position of the scan image (top left).
• Move the beam along a line (the horizontal direction in the scan image).
• At the end of the line, jump back to the beginning of the line (the flyback) and change the beam
position one line down.
• Repeat this until you reach the bottom of the scan image at the end of the last line.
• Go back to the first step.
The horizontal direction in scanning is referred to as the 'line', while the vertical direction is called the
'frame'. Since the frame is built up line by line, the scan in the direction of the frame is much slower than
that along the lines.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 64
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
13 LM-STEM procedure
For STEM alignment a number of pre-conditions must be met, otherwise no proper alignment can be
done:
• First of all, LM-STEM relies on a proper setting of several optical parameters for which the Gun, LM
Beam and LM Image as well as HM-TEM Image alignment must have been done.
• Second, Tem Imaging & Analysis (TIA) must be running when for STEM alignment.
• Third, the settings for the Preview view mode must be set so as to give an image size of 512x512
pixels and a frame time of approximately 6 seconds and the Search view mode to an image size of
256x256 and a frame time of approximately 3 seconds.
• Finally, the Bright-Field (BF) detector must be selected (and all other detectors deselected) in the
STEM Detector Control Panel.
Note: The diffraction focus (LAD) is LM-STEM is kept as set in LAD (proceed to LM, then to
diffraction). In most cases this should be kept at the default setting. Unless there is a reason to
deviate from this, it is important to make sure the setting is properly done. Go to LM, then LAD
and press the Eucentric focus button to reset the LAD focus to the default value.
Important : During STEM alignment TIA (Tem Imaging & Analysis) must be running.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps :
• A first step in which the image is focused and the beam is centered.
• A second step in which the beam is focused accurately (sets the Intensity setting).
• A third step in which the focusing of the beam is repeated for all spots (except 3 which has already
been done in the previous step).
Method: Shifting a beam parallel to itself means that it must always go through the front-focal point (=
shift pivot point). This plane is conjugate to the back-focal (diffraction) plane and the alignment of the
pivot point can thus be seen in diffraction. The shift 'wobble' done by the microscope should give no
beam tilt, so the two central disks in the diffraction pattern should overlap.
Note: The diffraction focus (LAD) is LM-STEM is kept as set in LAD (proceed to LM, then to
diffraction). In most cases this should be kept at the default setting. Unless there is a reason to
deviate from this, it is important to make sure the setting is properly done. Go to LM, then LAD
and press the Eucentric focus button to reset the LAD focus to the default value.
Important: During STEM alignment TIA (Tem Imaging & Analysis) must be running.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps :
• A first step in LAD diffraction which the diffraction pattern is centered.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned ( the Multifunction X knob sets the pivot
points, the Multifunction Y the perpendicular correction).
Perform this alignment carefully. Pivot-point misalignment can have considerable effect on the STEM
magnification calibration, and perpendicular correction misalignment can lead to distortion in the STEM
image.
Note: Because of the large shifts of the beam (in LM-STEM) it is possible that one of the wobble
directions (or even both) is blocked by the specimen (grid). If this is the case, either move the specimen
around a bit or retract the holder slightly (about 1 cm).
Important: During STEM alignment TIA (Tem Imaging & Analysis) must be running.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of one step in which the LAD diffraction pattern is centered on the
screen.
the screen center (with the off-axis shift not active) and then switch the off-axis shift on in order to have
the pattern properly centered again.
Important: During STEM alignment TIA (Tem Imaging & Analysis) must be running.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps :
• In the first step the diffraction pattern is centered on the viewing screen with the screen down.
• In the second step the off-axis shift is activated and the same camera length is centered on the
STEM detectors, first by moving the pattern to the approximate position with the screen down, then
with the screen up by looking at the detector signal.
Always check that the pattern is centered properly for the whole image (if part of it is dark, the alignment
is not correct).
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 67
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Notes:
• It is useful to activate the Scope function on the STEM Imaging Control Panel. This function displays
the detector signal levels on a fixed scale and thereby makes it easier to judge the alignment (the
STEM image has its contrast and brightness re-adjusted after an image has been collected, which
makes it difficult to judge the signal levels from the detector).
• The near-axis position (where the STEM Bright-Field/Dark-Field detector assembly is located) is at
~30 mm from the screen center to the ENE (slightly away from the screen center to the top right).
This physical position is of course the same for all camera lengths but the actual diffraction shifts
required to get there depend on the camera length (which magnifies the diffraction shift), so the
settings are dependent on the camera length.
• Because hysteresis can have considerable effect on the diffraction-pattern position, you should use
the normalization facility whenever the optical conditions have changed (the automatic
normalizations take care of this, so it is advised to keep them enabled).
Important:
• The specimen must be at the eucentric height. To do this properly, go to the Nanoprobe mode and
press the Eucentric Focus button. The objective lens current is now set to the proper value for
Nanoprobe (provided the SA objective preset has been aligned properly). Then bring the specimen
into focus with the Z height of the specimen stage. (By doing it this way you will attain a more
reproducible setting than by using the alpha wobbler.)
• During STEM alignment TIA (Tem Imaging & Analysis) must be running.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of five steps:
• The first step is a preparation step to center and focus the beam.
• In the second step a STEM image must be made of a cross-grating specimen.
• In the third step the scan rotation is set so the horizontal lines of the cross-grating are horizontal in
the STEM image. The rotation required should be less than ~15° (see note below).
• In the fourth step the distortions are adjusted. Multifunction X controls the trapezoid distortion (the
vertical lines of the grating are not perpendicular to the horizontal lines), while the Multifunction Y
adjusts the relative strengths of the horizontal and vertical scans (rectangular distortion).
• A check on the previous alignment with the image rotated by 90°.
If necessary, iterate steps three and four (see also notes below).
Notes:
• It is essential that the pivot point alignment has been done properly before the distortion adjustment
is done.
• The cross-grating used must be inserted into the microscope in such a way that the horizontal and
vertical lines in the grating are roughly parallel to the horizontal and vertical in the image when the
scan rotation (and the default scan rotation) is close to 0° (within ~15°), otherwise the alignment is
very difficult (requires many iterations). Judge whether the orientation of the cross-grating is suitable
in the second or third step of the procedure. If the orientation is further away from 0°, remove the
specimen holder from the microscope and rotate the specimen until its orientation is suitable for this
alignment.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 68
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
• The distortions of the image may be judged more easily by drawing a square in the image. Click on
the Image Selection Tool toolbar button in TIA , click in the top left quadrant of the image and drag
the cursor to bottom right while keeping the Shift key on the keyboard pressed down (the latter forces
the image selection drawn to remain square). It is then easy to count the number of cross-grating
squares in the horizontal and vertical dimensions and making sure that the numbers are the same.
• Description
• The deflection coils used in the microscope are not all equal and exactly the same from one
microscope to another. There are therefore alignment procedures that will result in adjustments that
compensate for the variation in the coils. For the deflection coils used in TEM operation, the two
adjustable parameters are the pivot points and the perpendicular correction. The pivot adjusts for the
difference in strength between upper and lower coil (e.g the X coil). The perpendicular correction
adjusts for a rotation between the upper and lower coils (e.g. the upper and lower X coils) by adding
a small deflection to the other lower coil (in that case the lower Y coil). For use in TEM this is
sufficient.
• In STEM, however, additional adjustments are necessary, otherwise image distortions (stretch of one
direction relative to the other and angular distortion) appear. These adjustments correct for the
difference in strength between the X and Y coils and for any deviation from 90° between the X and Y
coils. In principle this can be done both for the upper and lower coils separately but in practice this is
too difficult to align and a single adjustment is sufficient.
Important: During STEM alignment TIA (Tem Imaging & Analysis) must be running.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps :
• The first step is a preparation step to center the diffraction pattern.
• In the second step an LM-STEM image is made.
• In the third step the specimen is moved from left to right with the stage and the rotation correction
adjusted until the features in the image also move from left to right.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 69
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
14 HM-EFTEM procedure
Notes:
• Because of the difficulty of aligning the microscope for EFTEM (image/diffraction shift and cross-over
correction are often quite critical, otherwise there is no image or diffraction pattern visible on the
Imaging Filter), the EFTEM alignment procedure contains two parts, one a pre-alignment, where all
alignments are done with the screen down, the other the final alignment where all is aligned on the
Filter itself. Once the microscope has been aligned properly, the pre-alignment should not be
necessary anymore and the final alignment can be used for fine-tuning.
• The EFTEM alignments are in many cases (lower magnifications and camera lengths) sensitive to
hysteresis. It is therefore important to use the normalization facility of the microscope to make image
and diffraction-pattern positions reproducible.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of six steps :
• Two preparation steps for setting up the image in normal and EFTEM modes.
• Two steps for setting up the diffraction pattern in normal and EFTEM modes.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
In EFTEM a misaligned image shift will lead to an apparent diffraction shift when the cross-over
correction is changed.
Note: Diffraction focus. The Intensity setting is preset to a fixed value that gives a parallel incident beam
which in turn should give a spot diffraction pattern. If the pattern is not focused, it should be focused with
the diffraction lens (FOCUS), not Intensity.
Description
The alignment of the pivot points of the image deflection coils is essential to the proper functioning of
many other alignments and calibrations: image shifts, diffraction shifts, detector alignments and
measurement functions.
The image coils pivot points (image shift and diffraction shift) alignment is reasonably insensitive to the
operating conditions and normally needs to be done only once. It is important that the image coils pivot
points are aligned prior to aligning other parts of the microscope where the image coils are used,
otherwise the latter alignments may have to be redone. Alignments where the image coils are used are
those where images or diffraction patterns are moved (image shift, diffraction shift/diffraction alignment).
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 70
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
A common consequence of a diffraction shift that has not been aligned is a mismatch between the image
detail selected with the selected area aperture and the area actually contributing to the diffraction
pattern. When the image coils have not been aligned properly, image and diffraction shift are not
uncoupled and the diffraction shift will also cause an image shift, thereby moving the image detail out of
the selected area aperture. In EFTEM a misaligned diffraction shift will lead to an apparent image shift
when the cross-over correction is changed.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps :
• Two preparation step for setting up the image in normal and EFTEM mode.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Description
The alignment of the pivot points of the image deflection coils is essential to the proper functioning of
many other alignments and calibrations: image shifts, diffraction shifts, detector alignments and
measurement functions.
The image coils pivot points (image shift and diffraction shift) alignment is reasonably insensitive to the
operating conditions and normally needs to be done only once. It is important that the image coils pivot
points are aligned prior to aligning other parts of the microscope where the image coils are used,
otherwise the latter alignments may have to be redone. Alignments where the image coils are used are
those where images or diffraction patterns are moved (image shift, diffraction shift/diffraction alignment).
For images displaying the effect of the alignment, see section 6.3.
A common consequence of a diffraction shift that has not been aligned is a mismatch between the image
detail selected with the selected area aperture and the area actually contributing to the diffraction
pattern. When the image coils have not been aligned properly, image and diffraction shift are not
uncoupled and the diffraction shift will also cause an image shift, thereby moving the image detail out of
the selected area aperture. In EFTEM a misaligned diffraction shift will lead to an apparent image shift
when the cross-over correction is changed.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 71
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps :
• A preparation step for setting up the image in EFTEM mode.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
The preparation here does not contain a step for the normal mode, because it is assumed that that has
already been done for the SA pivot points.
Description
The alignment of the pivot points of the image deflection coils is essential to the proper functioning of
many other alignments and calibrations: image shifts, diffraction shifts, detector alignments and
measurement functions.
The image coils pivot points (image shift and diffraction shift) alignment is reasonably insensitive to the
operating conditions and normally needs to be done only once. It is important that the image coils pivot
points are aligned prior to aligning other parts of the microscope where the image coils are used,
otherwise the latter alignments may have to be redone. Alignments where the image coils are used are
those where images or diffraction patterns are moved (image shift, diffraction shift/diffraction alignment).
For images displaying the effect of the alignment, see section 6.3.
A common consequence of a diffraction shift that has not been aligned is a mismatch between the image
detail selected with the selected area aperture and the area actually contributing to the diffraction
pattern. When the image coils have not been aligned properly, image and diffraction shift are not
uncoupled and the diffraction shift will also cause an image shift, thereby moving the image detail out of
the selected area aperture. In EFTEM a misaligned diffraction shift will lead to an apparent image shift
when the cross-over correction is changed.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps :
• A preparation step for setting up the image in EFTEM mode.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
The preparation here does not contain a step for the normal mode, because it is assumed that that has
already been done for the SA pivot points.
Description
The alignment of the pivot points of the image deflection coils is essential to the proper functioning of
many other alignments and calibrations: image shifts, diffraction shifts, detector alignments and
measurement functions.
The image coils pivot points (image shift and diffraction shift) alignment is reasonably insensitive to the
operating conditions and normally needs to be done only once. It is important that the image coils pivot
points are aligned prior to aligning other parts of the microscope where the image coils are used,
otherwise the latter alignments may have to be redone. Alignments where the image coils are used are
those where images or diffraction patterns are moved (image shift, diffraction shift/diffraction alignment).
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 72
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
For images displaying the effect of the alignment, see section 6.3.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps :
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered (with the specimen stage) in the highest SA
magnification for the normal mode.
• A step in which the highest EFTEM-SA magnification is focused and centered relative to the normal
mode.
• A step in which the lowest EFTEM-Mh magnification is focused and aligned relative to the highest
EFTEM-SA magnification.
• A step in which all other EFTEM-Mh magnifications are focused and aligned.
Note: Because of the difficulty of aligning the microscope for EFTEM (image/diffraction shift and cross-
over correction are often quite critical, otherwise there is no image or diffraction pattern visible on the
Imaging Filter), the EFTEM alignment procedure contains two parts, one a pre-alignment, where all
alignments are done with the screen down, the other the final alignment where all is aligned on the Filter
itself. Once the microscope has been aligned properly, the pre-alignment should not be necessary
anymore and the final alignment can be used for fine-tuning.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of two steps :
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered (with the specimen stage) in the highest SA
magnification for the normal mode.
• A step in which all EFTEM-SA magnifications are aligned relative to the highest normal SA
magnification.
Notes:
• Because of the difficulty of aligning the microscope for EFTEM (image/diffraction shift and cross-over
correction are often quite critical, otherwise there is no image or diffraction pattern visible on the
Imaging Filter), the EFTEM alignment procedure contains two parts, one a pre-alignment, where all
alignments are done with the screen down, the other the final alignment where all is aligned on the
Filter itself. Once the microscope has been aligned properly, the pre-alignment should not be
necessary anymore and the final alignment can be used for fine-tuning.
• In case the cross-over correction is strongly misaligned, it is possible to switch to the cross-over
correction adjustment and back by pressing the R2 button.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 73
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps :
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered (with the specimen stage) in the lowest
EFTEM-SA magnification.
• A step in which the highest EFTEM-Mi magnification is aligned relative to the lowest EFTEM-SA
magnification.
• A step in which all EFTEM-Mi magnifications are aligned to lowest EFTEM-SA magnification.
Notes:
• Because of the difficulty of aligning the microscope for EFTEM (image/diffraction shift and cross-over
correction are often quite critical, otherwise there is no image or diffraction pattern visible on the
Imaging Filter), the EFTEM alignment procedure contains two parts, one a pre-alignment, where all
alignments are done with the screen down, the other the final alignment where all is aligned on the
Filter itself. Once the microscope has been aligned properly, the pre-alignment should not be
necessary anymore and the final alignment can be used for fine-tuning.
• In case the cross-over correction is strongly misaligned, it is possible to switch to the cross-over
correction adjustment and back by pressing the R2 button.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps :
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered (with the specimen stage) in the highest SA
magnification for the normal mode.
• A step in which the highest EFTEM-SA magnification is focused and centered relative to the normal
mode.
• A step in which the lowest EFTEM-Mh magnification is focused and aligned relative to the highest
EFTEM-SA magnification.
• A step in which all other EFTEM-Mh magnifications are focused and aligned.
Note: Because of the difficulty of aligning the microscope for EFTEM (image/diffraction shift and cross-
over correction are often quite critical, otherwise there is no image or diffraction pattern visible on the
Imaging Filter), the EFTEM alignment procedure contains two parts, one a pre-alignment, where all
alignments are done with the screen down, the other the final alignment where all is aligned on the Filter
itself. Once the microscope has been aligned properly, the pre-alignment should not be necessary
anymore and the final alignment can be used for fine-tuning.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 74
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps :
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered (with the specimen stage) in the highest SA
magnification for the normal mode.
• A step in which the highest EFTEM-SA magnification is aligned on the Imaging Filter and focused.
• A step in which all EFTEM-SA magnifications are aligned relative to the highest normal SA
magnification.
Notes:
• Because of the difficulty of aligning the microscope for EFTEM (image/diffraction shift and cross-over
correction are often quite critical, otherwise there is no image or diffraction pattern visible on the
Imaging Filter), the EFTEM alignment procedure contains two parts, one a pre-alignment, where all
alignments are done with the screen down, the other the final alignment where all is aligned on the
Filter itself. Once the microscope has been aligned properly, the pre-alignment should not be
necessary anymore and the final alignment can be used for fine-tuning.
• In case the cross-over correction is strongly misaligned, it is possible to switch to the cross-over
correction adjustment and back by pressing the R2 button.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps :
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered (with the specimen stage) at the lowermost
EFTEM-SA magnification.
• A step in which the highest EFTEM-Mi magnification is aligned relative to the lowermost EFTEM-SA
magnification.
• A step in which all EFTEM-Mi magnifications are aligned to the lowermost EFTEM-SA magnification.
Notes:
• Because of the difficulty of aligning the microscope for EFTEM (image/diffraction shift and cross-over
correction are often quite critical, otherwise there is no image or diffraction pattern visible on the
Imaging Filter), the EFTEM alignment procedure contains two parts, one a pre-alignment, where all
alignments are done with the screen down, the other the final alignment where all is aligned on the
Filter itself. Once the microscope has been aligned properly, the pre-alignment should not be
necessary anymore and the final alignment can be used for fine-tuning.
In case the cross-over correction is strongly misaligned, it is possible to switch to the cross-over
correction adjustment and back by pressing the R2 button.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 75
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Method: Center the image of the beam stop to the same place as at the highest SA magnification.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of five steps :
• A preparation step in the highest SA magnification for the normal mode.
• A step in which the Tune GIF procedure must be run for the highest SA magnification. If not already
done, the magnification-dependent GIF tunings in Digital Micrograph should be removed (see below).
• A step in which the beam stop is centered on the CCD image.
• A step in which the cross-over corrections are set for all EFTEM-SA magnifications except the
highest (where the cross-over correction is zero by definition).
• A step in which the cross-over corrections are set for all EFTEM-Mi magnifications.
In the DigitalMicrograph menu, select File -> Global info -> Tags -> IF Suite -> Autofilter -> Settings, and
delete the branch of the current high voltage.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 76
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Contour (in red) of the beam stop (in black) on the GIF image.
Notes:
• Because of the difficulty of aligning the microscope for EFTEM (image/diffraction shift and cross-over
correction are often quite critical, otherwise there is no image or diffraction pattern visible on the
Imaging Filter), the EFTEM alignment procedure contains two parts, one a pre-alignment, where all
alignments are done with the screen down, the other the final alignment where all is aligned on the
Filter itself. Once the microscope has been aligned properly, the pre-alignment should not be
necessary anymore and the final alignment can be used for fine-tuning.
• In case the image shift is strongly misaligned, it is possible to switch to the image shift adjustment
and back by pressing the R2 button.
If the required cross-over shift is more than the range of the deflectors
The cross-over shift at the highest SA magnification is zero. When the magnification is decreased, the
required cross-over shift will generally increase to a maximum at approximately 20kx...50kx, after which
the cross-over shift will decrease again. It can happen that for a few magnifications the required cross-
over shift is outside the range of the deflectors. In that case, proceed as follows:
Try to get the x-direction and y-direction separately as good as possible. However do not set a cross-
over shift close to the end of its range if that is still not enough to get the shadow of the needle back at its
reference position. You will only limit the available range of the image shift while you still do not have the
optimal beam direction. Instead, set the cross-over shift to not more than about half of its range.
Proceed with next magnification.
When you have stepped through all magnifications, you can decide how to tackle the magnifications for
which the required cross-over shift was out of range:
If the magnifications which show out-of-range corrections are in a range which are of minor importance
for your applications: Leave things as they are. Keep in mind that, when you are at these magnifications,
you might have to recenter the ZLP or tune the GIF.
If the magnifications which show out-of-range corrections are important for your applications, but the
highest magnifications are not important for your applications: Re-do the cross-over alignment, but this
time do not start at the highest SA magnification but at the highest magnification which showed out-of-
range corrections. Now the highest SA magnifications will show out-of-range corrections. Keep in mind
that, when you are at these high magnifications, you might have to recenter the ZLP or tune the GIF.
If the magnifications which show out-of-range corrections are important for your applications, and if also
the highest magnifications are important for your applications: Run 'tune GIF' at each magnification. This
will make sure that the GIF is well-tuned for every magnification. You can still have energy shifts when
you switch magnification. Be aware of the fact that, if you re-do 'tune-GIF' after a longer period of time,
you have to re-do 'tune-GIF' for each magnification.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 78
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of five steps :
• A preparation step in which the image for the normal mode is focused.
• A step in which the reference camera length for the normal mode (~500mm) is focused and
centered.
• A step in which the equivalent EFTEM camera length is focused and centered.
• A step in which all other camera lengths are focused and centered.
• A step in which for each camera length the cross-over correction is set.
Notes:
• Because of the difficulty of aligning the microscope for EFTEM (image/diffraction shift and cross-over
correction are often quite critical, otherwise there is no image or diffraction pattern visible on the
Imaging Filter), the EFTEM alignment procedure contains two parts, one a pre-alignment, where all
alignments are done with the screen down, the other the final alignment where all is aligned on the
Filter itself. Once the microscope has been aligned properly, the pre-alignment should not be
necessary anymore and the final alignment can be used for fine-tuning.
• In case the cross-over correction is strongly misaligned, it is possible to switch to the cross-over
correction adjustment and back by pressing the R2 button.
• Although the camera length series for EFTEM typically will contain low camera lengths, this does not
imply that such camera lengths are usable on all instruments (very much dependent on a number of
factors such as the mechanical alignment of the projector lenses). Typical lowermost usable camera
lengths are as follows:
BioTWIN lens 700mm
TWIN lens 320mm
S-TWIN lens 200mm
U-TWIN lens 260mm
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of five steps :
• A preparation step in which the image for the normal mode is focused.
• A step in which the reference camera length for the normal mode (~500mm) is focused and
centered.
• A step in which the equivalent EFTEM camera length is focused and centered.
• A step in which all other camera lengths are focused and centered.
• A step in which for each camera length the cross-over correction is set.
Notes:
• Because of the difficulty of aligning the microscope for EFTEM (image/diffraction shift and cross-over
correction are often quite critical, otherwise there is no image or diffraction pattern visible on the
Imaging Filter), the EFTEM alignment procedure contains two parts, one a pre-alignment, where all
alignments are done with the screen down, the other the final alignment where all is aligned on the
Filter itself. Once the microscope has been aligned properly, the pre-alignment should not be
necessary anymore and the final alignment can be used for fine-tuning.
• In case the cross-over correction is strongly misaligned, it is possible to switch to the cross-over
correction adjustment and back by pressing the R2 button.
• Although the camera length series for EFTEM typically will contain low camera lengths, this does not
imply that such camera lengths are usable on all instruments (very much dependent on a number of
factors such as the mechanical alignment of the projector lenses). Typical lowermost usable camera
lengths are as follows:
BioTWIN lens 700mm
TWIN lens 320mm
S-TWIN lens 200mm
U-TWIN lens 260mm
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 80
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
15 LM-EFTEM Procedure
Notes:
• Because of the difficulty of aligning the microscope for EFTEM (image/diffraction shift and cross-over
correction are often quite critical, otherwise there is no image or diffraction pattern visible on the
Imaging Filter), the EFTEM alignment procedure contains two parts, one a pre-alignment, where all
alignments are done with the screen down, the other the final alignment where all is aligned on the
Filter itself. Once the microscope has been aligned properly, the pre-alignment should not be
necessary anymore and the final alignment can be used for fine-tuning.
• The EFTEM alignments are in many cases (lower magnifications and camera lengths) sensitive to
hysteresis. It is therefore important to use the normalization facility of the microscope to make image
and diffraction-pattern positions reproducible.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of six steps :
• Two preparation steps for setting up the image in normal and EFTEM modes.
• Two steps for setting up the diffraction pattern in normal and EFTEM modes.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
In EFTEM a misaligned image shift will lead to an apparent diffraction shift when the cross-over
correction is changed.
Description
The alignment of the pivot points of the image deflection coils is essential to the proper functioning of
many other alignments and calibrations: image shifts, diffraction shifts, detector alignments and
measurement functions.
The image coils pivot points (image shift and diffraction shift) alignment is reasonably insensitive to the
operating conditions and normally needs to be done only once. It is important that the image coils pivot
points are aligned prior to aligning other parts of the microscope where the image coils are used,
otherwise the latter alignments may have to be redone. Alignments where the image coils are used are
those where images or diffraction patterns are moved (image shift, diffraction shift/diffraction alignment).
Importance: ESSENTIAL for the proper functioning of image and diffraction shifts and the cross-over
correction.
Method: Minimize the movement of the image. The microscope 'wobbles' the diffraction shift which
should cause no image shift.
A common consequence of a diffraction shift that has not been aligned is a mismatch between the image
detail selected with the selected area aperture and the area actually contributing to the diffraction
pattern. When the image coils have not been aligned properly, image and diffraction shift are not
uncoupled and the diffraction shift will also cause an image shift, thereby moving the image detail out of
the selected area aperture. In EFTEM a misaligned diffraction shift will lead to an apparent image shift
when the cross-over correction is changed.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps :
• Two preparation step for setting up the image in normal and EFTEM mode.
• Two steps in which the X and Y pivot points are aligned.
Description
The alignment of the pivot points of the image deflection coils is essential to the proper functioning of
many other alignments and calibrations: image shifts, diffraction shifts, detector alignments and
measurement functions.
The image coils pivot points (image shift and diffraction shift) alignment is reasonably insensitive to the
operating conditions and normally needs to be done only once. It is important that the image coils pivot
points are aligned prior to aligning other parts of the microscope where the image coils are used,
otherwise the latter alignments may have to be redone. Alignments where the image coils are used are
those where images or diffraction patterns are moved (image shift, diffraction shift/diffraction alignment).
For images displaying the effect of the alignment, see section 6.3.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps :
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered (with the specimen stage) in the highest LM
magnification for the normal mode.
• A step in which the same feature is centered with the MF-X,Y for the highest EFTEM-LM
magnification.
• A step in which all EFTEM-LM magnifications are aligned relative to the highest EFTEM-LM
magnification.
• A step in which the cross-over correction is set for each EFTEM-LM magnification.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 82
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Notes:
• The lowermost EFTEM-LM magnifications may not be usable. Simply skip the alignment for these
magnifications.
• Because of the difficulty of aligning the microscope for EFTEM (image/diffraction shift and cross-over
correction are often quite critical, otherwise there is no image or diffraction pattern visible on the
Imaging Filter), the EFTEM alignment procedure contains two parts, one a pre-alignment, where all
alignments are done with the screen down, the other the final alignment where all is aligned on the
Filter itself. Once the microscope has been aligned properly, the pre-alignment should not be
necessary anymore and the final alignment can be used for fine-tuning.
• In case the cross-over correction is strongly misaligned, it is possible to switch to the cross-over
correction adjustment and back by pressing the R2 button.
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of four steps :
• A preparation step in which an image feature is centered (with the specimen stage) in the highest LM
magnification for the normal mode.
• A step in which the same feature is centered with the MF-X,Y for the highest EFTEM-LM
magnification.
• A step in which all EFTEM-LM magnifications are aligned relative to the highest EFTEM-LM
magnification.
• A step in which the cross-over correction is set for each EFTEM-LM magnification.
Notes:
• The lowermost EFTEM-LM magnifications may not be usable. Simply skip the alignment for these
magnifications.
• Because of the difficulty of aligning the microscope for EFTEM (image/diffraction shift and cross-over
correction are often quite critical, otherwise there is no image or diffraction pattern visible on the
Imaging Filter), the EFTEM alignment procedure contains two parts, one a pre-alignment, where all
alignments are done with the screen down, the other the final alignment where all is aligned on the
Filter itself. Once the microscope has been aligned properly, the pre-alignment should not be
necessary anymore and the final alignment can be used for fine-tuning.
• In case the cross-over correction is strongly misaligned, it is possible to switch to the cross-over
correction adjustment and back by pressing the R2 button.
Tecnai on-line help Alignments 83
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Procedure
The alignment procedure consists of three steps:
• A preparation step in which the SA image is focused at an intermediate magnification.
• A step in which the highest SA magnification must be focused.
• A step in which the highest SA magnification must be focused on the Filter.
Note: Although the objective lens is at a different setting for a focused nanoprobe image relative to the
focus setting for a microprobe image, this does not imply that the microscope imaging system is altered
in some way. The difference between the objective-lens settings is caused by the minicondenser lens
whose setting has an effect on the magnetic field of the objective lens, so that in nanoprobe a slightly
higher current is needed to obtain the same electron-optical effect as in microprobe.
Tecnai on-line help Column description 1
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Note: The possibility exists that the microscope leaks X-rays when significant cold emission (cold
emission means that the emission reads non-zero while the high tension is on but the filament is off) is
present. The microscope therefore runs a continuous check for cold emission and if the cold emission
exceeds 10 mA the high tension will be switched off. If the user interface is open, the user will be warned
about the cold emission. Since the cold emission cannot be checked when the filament is on, the check
will be delayed for up to 48 hours if the filament is switched on. After that the filament must be switched
off to allow a check to be made. Afterwards the filament can be switched on again.
Cold emission is not something that happens suddenly and spontaneously, so the check that has been
implemented is sufficient to safeguard safety. Cold emission typically occurs when the gun has been
contaminated (dust). To solve the problem, the gun must be cleaned. To solve the problem, the gun
must be cleaned.
2 Apertures
The microscope is equipped with three aperture controls, from top to bottom:
• Condenser aperture
• Objective aperture
• Selected-area aperture
Note: Aperture mechanisms, like all other mechanical controls on the microscope should move easily
and not require excessive force. If the aperture doesn't move easily, do not try to force it as this may
damage the mechanism. The sideways movement of the aperture is equipped with end stops to keep the
aperture close to a centered position. The end stops are located in holes going in horizontally in the
lower half of the grey, circular block with the aperture numbers, one on the left and another on the right.
Do not try to force the aperture beyond these end stops. if the aperture cannot be centered properly, use
a small (metric) Allen tool to adjust the position of the end stops.
2.1 Operation
Aperture 1 2 3 4
Condenser 2 30 um 50 um 100 um 200 um
Objective (BioTWIN) 20 um 40 um 70 um 150 um
Objective (TWIN) 10 um 20 um 40 um 100 um
Selected Area 10 um 40 um 200 um 800 um
Tecnai on-line help Column description 5
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
3 CompuStage
The CompuStage is a motor-driven goniometer that provides computer-controlled movement of the
specimen on five axes (X, Y, Z, α, β). The CompuStage consists of the following elements:
• Hardware (the goniometer), including motor drives and position-measuring system.
• Control electronics, including a dedicated microprocessor.
• CompuStage server software which provides the link between the user interface (software and
hardware controls like the track ball for X-Y motion) and the CompuStage microprocessor.
• Hardware controls, consisting of a track ball for X-Y motion and pressure-sensitive up-down switches
for Z, α and β.
• User interface software with translates operator input into goniometer actions.
The definition of the physical position of the stage axes in the microscope column is covered in a
separate section.
The sEntry system consists of a key (a pin varying in shape and diameter) on the holder defining the
holder dimensions and a lock on the CompuStage defining the pole-piece configuration. The length of
the sEntry key is such that if an incompatible holder is inserted, the key (blocked by the lock) prevents
the holder from going between the pole pieces.
Although older specimen holders designed fo the manual goniometer will fit in the CompuStage
(provided their O-ring is exchanged for a - thicker - CompuStage O-ring), these holders are not
equipped with a sEntry key and may therefore be unsafe with objective pole-piece configurations with
narrow gaps such as the U-TWIN.
3.5 Homing
Before the CompuStage is ready for use (when the microscope has been switched off altogether or after
the CompuStage has been disabled), it must be homed, a procedure in which it finds the zero positions.
During homing the CompuStage will move each of the four fixed axes (X, Y, Z and α; the β tilt axis is
homed separately whenever a double-tilt holder is inserted) to one extreme. Because of the high tilt
applied, this procedure must be executed without a specimen holder. In order to make sure that there is
no specimen holder present, the microscope has to ask the operator to identify the specimen holder
(which in this case should be 'No specimen holder', otherwise the homing cannot proceed).
If no user interface is active, there is no way for communicating with the operator. Consequently, the
homing procedure after a start-up will only proceed once the user interface has started. Even if the user
interface does not show a message to select a specimen holder after a restart of the microscope, but the
CompuStage does not move (easily checked by moving the right-hand track ball a bit), it is very likely
that the CompuStage has not been homed. Select the Stage² Settings Control Panel and press the
Enabled button. The homing procedure will start.
Note 1: Always retract the holder slowly to allow the O-ring to keep the seal.
Note 2: Manual-goniometer specimen holders with the sapphire at the end have a longer tip than
CompuStage holders and must be retracted at least three centimeters before they are clear from the
field of view.
Tecnai on-line help Column description 8
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
The CompuStage is equipped with the sEntry system. Associated with this system is an up-down switch
on the outer panel of the CompuStage. The top part of the switch depends on the type of objective lens
(with smaller lens gaps, the hole in the top is made smaller so only specific types of holders will fit).
The shield of the CompuStage showing the position of the holder-selection switch (gray). The switch
itself is controlled by a notch in the lower rectangle. The actual shape of the top of the switch varies and
on some microscope will block the sEntry key of the specimen holder from being inserted.
• In the up position (left-hand picture above), the Default holder selection is enabled. In this case
the microscope will automatically select a single-tilt holder. In case there are more single-tilt holders
present on the system (e.g. normal single- tilt and cryo holder), the holder selected is the last one
chosen. If there are more single-tilt holders present, then for the first insertion, move the switch
down, insert and identify the holder you are using, then move the switch up again. Thereafter the
microscope will automatically select the same holder again.
• In the down position, the holder used must be identified by the user. This must always be done for
double-tilt holders (the reason this is necessary has to do with the b tilt cable which must be
connected before the holder can be inserted into the microscope), so do not use the switch up
position with double-tilt holders.
nowadays). Caution should therefore applied to handling specimen holders. The following instructions
should be adhered to:
• Always use clean nylon or similar gloves when handling specimen-holder parts that enter the vacuum
(that is, between the tip of the holder and the sealing O-ring).
• Clean the tip of the holder only with special cleaning fluids or with a fresh piece of window-cleaning
(chamois) leather.
• Specimen, spacing washers and clamping devices should be manipulated only using pointed
tweezers or the tools provided. Tools like the hex-ring tool or the needle for levering the single-tilt
holder clamp should never be touched by hand on the wrong side (in the case of the hex-ring tool the
use of gloves is advised because it is easy to pick it up at the wrong end). Clean the washers, tools
and tweezers on a regular basis.
• The O-ring on the specimen-holder rod should be checked for possible dirt or excessive quantities of
grease although it should not be completely dry. A very light coating of Fomblin grease (supplied with
the microscope) is advised. Take care not apply grease to the conical part of the holder (the part
between the thicker and thinner sections of the rod). The conical part is the area where the holder is
'seated' in the CompuStage. Any grease there will very likely result in drift in excess of specimen.
• When a specimen holder is not in use, insert it in the protective holder cover supplied or reinsert it
into the microscope. The latter keeps the holder thermally equilibrated with the microscope and
CompuStage, thereby reducing drift after holder insertion (especially if there is a considerable
temperature difference between the room and the microscope column).
Note: For easy removal of specimens from the holder, a notch is provided on the holder (see the images
below). One tip of a pair of tweezers can be inserted in this notch underneath the specimen (once the
clamp has been lifted), making it easy to take the specimen out of the holder.
• If necessary, remove the cap at the end of the tube of the specimen-holder cover.
• Check that the tip of the holder and the clamping device are clean and dry.
• Keep one hand against the cap of the holder, making sure it cannot move out of the cover tube.
• Fit the tool (stored in one of the holes in the supports of the cover tube) into the hole in front of the
clamp. Then lift the clamp to its fullest extent.
Tecnai on-line help Column description 10
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
• Place the specimen in the (roughly) circular recess of the specimen-holder tip. If the specimen is on a
re-insertable grid, place the 'ear' of the grid in the 'ear' recess.
• Carefully lower the clamp with the tool onto the specimen. Make sure the specimen remains correctly
in position.
Caution: The specimen-securing clamp must be lowered carefully, otherwise the specimen and/or
clamp can be damaged.
• Retract the holder slightly in the cover and turn it upside down. Tap the cap at the end a few times.
Turn the holder back and check that the specimen has not moved (movement is a sign that it isn't
clamped properly).
Note: Never mount magnetic specimens (disks) in the single-tilt holder. The clamp is normally not
strong enough to prevent the specimen from flying out due to the objective-lens magnetic field and
sticking to the objective-lens pole pieces.
Caution: The following instructions apply to all specimen holders and must be followed completely or
damage to airlock, specimen holder or specimen stage may result.
For microscopes equipped with a turbo-molecular pump: The turbo-molecular pump (which should
not remain running under normal microscopy because of the vibrations it causes) takes several minutes
(2-3) to reach operational speed. To speed up specimen exchange, it is advised to switch the pump on
(use the toolbar button) before extracting the holder. By the time the specimen has been exchanged the
turbo-molecular pump will be near or at its operation speed and pumping on the airlock will begin
(almost) immediately. Switch the pump off again after the holder has been inserted fully into the
microscope.
If the turbo-molecular pump is running on when the specimen holder is inserted into the airlock, the
pump will first spin up and only after a few minutes start pumping on the airlock. In this situation (holder
triggers the pump), the pump will be switched off automatically after pumping on the airlock has finished.
Note 2: The specimen airlock of the CompuStage and the specimen holder consist of fine, high-quality
mechanics. If considerable force is needed for any manual actions on the holder or CompuStage, it is a
sign of something being wrong. It should never be necessary to exert strong force and doing so may well
result in damage to specimen holder or CompuStage.
Tecnai on-line help Column description 11
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Note 3: It is not necessary to switch off high tension or filament during specimen-holder insertion, since
the gun is separated from the column by the gun valve (V7) which is closed during specimen insertion
(even if the user doesn't close the column valves, the microscope will automatically do so when it detects
that a specimen holder has been inserted; it is good practice, however, to close the column valves
before extracting the specimen holder from the microscope so they will still be closed when a holder is
inserted again). It is advised, however, to keep the column valves closed after insertion of the holder
(typically for a few minutes) while the specimen-area vacuum recovers - if only to reduce contamination
of the specimen. Using the cold trap is advised to trap water vapour quickly (ion-getter pumps have
difficulty in pumping water).
Note 4: Always carry out the complete insertion procedure. If the specimen is left in a retracted position,
vacuum leakage can occur with consequent contamination (or, if left for a long period, loss of vacuum in
the airlock and a crash of the column if the specimen holder is then inserted). If you do not want to insert
the specimen holder after all (or if the airlock isn't pumped properly, for example because of a leaking O-
ring), leave the airlock cycle to finish pumping (the red LED on the CompuStage goes off) before
removing the holder from the airlock. Do not extract the holder while the airlock is being pumped.
The specimen holder is introduced through a pre-pumped airlock which ensures that air, introduced with
the holder, is pumped away before the airlock is opened to the microscope column.
Procedure
• Hold the specimen holder with the airlock trigger pin parallel to the small slit in the CompuStage front
plate (at roughly four o'clock). Carefully insert the end of the specimen holder into the airlock cylinder
and slide the holder in until a stop is reached. At this point the prepumping of the airlock will start as
indicated by the red CompuStage light which will be illuminated. If the light does not come on, the
trigger has not been positioned correctly. Slowly turn the holder slightly to the left and the right until it
will go in a bit further (the airlock trigger pin now falls properly into its groove).
• The Tecnai user interface will display a message asking for identification of the specimen holder.
Select the type of holder from the list and press the Enter button.
Tecnai on-line help Column description 12
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Note: Unless a particular type of holder is specifically listed (in which case its has control parameters
separate from the 'generic' holder types), it falls in one of two categories: single tilt or double tilt. Single
tilt applies to any holder that doesn't have a computer-controlled b tilt (including manual-goniometer
double-tilt holders!). For double-tilt holders a few different types may exist (typically only the Philips
double-tilt holder is listed unless the control parameters for the other double-holders have been
installed).
• If the holder is a double-tilt holder, insert the b tilt cable (as also instructed by the microscope) and
press the Enter button.
Caution: As long as the red CompuStage light is illuminated, it is unsafe to insert the specimen holder
further into the microscope. It is also good practice to observe the pressure in the backing line (which is
connected to the airlock during airlock pumping) to make sure the airlock is being pumped properly on a
microscope with the standard vacuum system (airlock is pumped by the rotary pump PVP). On systems
equipped with a turbo-molecular pump, listen to the sound of the pump. If the turbo doesn't run more
smoothly with ongoing pumping, the airlock is leaking.
Tecnai on-line help Column description 13
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
• When the red CompuStage light has been switched off, rotate the specimen about 120 degrees
counter-clockwise as far as it will, then allow it slide in further into the microscope.
Caution: Maintain a firm grip on the holder while it is sliding in (it is being sucked in by the column
vacuum) to safeguard against any possible damage to CompuStage or holder.
• Once the holder is fully in, carefully tap a few times with a finger against the cap of the holder to help
it settle into position and thereby improve stability.
Caution: The following instructions apply to all specimen holders and must be followed completely or
damage to airlock, specimen holder or specimen stage may result.
For microscopes equipped with a turbo-molecular pump: The turbo-molecular pump (which should
not remain running under normal microscopy because of the vibrations it causes) takes several minutes
(2-3) to reach operational speed. To speed up specimen exchange, it is advised to switch the pump on
(use the toolbar button) before extracting the holder. By the time the specimen has been exchanged the
turbo-molecular pump will be near or at its operation speed and pumping on the airlock will begin
(almost) immediately. Switch the pump off again after the holder has been inserted fully into the
microscope.
If the turbo-molecular pump is running on when the specimen holder is inserted into the airlock, the
pump will first spin up and only after a few minutes start pumping on the airlock. In this situation (holder
triggers the pump), the pump will be switched off automatically after pumping on the airlock has finished.
Note 2: The specimen airlock of the CompuStage and the specimen holder consist of fine, high-quality
mechanics. If considerable force is needed for any manual actions on the holder or CompuStage, it is a
sign of something being wrong. It should never be necessary to exert strong force and doing so may well
result in damage to specimen holder or CompuStage.
Note 3: It is not necessary to switch off high tension or filament during specimen-holder exchange, since
the gun is separated from the column by the gun valve (V7) which is closed during specimen insertion
(even if the user doesn't close the column valves, the microscope will automatically do so when it detects
that a specimen holder has been inserted; it is good practice, however, to close the column valves
before extracting the specimen holder from the microscope so they will still be closed when a holder is
inserted again).
Note 4: Always carry out the complete removal procedure. If the specimen is left in a retracted position,
vacuum leakage can occur with consequent contamination (or, if left for a long period, loss of vacuum in
the airlock and a crash of the column if the specimen holder is then inserted).
Tecnai on-line help Column description 14
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Procedure
• Close the column valves.
• Make sure the specimen holder is in a safe position (if necessary reset a and b to zero, or set all
axes to 0). The red CompuStage light should be off.
• Pull the holder as far out of the CompuStage as it will go, then rotate it clockwise as far as it will go
(about 120 degrees).
• Carefully extract the holder from the airlock (you have to pull against the vacuum remaining in the
airlock).
• For double-tilt holders disconnect the cable plug.
Note 1: One exception is at the lowermost speed setting. In this case the CompuStage will make its
smallest steps, independent of magnification. At low magnifications this may mean that the stage doesn't
seem to move at all. If the latter is the case, click once on the right-hand track-ball button to switch the
speed one step up.
Note 2: At very low magnifications the speed control may appear to function no longer (speed up doesn't
increase the speed of the CompuStage). This means that the CompuStage has reached its maximum
speed and can go no faster.
architecture). For most microscopes this means that the X axis (the direction of the a tilt axis) is
approximately connected to the Multifunction Y knob.
The orientation in space of these axes can only be described at a tilt at 0° (since the other axes are
mounted on top of the α tilt, they will change their orientation with it). At a tilt 0° the X and Y axes are
horizontal and the Z axis vertical. The X axis runs along the rod of the specimen holder. If you look down
on the microscope and define the front of the microscope as south, the X axis thus runs NW-SE, with SE
in the + direction and the Y axis NE-SW with NE as the + direction. Up is the + direction of the Z axis.
The X axis describes a truly linear motion, the Y and Z are in fact circular motions but with such a wide
radius that the motion remains close to linear. The Y and Z motions cause the specimen holder rod to
pivot around the conical face where it narrows down, just beyond the O-ring.
Because of this pivoting motion, the end of the holder on the outside of the CompuStage moves in the
opposite direction!
Below is a schematic 3-D view of the specimen holder tip and the orientation of the stage axes.
Note: The notation differs from that on the earlier CompuStage of the CM microscopes where the sign
of the X and Y axes is reversed.
Tecnai on-line help Column description 16
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
4 An introduction to vacuum
Electron microscopes cannot operate in air for a number of reasons. The penetration of electrons
through air is typically no more than 1 meter, so after coming on meter from the gun, the whole beam
would be lost to collisions of the electrons with the air molecules. It is also not possible to generate the
high charge difference between the anode and cathode in the gun because air is not a perfect insulator.
Finally, the beam on the specimen while in air would trap all sorts of rubbish (air is full of hydrocarbon
molecules) on the specimen, crack them (removing hydrogen, oxygen, etc.) and thus leave a thick
carbon contamination layer on the specimen. Each electron microscope therefore has a vacuum system.
the degree of sophistication of the vacuum system depends on the requirements. Simple imaging of
biological thin sections is much less demanding than cryo applications or small-probe analysis in
materials science, and a thermionic gun can operate under much worse vacuum than a Field Emission
Gun.
The most basic vacuum system consists of a vessel connected to a pump that removes the air. The
vacuum system of an electron microscope is considerably more complicated, containing a number of
vessels, pumps, valves (to separate different vessels) and gauges (to measure vacuum pressures).
From the bottom up we can distinguish four vessels in the vacuum system:
• The buffer tank
• The projection chamber
• The column (specimen area)
• The electron gun area
These are not pumped by single pump, because there is no pump available that handle the full range in
vacuum from air pressure (as present after a vessel has been vented) to ultra-high vacuum (in specimen
are or gun). The microscope can in essence be divided in two parts, separated by a very small aperture
(200 micrometers), the differential pumping aperture, located between the projection chamber and the
column.
The lower part basically consists of the projection chamber where we observe the image and where
plate camera and TV cameras are located. This is pumped by an oil-diffusion pump. Behind the oil-
diffusion pump is a rotary pump (the oil-diffusion pump cannot go from vacuum to air, it needs some
other pump to back it up). Since the rotary (or pre-vacuum) pump is noisy, it is not running continuously
but only when needed. In order to have continuous backing of the diffusion, there is a buffer tank in
between them. The buffer tank is slowly filled by the oil-diffusion pump. When its pressure is becoming
high, it is emptied by the rotary pump.
The upper part consists of the specimen and gun areas which are pumped by one or more ion-getter
pumps. These pumps use no oil and are therefore clean. They also achieve higher vacuum than the oil-
diffusion pump. The number of ion-getter pumps may range from one to four. Initial pumping of the
column and gun on many systems is done by the rotary and oil-diffusion pumps, except for systems
equipped with a turbo-molecular pump. In the latter case the oil-diffusion and rotary pumps never pump
on the column and gun areas.
Tecnai on-line help Column description 17
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
The diagram above shows the vacuum system of the Tecnai F20. At the bottom it starts with the rotary
pump (PVP) which is not running here (otherwise its symbol would be black). Above PVP is the buffer
tank (cyan color), separated by a valve (V1) from the PVP. Another valve (V2) is also closed. When open
this would give the PVP access to the projection chamber (the area above V3, the valve that separates it
from the oil-diffusion pump ODP). Pir (Pir 1 and Pir 2) and Pen (3) stand for Pirani and Penning which
are vacuum-pressure measuring gauges. Valve 4 (closed) separates the projection chamber from the
upper part of the column. Pressures are also measured on the basis of the current running in the IGPs.
The large cyan area represents the specimen area (as well as some connecting pipes), pumped by a
main ion-getter pump (IGP1) and the liner-tube ion-getter pump (IGP4) (liner tubes are thin pipes that
connect the projection chamber to the specimen area and the specimen area to the gun). At the same
height, to the right, is the turbo-molecular pump (Turbo) that is used to prepump the specimen and gun
areas and also pumps on the specimen-holder airlock (on the CompuStage; through the line that is
drawn over the top, towards valves 42 and 8). The gun is pumped by two ion-getter pumps (IGP2 and
IGP3).
Tecnai on-line help Column description 18
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
5 Cold Trap
The Cold Trap (also called Liquid-nitrogen cooling device or Cryo Trap) consists of a piece of metal
around the specimen environment that is cooled to liquid-nitrogen temperature. The cooling is done by
the liquid nitrogen in the dewar on the right-hand side of the column. Gases in the vacuum
(predominantly water vapour) condense on the cold surface inside the microscope and thereby the
partial pressures of these gases is reduced. Use of the cold trap is particularly effective when a holder is
introduced into the microscope, because the water vapour coming in with the holder (either from the
residual gases in the airlock or adsorbed on the holder surface) is trapped quickly.
To use the cooling device, first remove the dewar vessel (lift it up slightly, then tilt away at the bottom).
Fill it with liquid nitrogen and replace it onto the support. Make sure not to spill liquid nitrogen onto
the viewing windows of the projection chamber as this may cause the glass to crack.
Liquid-nitrogen level
If the level of the liquid nitrogen is below the half-full level of
the dewar, the temperature of the cold trap inside the
microscope may increase and some gases may start to
evaporate again from the cold surface. In general keep the
dewar between full and 3/4 full except when the cold trap
has been cold for a long time already (when the rate of
liquid-nitrogen boiling will be much reduced).
Dewar adjustment
The dewar should not come into direct contact with the copper braids (wire bundles), insulating cap or
the conductor (the rod running from braids towards the microscope). At the same time the amount of
space between the dewar and cap must be minimized to prevent cold air from flowing out easily. If this
situation cannot be obtained, then the height of the dewar on the drip tray support can be adjusted by
removing the screw in the center of the drip tray and adding or removing washers between the dewar
support table and the bottom of the drip tray or between the latter and the support rod below the drip
tray.
Tecnai on-line help Column description 19
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
6 Viewing screens
The Tecnai microscope is equipped with two (fluorescent) viewing screens, a main screen and a
focusing screen.
The main screen is moved up and down using a motor drive mechanism. The motor drive is under
software control. One, dedicated button for moving the screen up and down is present on the left-hand
side of the projection chamber (about five centimeters behind the lever for the small screen). Additionally
it is possible to define any of the user buttons to have the screen lift function.
7 Plate camera
The plate camera is located behind and inside the projection chamber of the microscope. The plate
camera consists of a mechanism and a removable cassette.
The mechanism consists of a pneumatically driven rod that moves forward from behind the cassette. The
rod pushes the central section of the cassette out towards the front. This central section is a transport
tray, holding a single sheet film holder. The transport tray slides over guides in the bottom of the
projection chamber. When it reaches the front, a pin located in the projection chamber pushes in a hole
in the front of the tray. This moves two supports in the tray back, allowing the sheet-film holder to fall
down inside the tray (until then it was carried at the top of the tray). The exposure is then made. The rod
moves back, drawing the transport tray with it. When the tray is withdrawn fully, the sheet-film holder
drops down into the receiving part of the cassette.
Note: When an exposure is made, the negative lies open in the projection chamber and can be struck by
light coming from the room through the front or side windows of the projection chamber. In order to
prevent fogging or outright exposure by light, switch off any room lights before the exposure and keep
the covers on the projection chamber windows.
Note for owners of older Philips microscopes: The plate-camera cassettes look similar to older designs
for the CM-series and EM400 series (EM400, EM410, EM420, EM430) microscopes but are different.
The older versions could hold only 36 plates. If you have such older cassettes, you should make sure the
56- and 36-plate cassettes should not be mixed as this will give rise to plate jam and other problems (this
applies to both the cassette top section which has a different width of slit and to the bottom section which
has a different spring). The 56-plate have markings to distinguish them from the older cassettes (a
marker plate with the number 56 in relief - item 10 in the picture below - and a fluorescing sticker - item
11).
The 56-plate cassette is compatible with older microscopes (EM400, EM410, EM420, EM430, all CM
microscopes).
Tecnai on-line help Column description 21
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Blanking plates (6) can be used to split the cassette in room-light conditions so that a fresh receiving
magazine can be put underneath the magazine with unexposed film material. Slide both blanking plates
fully into the slits (5) provided above and below the transport tray (3), with the top blanking plate having
its curved grip facing upward and the lower one with its grip facing down. Release the clips (9) from the
LOWER, RECEIVING MAGAZINE, remove it and replace it with a fresh receiving magazine. Do not
take the cover off the top magazine as this will expose the unexposed film material to light!
To prevent the transport tray from dropping out during transportation, it is fixed in position by a securing
spring (4).
Tecnai on-line help Column description 22
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
Note: To prevent fogging of the unexposed film material, keep the blanking plates inserted into the
cassette during transportation, and load and unload cassettes under somewhat dimmed room-light
conditions.
Note: To prevent fogging of the unexposed film material, keep the blanking plates inserted into the
cassette during transportation, and load and unload cassettes under somewhat dimmed room-light
conditions.
7.7 Removing exposed film from the receiving magazine (dark room only!)
• Remove the lower magazine from the cassette by releasing the clips (move the bottom end outward,
then release the top part from the grip). The top magazine for unexposed plates can now be lifted off
and put aside.
• If a blanking plate is used, pull it out.
• Take the exposed plates out of the receiving magazine. It may help to tilt the magazine a little. The
exposed plates rest on a spring-supported platform that will automatically rise when plates are
removed.
Tecnai on-line help Column description 24
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
7.9 Troubleshooting
Warning: do not attempt this when you are uncertain of what you are doing. If you are not the
microscope supervisor, please warn the supervisor and let him/her handle this. If you are the
supervisor and doubt whether you can handle this, call service!
There can be several reasons for plate jams. The procedures for clearing them differ.
1. A sheet-film holder does not come out properly of the upper magazine.
2. A sheet-film holder does not drop down inside the transport tray.
If you have found the reason for the jam, load a cassette with empty sheet-film holders into the
microscope. Switch to manual exposure time (you do not need to have the plate camera/projection
chamber at vacuum) and 'shoot' a whole magazine to make sure the plate jam does not occur again. If
necessary you can look through the window on the left-hand side of the projection chamber and observe
the process (on 300 kV machines lift out the cover to see inside - when replacing it, make sure the O-
ring is clean and properly seated).
Warning: the procedure described below can be dangerous if not handled properly. When the
transport tray is moving, the forces on it are such that you damage your hands when they are in
the way.
• Close the column valves, switch off the HT and vent the plate camera/projection chamber.
• Remove the window or cover plate (300kV instruments) on the left-hand side of the projection
chamber.
• Switch the plate camera to manual exposure with the longest possible exposure time, and switch to
HOLD (to prevent it switching back to automatic).
• Press Exposure. The rod with the transport tray should now come forward again.
• If possible, try to remove the jamming plate(s) by lifting them out.
Tecnai on-line help Column description 26
Tecnai 12 Software version 4.0
• When done, press exposure again. The rod and transport tray should now move back properly into
the cassette.
• If the rod and transport tray are back properly, remove the cassette from the microscope and in the
dark room, remove the film material and then reload with empty sheet-film holders, put it back into
the microscope and check. If everything works properly, the re-insert the window/cover plate, making
sure the O-ring is clean and in its correct place. Replace the test cassette with a full one and pump
the plate camera/projection chamber.
If the rod and tray did not move back properly, repeat the exposure (make sure it is still on manual
exposure) and try and see if it is clear.
Always remove the particular sheet-film holder(s) and inspect for damage. If damaged, discard (do not
attempt to repair; that will probably only lead to repeated jams).
TEM manual Customizing Standard User interface 1
Table of Contents
1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 2
2 How to use it........................................................................................................................................ 2
3 Customizations that are supported...................................................................................................... 2
4 Customizations that are not supported................................................................................................ 4
5 Effect on Existing Users ...................................................................................................................... 4
5.1 Expert Users............................................................................................................................. 4
5.2 Standard Users......................................................................................................................... 4
6 Other points to note............................................................................................................................. 4
7 Installing a new TEM version .............................................................................................................. 5
8 Sample Screen Shots.......................................................................................................................... 5
TEM manual Customizing Standard User interface 2
1 Introduction
This document explains new functionality added to the TEM software that allows the supervisor to
customize certain aspects of the User Interface for new standard users. This user interface
customization is intended for standard users only, i.e. not for users belonging to the TEM Experts group.
It is aimed primarily at setting up defaults for new microscope users, however the effect on existing users
is also explained in a later section.
Section 2 describes the general procedure. Section 3 describes the customizations that are possible,
and Section 4 describes the customizations that are not currently supported. Section 5 describes how
existing users are affected. Finally, sample screen shots are provided in the last section.
Since this functionality is available to microscope supervisors only, the reader is assumed to have some
basic knowledge of the TEM User Interface and of Windows (e.g. adding users to groups, creating
shortcuts and so on).
2 How to use it
The general procedure for customizing the User Interface is as follows.
1. Log on to Windows as supervisor (make sure that the “user” supervisor has administrator rights in
Windows).
2. Starting the user interface in customization mode. From the command prompt this can be done by
typing ‘peoui.exe /config’. Alternatively, you may prefer to create a taskbar shortcut for starting the
interface in customization mode. Creating shortcuts is described in the standard Windows help
system (e.g. searching for ‘creating shortcuts’ will retrieve topics explaining how to add shortcuts for
both individual users and groups of users).
3. Once started the title of the user interface should resemble that depicted in figure 1. The important
point is that the title of the window at the top of the screen should contain the text ‘CUSTOMIZING
INTERFACE SETTINGS FOR STANDARD USERS (I.E. NON EXPERTS)’. This indicates that the
user interface is running in customization mode.
4. Although you are logged in as supervisor, the user interface you now see is the interface that will be
presented to new standard users when they use the microscope.
5. Make the User Interface changes you require. This is done in exactly the same manner as when an
individual microscope user modifies his own personal interface settings – the only difference is that
in customization mode the changes are stored in a special location on the computer to be then
picked up by new users that log on subsequently. Some examples are given in the following section.
6. Exit the application in the normal manner.
example, Figure 2 shows the controls to use for selection of the background color for the Control
Panels.
2. Renaming a workset Right click on the name of the workset you wish to change and select ‘Edit
label’, you can then change the name. If the tab for the workset you have changed is currently
visible on the top left hand side of the user interface then you will see your changes immediately.
For example, Figure 3 shows the popup menu function ‘Edit Label’ that allows changing the text of
the workset.
3. Deleting an existing workset Right click on the name of the workset you wish to change and
select ‘Delete’ to delete the workset. The left hand side of the user interface is again updated
accordingly. For example, Figure 3 shows the popup menu function ‘Delete’ that allows deleting a
workset.
4. Copying an existing workset Right click on the name of the workset you wish to change and
select ‘Copy’. This creates a new workset in the user interface that contains the same Control
Panels as the workset you copied from. Of course you can then rename the workset (as explained
previously), and edit the Control Panels in it (described shortly).
5. Adding a new workset This is performed by first copying an existing workset, then renaming it,
then modifiying the Control Panels it contains.
6. Changing the tab order of worksets Hold the left mouse key down while you drag the workset to
its new position relative to the other worksets. For example, Figure 5 shows the position of the
‘Tune’ workset changed from below to above the ‘Camera’ workset.
7. Changing the presentation order of Control Panels within a workset Hold the mouse key down
while you drag the Control Panel to its new position relative to the other Control Panels in the
workset. For example, Figure 4 shows the Plate Camera Control Panel being put below the Dark
Field Control Panel.
8. Adding a Control Panel to a workset Hold the mouse key down while you drag the Control Panel
from the right-hand pane of the Workspace Layout to the left-hand pane. For example, Figure 5
shows the ‘Direct Alignment’ Control Panel added to the ‘Tune’ workset.
9. Removing a Control Panel from a workset Right click on the name of the Control Panel and
select ‘Delete’ or left click and press the Delete key.
From the command prompt type ‘peoui.exe /resetInterface’. Alternatively, you can create a taskbar
shortcut for starting the interface in customization mode. (Creating shortcuts is described in the
standard Windows help system.)
Existing standard users that have not changed the User Interface themselves will automatically see the
new changes made by the supervisor. Since they are using the default settings for standard users, then
changing the default settings affects them too.
1. As mentioned above, configuring the user interface for standard users requires logging in as
supervisor and starting the interface in customization mode. However, the supervisor is not
prevented from performing actual microscopy whilst running the interface in customization mode.
This is not recommended. In this mode, the supervisor is seeing the interface intended for standard
users, which is not the interface the supervisor sees when he/she starts the ui in the normal manner.
Therefore, recommended procedure is:
a) Start the user interface in customization mode.
b) Make the interface changes you wish.
c) Exit the user interface.
2. The changes affect new standard users only. New expert users are not affected by the
customizations.
3. When adding new Control Panels, note that you can select from the ‘User’, ‘Expert’, and ‘Supervisor
categories. See Figure 5 where Control Panels from the Expert category were added; but the ‘User’
and ‘Supervisor’ categories are also equally accessible.
4. Changes to the color settings of the Status Panels (e.g. background color or text color) also change
the color settings of the Binding Panel.
TEM manual Customizing Standard User interface 5
Should a new version of the TEM software be installed, the user interface should be started by the
supervisor to copy the user interface customizations from the previous TEM installation. All that is
required is to simply start then exit the user interface, i.e. the interface does not need to be started in
customization mode (see section 2).
Until this is done, any standard users starting the interface will see the default layout that has been
supplied with the TEM version just installed.
Figure 7. Removing Status Panel indicators and changing the presentation order of indicators
TEM on-line help Freeware 1
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Table of Contents
1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Copyright and liability limitation ................................................................................................ 3
2 TEM Account Log................................................................................................................................ 4
2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 The main window...................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 Overview................................................................................................................................... 5
3 Aperture Positions ............................................................................................................................... 6
4 Big Screen........................................................................................................................................... 7
4.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................... 7
4.2 General principles..................................................................................................................... 7
4.3 Popup menu ............................................................................................................................. 7
4.4 Display...................................................................................................................................... 8
4.5 Optics parameters .................................................................................................................... 8
4.6 Stage parameters ..................................................................................................................... 9
4.7 Various parameters .................................................................................................................. 9
4.8 Window position and size ......................................................................................................... 9
4.9 Help access .............................................................................................................................. 9
5 Exposure Log .................................................................................................................................... 10
6 FEG Registers................................................................................................................................... 11
6.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................. 11
6.2 The settings ............................................................................................................................ 11
6.3 FEG Registers Options........................................................................................................... 14
6.3.1 Settings files........................................................................................................................ 15
7 Image Search .................................................................................................................................... 16
7.1 Image Search Control Panel .................................................................................................. 16
7.1.1 Image shift and maximum deflection .................................................................................. 16
7.1.2 Image search controls......................................................................................................... 16
7.2 Image Search Calibrate.......................................................................................................... 17
7.3 Image Search Options............................................................................................................ 18
8 Preset Magnifications ........................................................................................................................ 19
9 Screen Saver..................................................................................................................................... 21
10 Serial Sections............................................................................................................................... 22
10.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................. 22
10.2 Location .................................................................................................................................. 23
10.3 Section.................................................................................................................................... 23
10.4 Overview................................................................................................................................. 24
10.5 Menu....................................................................................................................................... 25
10.5.1 File menu ............................................................................................................................ 25
10.5.2 Setup menu......................................................................................................................... 25
10.5.3 Section menu ...................................................................................................................... 26
10.5.4 Location menu .................................................................................................................... 27
10.5.5 Display menu ...................................................................................................................... 27
10.5.6 Help menu........................................................................................................................... 28
10.6 Control options ....................................................................................................................... 28
10.7 Reference points .................................................................................................................... 28
10.7.1 Setting reference points for new data ................................................................................. 29
10.7.2 Redoing reference points for old data ................................................................................. 29
10.8 Section data display ............................................................................................................... 30
TEM on-line help Freeware 2
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
1 Introduction
This document is a collection of the documentation of the freeware available for the TEM microscope.
Before using the software, please refer to the copyright and liability limitation below.
2.1 Introduction
The TEM Account Log software automatically monitors use of the TEM microscope, starting when you
log in to Windows and closing when you log off again. You cannot close the program but only minimize
it. The program will close automatically when you log off from Windows.
The window contains information about the current microscope session. The system assumes that you
will work with one or more project codes (up to 60 characters). The project codes normally used are
inserted in the drop-down list. The selection in the list is set automatically to your choice during the
previous microscope session.
Project codes can be added to the list by typing the code in the edit control to the right of the Add code
button. Press the Add code (which becomes enabled when values are entered) to enter the new code in
the list. The software checks against duplication of codes already present.
To delete project code(s) no longer needed, select the required code in the drop-down list, then press
the Delete code button.
Because the data are logged only when you log off from Windows, you cannot use more than one
project code during a session. If it is necessary to use more than project code, you must log off from
Windows after work under the first project code is finished (the data are then logged), then log on again
and use the other project code.
TEM on-line help Freeware 5
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
2.3 Overview
You can get an overview of your microscope usage as logged. The overview is taken from the date given
(in the edit controls to the right of the Show overview button). Default setting is the first of the current
month.
On the left-hand side is a list of the individual entries. These entries are sorted initially on date, but they
can be sorted differently by pressing the button at the top of the column that is to be the criterion for the
sorting. Press the same button again and the sorting reverses its order (from e.g. a..z to z..a). On the
right-hand side is a display of the totals per project code (taken from the date defined in the main
window).
There is no printing function provided, but the totals can easily be copied over to Notepad. Click with the
right-hand mouse button in the right-hand text part and choose Select all, then Copy in the popup menu.
Then paste into Notepad.
TEM on-line help Freeware 6
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
3 Aperture Positions
The Aperture Positions Control Panel displays the current aperture positions (in micrometers). You can
use it get an idea of the positions or check the position values (e.g. the positions will differ slightly from
MicroProbe to NanoProbe to LM).
The positions are displayed for the apertures according to their nominal aperture mechanism. On most
microscopes 1 will be C1, 2 C2, 3 Objective and 4 SA, but a few systems may deviate from this.
Notes:
• The aperture positions as listed are the positions known for the current aperture (size) for the current
mode. As long as you are centering an aperture (Adjust) the known position has not yet been
updated so you will not see any change in the aperture positions. The change will become visible
once Adjust is switched off again.
• The aperture positions are read out when you press the Get button. The Get button remains yellow
during the time it takes to read out the positions.
TEM on-line help Freeware 7
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
4 Big Screen
4.1 Introduction
Big Screen is an application that can be used to fill the 'data' space of the TEM User Interface (in case
there is no other useful information, like CCD or STEM images, to be found there), displaying a selection
of microscope settings with a large, easy-readable font, and with a user-selectable foreground (font) and
background color, to reduce ambient light from the monitor from interfering with TEM work at low light-
level conditions.
The Big Screen window can contain up to three panels, one for Optics parameters, one for Stage
parameters and the third for Various parameters. These panels can be resized at will by dragging the
splitters between them to other positions. The parameters displayed are adjusted automatically, centered
horizontally in their panel and with equal spacing in the vertical direction. Big Screen does not check and
see if there is enough space available for displaying all labels. It is up to you to define the size of the
panels and size of the font to make sure the labels do not overlap and are visible.
In principle Big Screen can be run even if the TEM User Interface is not running. There is, however, little
point in doing so, since the Control Pads (with the buttons and knobs) are disabled when the TEM User
Interface is closed. If the TEM User Interface is closed, locking the Big Screen window to the 'data'
space has no effect (apart from making the window non-sizeable).
4.4 Display
The display settings that can be chosen are the colors of foreground (font) and background and the
size and type of the font used for displaying the microscope parameters. The colors can be selected
by making the color selection bar visible. This bar will be displayed on the left-hand side of the Big
Screen window and contains the colors available. Two of the fields will contain labels, 'FG' and 'BG'
(foreground/font and background). To change the foreground color, click with the left-hand mouse
button in the color field required. To change the background color, click with the right-hand mouse
button in the color field required. You can also select the foreground color in the font selection
dialog.
5 Exposure Log
The Exposure Log is a text file with a series of microscope settings (dependent on definition by the user),
separated by tabs. Such files can easily be read in in spreadsheet programs like Microsoft Excel, which
will translate each tab into a new column (thus the settings are ordered into columns). At the beginning
of each session, the Exposure Log will write a line with 'Exposure log' followed by the date and time.
After that line follows a second line with a header, describing each item of a column. When the options
are changed, the header will be written again (otherwise the columns will not match up with the header
anymore). The starting line of the session may be the first line of the file, but data from multiple sessions
can be written to the same file (appended automatically).
Select File
When the Select File button is pressed, a standard Save As dialog is displayed in which a filename can
be defined. This filename is stored (for the particular user) at logoff and at next logon automatically
selected again. If the file exists, the new data will be appended to the file automatically (so old data do
not get overwritten). The button is yellow when a filename has been defined. When the button is still
gray, no data will be written to file.
Optics
On the Optics tab a number of settings related to the optics of the microscope can be selected.
Plate
On the Plate tab, a number of settings related to the plate camera can be stored such a exposure
number, exposure time and film text.
Stage
On the Stage tab, each axis of the CompuStage can be selected (individually) for storage.
TEM on-line help Freeware 11
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
6 FEG Registers
6.1 Introduction
The control of the FEG is somewhat complicated because of the wide range of settings under which the
gun can be used and the nature of its construction. Two elements that can be varied, the extraction
voltage and the gun lens setting, are located above the alignment coils and therefore the alignment of
the gun doesn't stay the same when these parameters are changed (the high tension used in turn affects
the way the extraction anode and gun lens are used, adding another complication). In some types of
application the FEG is only used in one or two specific settings. In these cases (e.g cryo work in Life
Sciences), there is little need for frequent changes of the gun settings and the normal method of
alignment save and recall in the microscope software will be adequate. In other cases, frequent
adjustments are made to gun settings, e.g. changes of extraction voltage and gun lens when switching
between normal or high-resolution TEM imaging and small-spot analysis, diffraction or STEM imaging.
In the latter case the frequent realignment (or alignment recalls) makes use of the FEG cumbersome,
especially since in addition to the alignment recalls several other factors (such as mode, spot size and
condenser stigmator settings) are not set along with the alignment. It is in these cases that FEG
Registers will be helpful. FEG Registers stores and recalls a number of microscope settings, making it
easy to switch between previously defined settings.
Each user can store any number of settings under a user-defined label. These settings are saved in a file
(one for each user) under the Windows NT user name preceded by usr_. Whenever the user logs in, the
settings are loaded from the file. Each of the settings can be selected in the list and set to the
microscope. Settings can also be updated and deleted. They can also be saved to and recalled from files
with user-defined names.
Important note (Titan): Because of the high degree of complexity of the Titan alignments and frequent
misalignment (due to user error, not alignment reproducibility problems), the alignment philosophy of the
Titan software has been changed. From version 1.0 onwards, users cannot execute a full alignment
anymore nor can they save alignment files. In essence users can only make minor modifications (e.g.
rotation center) through direct alignments (or alignment procedures for the gun). Because users can no
longer save alignment files, the only way to have sets of the alignments saved with easy switching is to
use FEG Registers.
Note (Tecnai) : If you want to save settings for different high-tension settings, identify them as such by
the label. High tension is neither stored nor recalled automatically.
Notes (Titan) :
• High tension is stored but not recalled automatically. If the current high tension differs from the stored
one, you will get a warning to that extent.
• Currently FEG Registers stores all aperture positions and selections but only restores the C2
aperture. Because it is possible that the apertures have been changed physically, FEG Registers
performs the following checks:
o If the size of the aperture and the aperture index match, the C2 aperture is selected and its
position will be restored.
o If the size of the aperture does not match the size of the current aperture size at the index
(which may mean that the size of the aperture as indicated has been changed on the system,
but more likely that the apertures have been changed), FEG Registers will attempt to find an
TEM on-line help Freeware 13
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
aperture in the system that has a size matching the stored aperture size. If that is found, that
aperture will be selected but the position will not be set to that in the register. If no matching
aperture size is found, any aperture that differs in size by less than 5 micrometers will be
selected (but again its position will not be set). If no matching aperture within 5 micrometer is
found, you cannot restore the FEG Registers beyond the FEG and monochromator setting
listed above.
o Note that changing the C2 aperture may take a little time and FEG Registers has to wait until
the aperture has changed before it can continue setting the optical settings. Because of this,
setting a FEG Register may take more time than previously.
Set
When the Set button is pressed the settings from the register
currently selected in the list will be set to the microscope.
Update
When the Update button is pressed, the selected setting is
updated to the settings currently active on the microscope.
Typical use of this function would be to select a setting and set it
back to the microscope. Then modify any microscope settings
needed (e.g. the gun alignment) and then update. Update
requires confirmation (since the old setting will be overwritten).
Delete
When the Delete button is pressed the setting currently selected in the list will be deleted. To guard
against accidental deletion, the Delete button will request confirmation. Multiple settings can be selected
for deletion (use Shift+Click to select a range or Ctrl+Click to select individual settings).
Settings list
The settings list gives an overview of all settings of the current user. The settings are automatically
stored when the user logs off (it is not necessary to save them to file, settings are added simply by Add
and removed by Delete). The settings list initially will display the registers in the sequence they have
been defined. It is possible to sort the settings in the list differently by pressing one of the buttons at the
top of the list (Lbl, EV, GL, ...). At the first press, the settings are sorted in normal order. When the same
button is pressed again the sequence is reversed. The width of the columns can be adjusted by moving
the cursor to the boundaries between the buttons and dragging the boundary to left or right.
The columns in the list have the following meaning:
• Lbl : user-defined label for the setting.
• EV : extraction voltage.
• GL : gun-lens setting.
• Mode : microscope mode
• Spot : spotsize
• Date (usually out of sight due to lack of space) : the date at which the setting was added.
On monochromator systems EV and GL are replaced by Pot (Potential) and Exc (Excitation),
respectively.
These data are only a subset of the settings stored, but they are the important ones that allow the user to
see which setting should be recalled.
TEM on-line help Freeware 14
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
A setting is selected for setting to the microscope or updating by clicking the required row. The label of
the setting is automatically copied to the settings label edit field to ensure the proper setting is used for
updating.
Settings label
The settings label defines the name of a new register setting (when Add is pressed). If no text is entered,
the software will add a label 'Register' with some number attached.
Add
When the Add button is pressed the settings currently on the microscope are stored in a new register
which is added to the list.
Flap-out button
The flap-out button leads to the Options tab of the FEG Registers Control Panel.
The control panel for Tecnai The control panel for Titan
The Options tab contains a few options concerning which settings are restored to the microscope, and
controls for saving the settings to file and loading them from file.
Settings options
The settings that will be restored to the microscope can be chosen by checking the required check
boxes. The categories are listed in the settings table.
File Open
The Open button brings up the standard Open file dialog from which a file can be selected for loading.
See the remark above about overwriting the currently existing settings.
File Save
The currently existing settings can be saved to file. When the Save button is pressed the settings are
saved under a user-defined filename.
Note: Under normal circumstances it is not necessary to save settings in a file because a user's settings
are saved automatically. Saving files is only useful when a user wishes to have several sets of settings
of FEG Registers or for having other users use the settings defined by another user.
TEM on-line help Freeware 15
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
File Save As
Save as is the same as Save except that another filename can be chosen.
Note (Titan) : If you save a file in a location other than c:\titan or subfolders, the file will not be found by
the update function (available to service) that makes sure that C2 aperture positions are updated when
the apertures on the microscope are changed (meaning physically removed and replaced by another
aperture).
Files do not contain a single setting but all settings together. When you load settings from file you
automatically remove all currently existing settings!
TEM on-line help Freeware 16
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
7 Image Search
Note: Image Search only works in the HM magnification range (Mi and SA magnifications). When Image
Search is active and the magnification is changed to LM, the Activate button and Reset buttons become
disabled until the magnification range goes back to the HM range (it is not possible to reset the HM
image shift while the microscope is in LM).
Activate
To start using the Image Search, press the Activate button (it will become yellow). The control of the
track ball connected to the stage (which track ball is automatically detected by the software) is changed
to the Image Search. To revert to the standard situation, press the Activate button again (the button
becomes gray again).
When the Activate button is disabled, the Image Search calibrations have not been done.
Maximum deflection
The maximum deflection (the sum of all components working on the image shift deflection coils) is
displayed by a progress bar.
TEM on-line help Freeware 17
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Reset
To Reset the image shift with a compensating stage movement, press the Reset button. The Reset
button remains disabled until the image shift has reached more than 20% of the available image shift
range (below that the inaccuracies in the compensating stage movement are such that a reset does not
makes much sense).
Auto Reset
The reset can be done manually (by pressing the Reset button) or automatically (when the Auto Reset
checkbox is checked). When Auto Reset is active, the software will do a reset when the image shift
amplitude reaches the value for the Maximum deflection range given. When the reset is automatic, the
reset is preceded by a beep (PC sound signal). Another beep sounds when the procedure is finished.
Flap-out
The flap-out button leads to the Calibrate and Options tabs of the Image Search Control Panel.
Note: The Image Search method makes use of the image shift with compensated beam shift (a standard
feature of the TEM software). For this to work properly, the Image/Beam calibration procedure of the
Image HM-TEM alignment procedure must have been done. If the beam shifts away from the center of
the screen during image shift, this calibration has not been done properly.
Start
To start a calibration, select a procedure in the selection list and press the Start procedure.
Procedure selection
The two calibration procedures are selected in a drop-down list.
Instructions
Instructions during the calibration procedures will be displayed here.
OK
Pressing the OK button proceeds with the calibration procedure to the next step.
TEM on-line help Freeware 18
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Cancel
Pressing the Cancel button cancels the calibration procedure. The microscope returns to its starting
position.
The Options tab of the Image Search Control Panel provides the
controls necessary for the setting the options of the image-
search method.
8 Preset Magnifications
Settings are user-specific and stored automatically when the TEM User Interface is closed and recalled
when it is re-opened. First-time users get the settings as defined by the Supervisor (Note: only
Supervisor, not Service or Factory), if available.
Active button
The active button determines whether the Preset Magnifications are assigned to the user buttons. The
function is active when the button is yellow, inactive when it has the normal button color.
Automatic
When the Automatic check box is checked, the Preset Magnifications function automatically becomes
activated when the TEM User Interface is started (if not, it only becomes active once the Active button is
pressed).
Magnifications
For active user buttons the magnifications used are displayed in a list to the right of the check boxes.
TEM on-line help Freeware 20
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Define buttons
The Define buttons allow definition of the microscope settings associated with a user button. For the
procedure, see above.
Instructions
The instructions field at the bottom will display instructions on how to proceed, or a status description or
error message.
TEM on-line help Freeware 21
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
9 Screen Saver
The TEM Screen Saver can be used as an easy check on the status of an unattended microscope
(provided a user is logged on).
The TEM Screen Saver (called TEM Vacuum Saver in the Display Properties) acts as a normal screen
saver and has three modes of display:
1. There is no connection to the Tem server: the display states Not connected to TEM server and
draws red octagons.
2. There is a connection to the Tem server and the column valves are closed: the display states
Column valves closed and draws green balls.
3. There is a connection to the Tem server and the column valves are open: the display states Column
valves open and draws red octagons.
There is no automatic preview in the small “monitor” in the Display Properties, but the Preview button will
start a screen saver preview.
TEM on-line help Freeware 22
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
10 Serial Sections
10.1 Introduction
The serial section software provides an automatic way of retrieving one or more locations within a series
of sections by driving the CompuStage to each location as directed by the user. The software is a
separate application that you can find in the Start menu under Programs\TEM
The serial section software assumes that the specimen contains a number of sections cut from a single
block. Each of the sections can be defined and the software can then determine equivalent locations for
each section. In this way a three-dimensional impression of the specimen can be obtained, e.g. by
recording images for a particular location in each section and combining all these images.
From these data the software determines a number of variables for each section:
• the baseline rotation angle (the slope of the line through points 1 and 2)
• the baseline stretch factor (the ratio of the distances between points 1 and 2 in any section and that
in the first section). Although not critical for the performance of the software, under normal
circumstances the baseline stretch should be very close to 1.0
• the perpendicular stretch factor (the ratio of the projection of point 3 onto the baseline in any
section and the same projection in the first section). In practice this factor can vary quite a bit.
After a first section is defined, locations can be stored or other sections can be defined (locations can be
stored in any section and at any stage of using the software). For each subsequent section, the three
relevant corners (1 through 3) must defined as for the first section. Locations are stored by centering
them on the screen and selecting the relevant function (Location, Insert).
Once a sufficient set of data has been defined, the software can be instructed to move from section to
section (where it will go to equivalent locations for each section) or from location to location within each
section. Location-section combinations can be marked as visited to allow the operator to keep track of
what has been done (an unmarked location is shown as a red number, a marked one as a black number
on a green background). The software can display an overview of the visits status. Marking as visited
TEM on-line help Freeware 23
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
can be automatic when the program is instructed to go to a location for a particular section or by active
selection by the operator. The choice between automatic or user marking is done under Control options.
Stored locations are either defined in the first section or, when the operator stores a location while on
another section, the stored location X,Y values are calculated back to the equivalent location in the first
section.
Note: The method used for calculating the point assumes that any change in location position is wholly
determined by a baseline stretch and a perpendicular stretch. The implication is that the cutting direction
must be nearly or wholly perpendicular to the baseline. If the stretching due to the cutting deviates
significantly from the perpendicular, the software will not work properly. This methodology has been
adopted on purpose because there is in the three or four corner points insufficient accuracy to
determine a variable cutting direction.
10.2 Location
A Stored location is any location at which the operator presses the Insert key or selects Insert from
Location menu. If use labels (see Control Options) is active, a dialog will appear asking the operator to
enter the label (a string with a maximum of 120 characters) for the location.
The number of stored locations that the program can handle is limited only by the amount of memory
available on the computer. However, the program will not mark locations visited for more than 64
locations (per section).
10.3 Section
A Section represents a piece of tissue on the specimen. Each section is defined by three corner points,
the first two defining the baseline (the bottom of the block where the knife hits first), the third one of the
upper corners (the best defined of the two).
The fourth corner is set only for the first section and is used only to allow display of the section shape on
the screen.
If a section is represented by a single X,Y value (e.g. under Show section or Goto
section), that value is the center of the section, defined as the X and Y values that lie
halfway between the lowest and highest values for all four corners.
TEM on-line help Freeware 24
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
10.4 Overview
It can be difficult to keep track of which location in which section has been inspected or recorded. The
software therefore marks location-section combinations as visited (either automatically or by operator
selection).
Sections are plotted vertically, locations horizontally. Green section-location combinations have been
marked as visited. If the left-hand mouse button is double-clicked on any rectangle representing a
section-location combination, the program will bring up a dialog giving the information about the location
indicated. If the button Go there is pressed, the program will move the specimen stage to that section-
location combination (and mark the location as visited if automatic marking is switched on).
If the Print button is pressed in the Status overview dialog, the overview is printed. Note that the print-out
may spread over several pages if many locations have been stored.
The maximum number of locations for the program keeps track is having been visited is 64, the
maximum number of sections is 200.
TEM on-line help Freeware 25
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
10.5 Menu
The menu contains six main items, File, Setup, Section, Location, Display and Help. Depending on the
current status of the program, some of the items may be grayed (inactive).
New specimen Resets all series settings (section, location definitions, status) as currently defined
and makes ready for a new specimen.
Open Opens an existing data file allowing continuing working with the specimen. To allow
accurate restoring of stage coordinates use reference points.
Save Saves the currently defined series settings into a data file.
Print List Prints a complete list of all sections and all locations per section.
Printer setup Leads to the Printer setup dialog (e.g. for selecting Landscape printing).
Reference points Starts procedure for storing reference points (new file) or finding back old points
(stored data on old file).
Show rf. pt. data After reference points from an old file have been found again, the program can
display the relation between old and new reference points, such as rotation angle
and relative shifts.
Delete Presents a list of sections (as serial numbers plus the section center) from which one
or more sections can be selected for deletion. If a section is marked for deletion
accidentally, click again on the section and the highlight will be removed. If only one
section is defined as yet, that first section definition will be deleted.
Show section Brings up an overview of all data concerning the current section (corner positions,
rotation angle, baseline and perpendicular stretch factors). Pressing the Go there
button instructs the program to move the stage to the section selected (either to the
currently active location or to the section center; the latter if no location has been
stored yet).
Goto section Present a list of sections (as serial numbers plus the section center). If one of these
sections is selected and OK is pressed, the stage is moved to that section (either to
the currently active location or to the section center; the latter if no location has been
stored yet).
Next section Move the stage to the next section (either to the currently active location or to the
section center; the latter if no location has been stored yet). The menu item is grayed
if no next section exists.
Previous section Move the stage to the previous section (either to the currently active location or to
the section center; the latter if no location has been stored yet). The menu item is
grayed if no previous section exists.
Mark location Marks a location as visited. The menu item is enabled only if User mark has been
selected under Control options.
TEM on-line help Freeware 27
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Note: A hidden function is present in the program if hyperlabels are (see under Control options): Clicking
with the left-hand mouse button on a stored location will bring up a dialog with data (X, Y, label) of the
stored location if such a location is near. Pressing the button Goto there will move the stage to the
location.
Delete Presents a list of locations (as serial numbers plus the label) from which one or more
locations can be selected for deletion. If a location is marked for deletion
accidentally, click again on the location and the highlight will be removed.
Display list Displays a list with all stored locations (X, Y, label) for the current section and allows
printing of the list.
Show number Shows a list of stored locations (with number and label) for the current section,
allowing selection of one location for which the data (X,Y, label) will be shown. A
button Goto allows moving the stage to the stored location.
Goto number Shows a list of stored locations (with number and label) for the current section,
allowing selection of one location where the stage will be moved.
Current section Displays the currently active section. The numbers of the current section and current
location are displayed top left. Locations are shown as red (not visited) or black on
green numbers (visited). A scale bar is shown at bottom right. If hyperlabels are used
(see Control options), it is possible to display the data of each location (X,Y position
and label) by clicking on it with the left-hand mouse button. If the button Goto is
pressed, the stage is moved to the location.
For current
section:
Baseline Displays the current section with the baseline horizontally on the monitor.
Screen Displays the current section in its orientation as on the TEM microscope's viewing
orientation screen for the currently active magnification.
Stage X,Y axes Shows the current section with the stage X axis horizontal and the Y axis vertical.
TEM on-line help Freeware 28
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
About Brings up the program About box with version and copyright information.
The display colors can also be changed by clicking on the display with the right-
hand mouse button, giving the popup menu where the relevant color can be
chosen.
Reference points should be located close to but not at the periphery of the specimen. Locations further
from the center increase the accuracy of relocation but if a reference point later lies outside the reach of
the stage, it is not possible to recalculate the old locations to new ones. Because specimens are often
shifted up to 0.2 mm when re-inserted into the specimen holder, keep the reference points less than 800
um away from the center.
Setting the reference points can be done at any stage of working with the Serial Section software (but
before the data are saved into a file, otherwise the reference points are not included in the file). When an
old file containing reference points is opened, the software will ask to redo the reference points
immediately. If the reference points are not redone at this stage, the software will display the stored
locations in their original configuration. It is then no longer possible to redo the reference points (unless
by reading in the file again).
During this procedure the software can assist in finding back the old reference points through the Assist
function. The Assist function will list a number of possibilities depending on which reference points must
be found again:
• move the specimen stage to the old location for point 1
• move the specimen stage in a circle, around 0,0 for point 1, around 1 for point 2, etc.
• calculate alternative locations for points 2 and 3 on the assumption that the specimen is upside down
After finding reference point 1, the software will calculate what the most likely new location is for
reference point 2 and ask if the stage must be driven there. The same is done for point 3 (if a third
reference point had been set originally).
For each reference point found back as well as the whole set of the reference points the software will go
through a number of consistency checks (distances between old points and new points comparable,
angles from the center of gravity of the old three-point triangle and old points and the center of gravity of
the new three-point triangle and new points comparable).
The software can handle rotation, shift and mounting upside down of the specimen. The software also
calculates a 'stretch' parameter that is related to the percentage difference in dimensions between old
TEM on-line help Freeware 30
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
and new reference points. The software cannot however accommodate severe distortions due to
bending of the specimen, so some care should be taken to ensure the integrity of the specimen. The
various values can be displayed under Show ref. pt. data.
These data consist of the X,Y positions of the four corners, the rotation angle of the baseline, and the
perpendicular and baseline stretch values.
TEM on-line help Freeware 31
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
11 Total Recall
The Total Recall Control Panel provides the means for storing specimen locations in such a way that
later the specimen can be re-inserted into the microscope and the locations easily found again. This is
achieved through the use of two or three reference points, which should be locations on the specimen
that are easily recognised. When the reference points are found again upon re-insertion of the specimen
holder, the software recalculates the original specimen locations, taking proper account of specimen
rotation, shift and mirror (the latter when the specimen is reloaded upside down). A prime application for
the Total Recall software is dual-axis tomography, where two separate tilt series are collected of the
image area, with a rotation of about 90° of the specimen in between. The combination of these two
series reduces the missing wedge to a (smaller) missing pyramid (and thus reduces the consequent
aretefacts). However, you can use the software in any other way you see fit.
Label
At the top of the control panel is an edit control wherein you can define the label used for the next
location added. When you enter no label, the software will automatically use the label "Location " plus a
serial number.
Add
Press Add to add the current stage position to the location list.
Location list
The location list contains all user-defined locations, shown by label and X,Y location. The stage locations
are displayed as rounded off micrometers values, but the software stores more accurate values of the
stage location.
Goto
If one of the locations in the list is highlighted (by clicking on it with the mouse), the Goto button is
enabled. Pressing the Goto button will have the software drive the stage to the indicated location. Goto's
are subject to the normal uncertainties in stage position (~500 nm for X and Y, no backlash correction is
done because the original storing of the locations is also done without backlash correction so any such
correction later on would be without benefit).
TEM on-line help Freeware 34
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Delete
If one of the locations in the list is highlighted (by clicking on it with the mouse), the Delete button is
enabled. Pressing the Delete button removes the selected location from the list.
Flap-out button
The flap-out button leads to the Reference points and File tabs of the Total Recall Control Panel.
The Total Recall Reference Points tab provides the means for
defining and inspecting reference points.
Define
On a new specimen, the reference points are defined by pressing the Define button. The user will be
asked to center two or three reference points on the screen with the stage (if you use but two reference
points, keeping points two and three the same, the software will not be able to determine if the specimen
has been reloaded upside down). The software will display the X,Y locations and labels defined for the
reference points.
The manipulation of reference points from an existing file is started automatically when a file with
reference points is loaded (for further explanation see below).
TEM on-line help Freeware 35
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Show data
If an existing file has been reloaded and the reference points found again, the software will display the
X,Y locations and labels defined for the reference points. In addition, it is possible to compare some data
on the old and new reference points in a separate dialog that is called up by pressing the Show data
button.
The data listed are the old and new reference point positions, whether the specimen is upright (same
way as before) or upside down, the rotation angles calculated for the average and each individual
reference point set (old to new), the shift of the specimen, and the stretch between sets of reference
points (in principle all stretch factors should be very close to 1.0).
Reference points
The bottom part of the panel displays the X,Y locations and labels of the current reference points.
Reference points should be located close to but not at the periphery of the specimen. Locations further
from the center increase the accuracy of relocation but if a reference point later lies outside the reach of
the stage, then it is not possible to recalculate the old locations to new ones. Because specimens are
often shifted up to 0.2 mm when re-inserted into the specimen holder, keep the reference points less
than 800 um away from the center.
Setting the reference points can be done at any stage of working with the software (but before the data
are saved into a file, otherwise the reference points are not included in the file). When an old file
containing reference points is opened, the software will ask to redo the reference points immediately. If
the reference points are not redone at this stage, the software will display the stored locations in their
TEM on-line help Freeware 36
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
original configuration. It is then no longer possible to redo the reference points (unless by reading in the
file again).
As a first step the software lists the old location for reference point 1 and you can have the software drive
the stage there (in case you expect the new point to be close to the old one).
During this procedure the software can assist in finding back the old reference points through the Assist
function. The Assist function will list a number of possibilities depending on which reference points must
be found again:
• move the specimen stage to the old location for point 1
• move the specimen stage in a circle, around 0,0 for point 1, around 1 for point 2, etc.
• calculate alternative locations for points 2 and 3 on the assumption that the specimen is upside down
TEM on-line help Freeware 37
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
After finding reference point 1, the software will calculate what the most likely new location is for
reference point 2 and ask if the stage must be driven there. The same is done for point 3 (if a third
reference point had been set originally).
TEM on-line help Freeware 38
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
For each reference point found back as well as the whole set of the reference points the software will go
through a number of consistency checks (distances between old points and new points comparable,
angles from the center of gravity of the old three-point triangle and old points and the center of gravity of
the new three-point triangle and new points comparable).
The software can handle rotation, shift and mounting upside down of the specimen. The software also
calculates a 'stretch' parameter that is related to the percentage difference in dimensions between old
and new reference points. The software cannot however accommodate severe distortions due to
bending of the specimen, so some care should be taken to ensure the integrity of the specimen.
The Total Recall File tab contains three buttons which bring up
standard File dialogs for loading and saving data from and to file.
Total Recall files are text files with the extension .prf. You can in
principle open these files in Notepad but if you make changes it
is possible that Total Recall can no longer read the file.
Open
When the Open button is pressed, the Open file dialog comes up
where you can select a file for loading. When the loading is
finished and the file contains reference points, the procedure for
finding the reference points again is started.
Save
Once a filename has been defined, the Save button is enabled so you can simply save the data under
the same filename (to save under another filename use Save As).
Save As
When the Save As button is pressed the Save file dialog is brought up, allowing you to define a filename
to save the data.
TEM on-line help Freeware 39
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
12 Vacuum Logger
12.1 Introduction
Vacuum Logger is a program for the TEM microscope that allows logging of vacuum pressures and the
high tension condition (disabled, off, on). The logging data are written to a file and, if selected by the
user, displayed graphically on the screen. The graph can be printed. Logging files can be read by the
program (on-line on the microscope as well as off-line) and displayed graphically. All data logged are in
Pascal. The program allows a maximum number of 10000 measurement cycles.
12.5 Menu
The menu contains four main items, File, Display, Log and Help.
Open Opens an existing log file and displays the data graphically. Selecting Open always
stops any logging currently being done.
Print Prints the graphical display.
Printer setup Leads to the Printer setup dialog (e.g. for selecting Landscape printing).
Statusbar Shows or hides the Statusbar wherein display parameters can be defined for
individual pressures or high tension.
Lock to data The Vacuum Logger window can be locked to the 'data' space of the TEM User
space Interface (the empty space left over by the user interface in its various display
modes). If the display of the TEM User Interface is changed and the Vacuum Logger
window is locked, the size of the Vacuum Logger window is adjusted automatically.
When locked, the Vacuum Logger window cannot be resized (though it can be
moved around).
Delayed action When checked, delayed action is on, otherwise it is off. After selecting delayed
action, you still have to start logging (but now you start the timer that looks if the start
date and time have passed).
About Brings up the program About box with version and copyright information.
TEM on-line help Freeware 41
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Logging can be started and stopped manually or in delayed-action mode. In delayed-action mode the
panel contains additional controls for defining Start date and time and Stop date and time. The formatting
of date and time must be exactly as indicated (a maximum of two characters for the date, then month,
then year, all separated by hyphens; a maximum of two characters for the hour, then a colon, then two
characters for the minutes).
Note: It is possible that the 1 second interval is not totally stable and may result in the program hanging
(since the logging data are saved for each measurement the logging file will still be accessible).
Especially for larger series of measurements (>200 cycles) it is advised not to use the 1 second interval.
For this reason it is also not possible to display the vacuum pressures for the log interval of 1 second. If it
is necessary to log at 1 second intervals, first collect the log and then read in the log file to obtain a
display.
12.7 File
The logging file is a text file. The file starts with a header, which contains the start date and time and a
line displaying the names of all vacuum elements measured. The last item is the high tension status. The
individual measurements are separated by tabs, making it easy to read the file into spreadsheet
programs like Excel (read in as text file).
The data logged are always the complete data from the microscope, not just the elements selected for
display in the graph.
TEM on-line help Freeware 42
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
12.8 Display
The central part of the Vacuum Logger window is reserved for a graphical display of the pressures and
high-tension status. The horizontal scale is the true time of the log (thus even if the logging interval is
changed during the acquisition, the values will still plot properly along the scale).
• For a display of a file read from disk, the horizontal scale stretches form the start time to the end
time.
• During logging, the horizontal scale will start at the start time, but the end of the scale is adjusted in
steps. Initially the program will choose an end value for the horizontal scale. Once the logging time
has exceeded that value, the scale will be expanded (typically by a factor 2). Since the display width
doesn't change, the display of the pressures will jump back halfway. In this way the graphs will
appear to 'grow' progressively to the right as logging proceeds, with stepwise adjustments when the
horizontal scale becomes too short.
In the off-line case the top line lists the start time at far left. The corresponding value on the scale is the
absolute left-hand point (not a tick that may or may not be centered on the label). The far right right value
is the end time of the log and once again the corresponding value is the far right-hand point of the scale.
In the center is listed the interval represented by the tick marks. The tick marks are chosen such that
they represent unitary (whole) values. This means that the first tick mark in the figure below coincides
with the first unit value (1 hour) after the start time, in this case 2:00:00 PM (so not 1 hour after 1:21:21
PM). At the lower line is indicated the number of measurement cycles read from the log file.
In the on-line case the top line is the same as in the off-line case, showing the start and end times of the
scale and the tick mark value. The lower line now shows on the left how many measurement cycles have
been done, in the center when the next measurement will take place, and on the right the current system
time.
12.9 Print
The print from Vacuum Logger will be a close a match to the display with some modifications.
• The height and width of the print-out will be matched to the paper size (Portrait or Landscape)
available, while the ratio of height and width will be the same as the display.
• The background of the graph will be white. Light colors such as yellow are made somewhat darker
for better printing. It is advised to use a color printer, otherwise it may not be possible to distinguish
between multiple lines in the graph.
• The printed graph has a header listing the vacuum elements displayed with their scale value. These
labels are in the same colors as the lines and act as legend. If a pressure is displayed with log scale,
the label is followed by '(log )' with a number indicating the exponent of the value used for the base.
TEM on-line help Freeware 43
Freeware Software version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The following controls are present in the Statusbar, from left to right:
• A drop-down list with the settings that can be displayed.
• A checkbox that determines whether a setting is displayed.
• A drop-down list box with a range of scaling factors (used as maximum display values), including
Default (set by the program to the maximum value found for the particular setting). All pressures are
scaled individually. The high-tension status is scaled from disabled (just above the base line) to off
(center) to on (just below the top).
• The value of the maximum of the particular setting. When Default is chosen, this is the maximum
value of the display scale.
• A checkbox to select between regular and log scaling.
• A drop-down list box with a selection of colors.
Since a log scale in principle can go to very small numbers, the minimum of the log scale is not 0 (as it is
for the regular scale). Instead the minimum of the log scale is the truncated exponent of the smallest
value of the particular pressure. For example, if the pressures range from 99.9 to 1.1, the truncated log
value of 1.1 = 0 will be minimum of the display scale. While a pressure ranging from 3.33e-2 to 1.2e-5 will
have as minimum the truncated log value of 1.2e-5 = -5. The maximum value is as defined by the user
(Default or one of the fixed values).
There is no fixed recipe for determining whether a log scale is useful or not, because it will depend on
the pressure range as well as the absolute values. If the pressure range is within a factor 10, a normal
scale is more useful. Similarly, a small pressure range can also lead to compression of the graph at the
top of the display, for example when there are a few values just inside a lower decade.
The figures above show an example of the effect of plotting a vacuum pressure on a log scale. The
regular scale (on the left) is dominated totally by the 'spike' of high pressure and the fine details of the
pressure changes are invisible (unless the scale is modified so the 'spike' goes far off the maximum
scale. In the log scale display on the right, the fine details are well visible while the 'spike' is still within
the whole vertical range.
Tecnai on-line help Modes 1
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
Note 1: Because of the latter aspect, it is much more important to align the aperture in a reproducible
manner (always following the same procedure; that is, use the same magnification and defocus the
beam by the same amount each time) than having a ‘perfectly’ aligned aperture (by whatever criterion).
Procedure
• Select a suitable magnification (the choice is up to user, but select the same one each time).
• Focus the illumination using the Intensity knob and center the beam, as necessary, using the beam
shift (left-hand track ball).
• Defocus the illumination clockwise (overfocus) by a set amount (e.g. to the 4 centimeter circle on the
viewing screen). The illuminated area should still be around the center of the screen. If not, align the
condenser aperture using the mechanical aperture controls to achieve this condition.
• Repeat the last two steps until the illuminated area remains centered.
Note 2: There typically is a difference between the aligned condenser aperture in the microprobe and
nanoprobe modes (requiring adjustment when switching between these modes). This mechanical
misalignment is a consequence of the difficulty of mechanical alignment of the minicondenser lens.
Generally, the misalignment is readily apparent when changing from one mode to another. However,
when switching to STEM (in essence a nanoprobe mode) from microprobe, this misalignment may not
be apparent. It is advised, therefore, to proceed via nanoprobe (for centring the aperture) when going to
STEM.
objective aperture in is one way of preventing the destruction of biological specimens. Another method is
to keep part of the illumination on a grid bar. The latter method is dangerous, however, because the
specimen with blow up as soon as the beam is no longer on the grid bar (e.g. when the specimen or
beam is moved). Neither method can be used for EDX analysis (which requires that the objective
aperture is removed; and flooding the EDX detector with X rays from the grid bar also will not be
conducive to good analysis) and there a properly conducting specimen is required (carbon coating or put
on a conducting carbon film).
In less strongly insulating specimen, charging may appear as a shivering or repeated jumping of the
specimen. It may be possible to reduce the charging by selecting a smaller beam (lower total current)
and/or smaller objective aperture. Once again, a carbon coating may prevent charging altogether.
Procedure 1
• Select a suitable magnification (as required by the type of image, e.g. 5kx to 20kx for intermediate-
magnification work or 100kx for high-resolution work).
• Set proper illuminating conditions (beam defocused – overfocus, i.e. clockwise with intensity – to
illuminate the whole viewing screen or just beyond the rim of the screen).
• Switch to diffraction.
• Select a camera length of approximately 500 mm.
• Insert the required objective aperture into the beam and center it around the central beam spot using
the mechanical aperture controls.
Procedure 2
• Insert the objective aperture.
• If no bright-field image is visible at all, it may be necessary to use procedure 1 for rough centering
first. Otherwise, shift the aperture until there is no cut-off of the illuminated area visible (if necessary
defocus/focus the beam).
Procedure
• Select a suitable magnification (around 500x).
• Set proper illuminating conditions (beam defocused – overfocus, i.e. clockwise with intensity – to
illuminate the whole viewing screen or just beyond the rim of the screen).
• Switch to diffraction (LAD).
• Select a low camera length (typically the fourth of the LAD range).
• Insert the largest selected-area aperture into the beam and center it around the central beam spot
using the mechanical aperture controls.
Note 1: The Tecnai microscope uses (small) image shifts between different magnification steps to align
the different magnifications (the image stays centered when the magnification is changed). Because this
alignment is executed with the image shift deflection coils, located between the objective lens and the
SA aperture, it is impossible to shift both the image and shadow of the SA aperture at the same time (the
shift takes place between them). The consequence of the image alignment is therefore an apparent
shift of the SA aperture when the magnification is changed. Always select the appropriate
magnification first and then insert and center the SA aperture.
Note 2: If the diffraction shift pivot point is not aligned properly, changing the diffraction shift (either
intentionally by the user or simply because the camera length is changed and the new camera length
has a different alignment) will lead to an image shift as well. Since this image shift takes place above the
SA aperture, the specimen area will move out of the aperture and the diffraction pattern will come form a
different area than the one intended. It is therefore important to ensure that the pivot points of the image
coils (the image and - especially – the diffraction shift pivot points) are aligned properly. Because the
diffraction shift pivot point is very sensitive to the objective-lens current, it is also important to make sure
that the specimen is at the eucentric height (additionally the eucentric height is important for accurate
values of camera length and magnification).
Procedure
• Obtain an image at a suitable magnification.
• Insert the SA aperture and center it on the area of interest (by preference near the screen center)
using the mechanical aperture controls.
• If no aperture is visible upon insertion, reduce the magnification or select and center a larger aperture
first before continuing on to the aperture with the required size.
Note: If the objective aperture is smaller than the central beam, use either a smaller C2 aperture,
defocus the beam with Intensity, or use a larger objective aperture.
Procedure
• Obtain an image at a suitable magnification.
• Insert the objective aperture and center it on the area of interest (by preference near the screen
center) using the mechanical aperture controls.
• If no aperture is visible upon insertion, reduce the magnification or select and center a larger aperture
first before continuing on to the aperture with the required size.
1.3 Focusing
There are many ways of focusing the image. Some of the more common ones are described below.
One simple tool always available is the Eucentric focus function which works both in image and
diffraction. In image the Eucentric focus sets the focus to the value for the eucentric height. Assuming
that the specimen is at the eucentric height, this eucentric focus function provides a quick method for
getting close to the proper focus. The actual value set is set in the various alignment procedures (HM
Image, LM Image, Nanoprobe Image).
In diffraction, the Eucentric focus function resets the user-defined focus to zero. When properly aligned
(by means of the Camera Length Focus in the HM Image procedure), this effectively means that the
focus is set to the back-focal plane (see section 1.3.4).
1.3.1 Wobbler
The function of the wobbler is to deflect the beam alternately to either side of the optical axis. When the
objective lens is focused exactly on the specimen plane, no change in the image is apparent. However,
when the objective lens is focused above or below the specimen plane there is an apparent double
image so the wobbler is very useful for emphasizing focusing errors.
The direction of the wobbler effect should be selected perpendicular to the direction of the structures to
be focused. This is adjusted using the Multifunction-Y knob.
The amplitude of the wobbler effect is adjusted using the Multifunction-X knob. This angle should be
adapted to the size of the objective lens aperture otherwise loss of intensity will occur when the wobbler
is operated (if the beam tilt become too high the transmitted beam is stopped by the objective aperture).
Tecnai on-line help Modes 7
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
Focus without use of the wobbler. Focus after use of the wobbler.
Note: The appearance of multiple images (one from the transmitted beam and other ones from strong
diffracted beams) is a consequence of the spherical aberration of the objective lens (and the absence of
an aperture to block the diffracted beams). Even at true focus, these multiple images may remain visible.
In general this aspect is not troublesome, except in the low-magnification range. When the objective lens
is (nearly) off, the diffraction lens is used as the ‘objective’ lens. When used in this way, the diffraction
lens has a very long focal length (hence the very strong contrast in the LM image) and also high
spherical aberration. Because of the latter, the multiple images may be pronounced, making it very
difficult to focus (the images will not merge together, even at focus).
1.3.3 Contrast-enhancement
In some cases (especially in biology) it is advisable to set the focus deliberately a certain amount
underfocus to enhance contrast. The amount of underfocus set depends on the magnification (at high
magnification an underfocus image looks blurry while the same amount of underfocus at lower
magnifications may look sharp) and the degree of contrast enhancement required.
With a parallel beam incident on the specimen (grey), the objective lens
focuses the electrons into a cross-over whose position coincides with
the back-focal plane (and thus the true diffraction focus).
When the beam is convergent (but not wholly focused), there still is a
cross-over but it is displaced from the back-focal plane upwards (in the
extreme case, a fully focused beam, the cross-over lies at the image
plane).
Tecnai on-line help Modes 9
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
If the diffraction pattern is not focused properly, there are a number of consequences:
• the camera length can be wrong
• the diffraction will be rotated away from its proper orientation
• the pattern may be distorted
• alignments such as beam shift pivot points can be wrong
• the scanning magnification can be wrong due to misaligned pivot points
Due to the absence of a clear criterion, we end up with a chicken-and-egg situation (what was first, the
chicken or the egg?). For example, if it can be assumed that the shift pivot points are correct, then it is
easy to establish the correct diffraction focus by wobbling a beam shift and minimising diffraction-pattern
movement. However, the pivot points can only be aligned correctly if the diffraction pattern is focused
properly.
In order to resolve this situation, we have determined Intensity settings for the different modes (LM, HM-
TEM and Nanoprobe) for a parallel beam. These Intensity settings are preset in the alignment
procedures, making it easy to find diffraction focus (the spot-pattern condition). After the alignment have
been done (camera length focus), the diffraction focus can also be found by simply pressing the
Eucentric focus button (this resets the variable diffraction focus to zero). With this method for
establishing diffraction focus, the SA aperture is not (and should not be) used.
Note: Focusing must be carried out for each eye separately and the eyes should be focused at infinity,
fully relaxed.
High-magnification range
Astigmatism is most easily observed on the screen when viewing Fresnel fringes. These fringes result
from diffraction phenomena that occur at sharp edges of a specimen when the objective lens is slightly
underfocused or overfocused. When the image is underfocused (objective lens weaker than focus), the
Fresnel fringe appears as a bright line round the edge of the detail selected. If the detail is a hole, the
line will appear on the inside. When the image is overfocused (objective lens stronger than focus), the
Fresnel fringe appears as a dark line but otherwise has the same characteristics as in the underfocused
condition. With a perfectly symmetrical objective lens field, the fringes will be of uniform width. With an
asymmetrical (astigmatic) objective lens, the fringes will also be asymmetrical and, close to the focus,
part of the hole will have a bright fringe and the other part a dark fringe associated with it.
For more information about astigmatism in electron lenses, reference is made to the many text books on
electron optics, for example:
Experimental High Resolution Electron Microscopy (2ed.), J. C. H. Spence, Oxford University Press,
New York, Oxford.
A typical test specimen for measurement and correction of astigmatism is a very thin carbon support film
with small perforations. This film must be of a conducting material, because of the high magnifications
and thus high beam intensities that will be used and great care should be taken to ensure that the film
adheres firmly to the supporting grid.
Very small spherical particles can also be used, but this is not advisable because of the possibility that
the projected periphery of the particles may not originate from a single plane. In that case, there will be
an inherent change of focus around the particle which cannot be distinguished from astigmatism and will
thus be corrected when correcting the astigmatism.
Tecnai on-line help Modes 11
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
In general, accurate correction of astigmatism can be made only at high magnification and under good
image visibility conditions. This implies high beam intensity on the specimen.
In order to compensate for objective lens astigmatism applicable to the M and SA magnification range,
an electromagnetic astigmatism corrector is built into the microscope below the objective lens. There are
two possible methods for correcting the astigmatism. In the first, use is made of the special test
specimen described above. In the second, use is made of the fact that, at high magnification, all thin
objects have a substructure in the size range 0.3-0.2 nm and use is then made of the point/focal line
phenomena. The latter method is preferred because of the influence of the specimen itself, causing
astigmatism to vary for different areas of the specimen. The method requires some experience, however,
and it is recommended that this experience be gained, where necessary, by comparing the effect of the
two methods on the special test specimen.
Method 1
This method is illustrated in the figure which shows two focal series with astigmatism uncorrected (left-
hand side, figure a to c) and corrected (right-hand side, figure d to f). The procedure is as follows:
• Obtain a TEM BF image of the test specimen at high magnification (around 100 000x).
• Press the Stigmator pushbutton (LED illuminated).
• Select a very small hole. This should be of such a size that it is visible in its entirety through the
binoculars at the highest magnification used.
• Adjust the Focus until the entire hole is overfocused yet close enough to focus for the fringe
asymmetry to be visible (black fringe inside the hole, Fig. a). Change of focus (lower excitation of the
objective lens) produces the images in Figs. b and c.
• Adjust the Multifunction knobs so that the Fresnel fringe is symmetrical when the objective lens is
very slightly overfocused.
• To perform this procedure, start adjustment by turning one of the Multifunction knobs until the setting
for minimum astigmatism is obtained (best symmetry for overfocused image). Then adjust the other
knob for minimum astigmatism.
• Repeat the preceding step at a higher magnification and with smaller focusing step sizes until
adequate correction is obtained (Fig. d). The criterion for this is that no asymmetry of the fringe can
be seen at one or two step positions overfocus of the finest step size. Change of focus (lower
excitation of the objective lens) gives rise to the images in Figs. e and f.
Tecnai on-line help Modes 12
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
Method 2
This method is shown in the figure below which shows two focal series with astigmatism uncorrected
(left-hand side, figure a to c) and corrected (right-hand side, figure d to f). The procedure for correction of
the astigmatism on the specimen sub-structure is as follows:
• Select and center a small C2 aperture (50 um).
• Set the magnification to a high value (about 200 000x).
• Set the spot size to step 3 and reduce the Intensity as far as possible to be consistent with good
visibility of the structure (the contrast of the substructure disappears if the beam is focused too
much).
• Select a thin part of the specimen showing fine structure.
• Select focus step 2 and with the focus knob, vary the objective lens from slightly overfocused to
slightly underfocused (total change in focal length less than 1 um).
• Look for the line foci (Figs. a, b and c). Set the Focus knob halfway between the settings for these
two foci (Fig. b).
• Press the Stigmator pushbutton (LED illuminated).
• Adjust the two Multifunction knobs one at a time to decrease the apparent size of the background
structure and at the same time reduce the line effect (Fig. d, e and f) on changing to over and
underfocus.
• Repeat the preceding step (at a higher magnification if desired) until the focal distance between the
line foci is as small as required (3 nm or even smaller is possible).
Note: With very thin specimens the substructure disappears from the visual image at focus. This can be
used as a very sensitive check on the final correction. The two Multifunction knobs are then used to
reduce the contrast of the substructure until it finally disappears at focus.
Tecnai on-line help Modes 14
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
LM magnification range
When operating in the LM mode, it is possible that some astigmatism will be observed at the higher
magnifications. If it is required to make photographs in this mode, astigmatism in the image can be
corrected by one of the following methods.
Method 1
This method is the same as method 1 for the high-magnification range.
• Insert a test specimen (as described before under method 1 for the high-magnification range).
• Press the Stigmator pushbutton (LED illuminated).
• Insert and center the second-largest SA aperture.
• Select the highest LM magnification. At this stage, Fresnel diffraction fringes should be observed
around the inside of the holes in the specimen.
• If these fringes are not symmetrical, correct the astigmatism using the Multifunction knobs.
• Adjust the Focus until the entire hole is slightly overfocused, yet close enough to focus for the fringe
asymmetry to be visible (black fringe inside hole).
• Adjust the Multifunction knobs one at a time so that the Fresnel fringe is symmetrical when the image
is very slightly overfocused. This is achieved by turning the two Multifunction knobs until a setting for
minimum astigmatism is obtained.
Method 2
This method is illustrated in the figure below showing:
a : An overfocused image with asymmetrical Fresnel fringes indicating astigmatism
b, c, d : A through-focus series with wobbler in use with astigmatism uncorrected.
e, f, g : A through-focus series with wobbler in use with astigmatism corrected.
h : A corrected, focused image, wobbler not in use.
• Ensure that a platinum aperture not smaller than 150 mm is mounted in the selected-area aperture
holder and that it is clean.
• Insert a specimen and center a suitable detail.
• Center the selected-area aperture.
• Press the Stigmator pushbutton (LED illuminated).
• Set the magnification to the highest LM value.
• Press the Wobbler pushbutton.
• Focus the image so that the blurred image details (Fig. c) are as nearly coincident as possible.
• Adjust the Multifunction knobs until the image details are coincident (Fig. f).
• Repeat the last two steps.
Tecnai on-line help Modes 16
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
2 Calibration procedures
In normal operation (i.e. with the specimen in the eucentric position), the accuracy of magnification and
camera length will be within ±5% of that indicated on the display. To obtain more accurate values, a
calibration curve must be made for the microscope using the normalisation facility for each magnification
and camera length value. The normalisation facility takes the excitations of all magnifying lenses through
a hysteresis cycle, making lens hysteresis conditions consistent and therefore reproducible. Once such a
calibration has been carried out, reproducibility to within 1.5% of the calibrated value is obtained.
Normalisation is obtained by operation of the projector normalisation procedure (selectable under the
User button functions).
Important notes:
• Ensure that the grating replica has first been checked by light microscopy.
• Ensure that the specimen is in the eucentric position.
• Begin the calibrations at a very low magnification to enable the elimination of random faults in the
grating.
• Do not use a grid opening in which tears occur.
• At the intermediate magnifications, check the spacings of the actual lines used against the same
lines in the lower magnifications, again to eliminate random errors.
• Do not attempt an accurate calibration with less than 5 lines and only then if they can be checked as
described in the previous point above.
• At higher magnifications, calculate the ratios between steps of the magnification range by
photographing two particles at the two magnifications and comparing their separations, or use high-
resolution micrographs of a specimen with a known lattice spacing. If available, an FFT may provide
an easier and more accurate method of estimating the magnification (by measuring diffraction
spacings) than counting lines in the image.
• Ensure that, at each step of the calibration, the normalisation has been executed.
Calibration of the image-diffraction rotation angle can be done by exposure of images and diffraction
patterns. A good test specimen for this is molybdenum trioxide crystals on a carbon film. Molybdenum
trioxide is (pseudo)orthorhombic with lattice parameters a 0.397 nm, b 1.385 nm and c 0.370 nm. It
forms flat crystals, usually lying on [010] that are commonly elongated with the long edges parallel to
[001]. From a double-exposure (or overlay) of image and diffraction pattern the rotation angle can be
established. To check for 180° inversion, make the diffraction pattern from a relatively thick crystal near
one of the points. In the diffraction pattern diffuse intensity will show an 'image' of this point (with the
intensities of the diffraction spots also outlining the point. From the direction of the point, it can then be
seen whether there is 180° inversion or not.
Tecnai on-line help Modes 20
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
3 Bright-field imaging
Note: Never use the single-tilt holder with magnetic specimens. The objective-lens field is strong
enough to rip the specimen out from underneath the clip and leave it stuck on a pole piece.
Because of the strong variability of the rotation center with magnetic specimens, it is often easier to use
the dark-field tilt to align the rotation center. The following procedure provides a rapid method that leaves
the normal microscope alignment unaffected.
• With a normal (non-magnetic) specimen set the rotation center.
• Switch to diffraction for a selected camera length (e.g. the one closest to 500mm).
• Use the normalisation function and accurately center the diffraction pattern on the screen.
• Insert the magnetic specimen.
• Find a suitable area to start working.
• Switch to diffraction, select the same camera length as before and use the normalisation function.
• Switch on the dark-field tilt (press the Dark field button) and use the Multifunction knobs to center the
diffraction pattern on the screen.
• The incident beam is now parallel to the rotation center without the magnetic specimen. Insert and
center the objective aperture around the beam and go back to imaging. Stay in dark field!
• Whenever significant stage-position changes are made, check the beam tilt in diffraction again.
Tecnai on-line help Modes 21
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
4 Dark-field imaging
Dark-field imaging means that the image is made by allowing one (or more) diffracted beams through the
objective aperture and blocking the transmitted beam. The advantage of the dark-field image is its
inherent high and diffraction-selective contrast.
The origin of the high contrast is shown schematically in the figure to the left.
Bright-field as well as dark-field images display changes in intensity across the
image. In both cases the total range of intensities is roughly similar. In bright-
field images, however, the changes in intensity come on top of a high and
unvarying signal – the undiffracted electrons. If one attempts to expose for a
longer time to improve the signal, the negative becomes overexposed. In the
case of the dark-field the background signal is much lower, leading to a much
higher contrast in the image.
Note: With negatives the inherent lower contrast of the bright-field image is inescapable. With slow-scan
CCD images it is however possible to subtract the uniform background from the image and stretch the
contrast.
Switching between Dark and Bright Field images may be achieved simply by successively pressing the
Dark-field button. Multiple settings for different dark-field tilts can be stored in the dark-field channels.
5 Diffraction
With a parallel beam incident on the specimen (grey), the objective lens
focuses the electrons into a cross-over whose position coincides with
the back-focal plane (and thus the true diffraction focus).
When the beam is convergent (but not wholly focused), there still is a
cross-over but it is displaced from the back-focal plane upwards (in the
extreme case, a fully focused beam, the cross-over lies at the image
plane).
If the diffraction pattern is not focused properly, there are a number of consequences:
• the camera length can be wrong
• the diffraction will be rotated away from its proper orientation
• the pattern may be distorted
• alignments such as beam shift pivot points can be wrong
• the scanning magnification can be wrong due to misaligned pivot points
Due to the absence of a clear criterion, we end up with a chicken-and-egg situation (what was first, the
chicken or the egg?). For example, if it can be assumed that the shift pivot points are correct, then it is
easy to establish the correct diffraction focus by wobbling a beam shift and minimising diffraction-pattern
movement. However, the pivot points can only be aligned correctly if the diffraction pattern is focused
properly.
Tecnai on-line help Modes 24
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
In order to resolve this situation, we have determined Intensity settings for the different modes (LM, HM-
TEM and Nanoprobe) for a parallel beam. These Intensity settings are preset in the alignment
procedures, making it easy to find diffraction focus (the spot-pattern condition). After the alignment have
been done (camera length focus), the diffraction focus can also be found by simply pressing the
Eucentric focus button (this resets the variable diffraction focus to zero). With this method for
establishing diffraction focus, the SA aperture is not (and should not be) used.
The shadow image (in this case from SAED diffraction) can be understood from the diagram below.
When a parallel illuminates an area of the specimen, all transmitted (bright-field) beams converge in a
single cross-over in the back-focal plane of the objective lens. In this cross-over we cannot distinguish
between beams coming from the different parts of the specimens, because all beams go through a
single point (ideally). However, above or below the back-focal plane, the beams do not go through a
single point but - in three dimensions - they form a disk and each point in the disk corresponds to an
area of the specimen.
In SAED the shadow image is obtained by changing the diffraction focus (FOCUS). In CBED the shadow
image is obtained by defocusing the beam on the specimen (INTENSITY).
Nomogram showing the relation between objective-lens Cs, electron wavelength λ, diffraction angle α, d
spacing and diffraction error δ (the deviation between the center of the SA aperture and the center of the
actual area from which the diffracted beam is coming). The nomogram works as follows. Draw a line
connecting the wavelength with the diffraction angle α or d spacing. Draw a second line connecting the
Cs with the intersection of the first line and the α scale. The intersection of the extrapolation of the
second line with the δ scale gives the diffraction error (for the particular α or d spacing assumed). Note
that all scales are logarithmic. The lines are drawn for a d spacing of 0.1 nm and the 200 kV objective
lenses.
Nevertheless selected-area diffraction has still some important applications, mostly where angular
resolution in the diffraction pattern (size of the diffraction spots) is important. An example is the detection
of weak superlattice spots which become quickly invisible when their small total intensity is spread out
over a disk rather than being concentrated in a small diffraction spot.
Note: The smallest aperture diameter is in general not smaller than 10 um, which will give a distortion-
free diffraction pattern from an area of the specimen of about 400 nm in diameter.
Note: Recording the diffraction pattern should be carried out with manual exposure-time selection as
automatic exposure readings are not reliable in the diffraction mode. The time is best judged from
experience gained from a series of test exposures obtained with fixed illumination conditions (emission,
high tension, intensity and spot size) for the different sizes of selected-area apertures. As a rough
estimate, one-third of the value of the automatic exposure time may be used.
The procedure for 'aperture-less' diffraction is simple: locate the beam on the area of interest and select
the Intensity (beam focus) setting. Then go to diffraction.
Tecnai on-line help Modes 27
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
focus out of the specimen plane) while keeping the beam focused. When this is done, a diffraction
pattern appears overlaid on the image, with the size of the diffraction pattern proportional to the distance
between the specimen and the focus plane. The selected area aperture can then be used to select a
single beam, either the transmitted beam or a diffracted beam, which is then the only beam contributing
to the diffraction pattern.
Procedure
• Start in the TEM (microprobe) mode. Center the specimen at the eucentric height. Orient the
specimen as required.
• Set up the nanoprobe mode with a condenser aperture of 50 um, with beam centered and focused,
and the image in focus. Select a spot size somewhere in the low end of the range (higher spot
numbers). Check that the specimen orientation is still in the proper orientation. If high angles are
required, increase the size of the condenser aperture.
• Increase the focus (typically by several micrometers) or alternatively move the specimen up with the
Z axis height control (the advantage of moving the specimen is that the electron-optical conditions do
not change; the disadvantage that the specimen is moved and is no longer eucentric).
• A diffraction pattern will now be visible around the transmitted beam.
• Insert a selected-area aperture (start with the smallest) around the transmitted beam. If the aperture
is still too large so that diffracted beams still pass through the aperture, increase the focus
current/raise the specimen further.
• Once the diffraction pattern is large enough to allow only one beam to pass through it, center the
aperture around the beam of choice (transmitted or diffracted).
• Switch to diffraction and you have the LACBED pattern.
Notes:
• The maximum diffraction angle is determined by the size of the condenser aperture, the objective-
lens current (the highest angle is typically obtained for objective-lens settings of 5 to 10 um
overfocus) and the SA aperture. It is easy to establish if the condenser or SA aperture is angle-
limiting. Simply shift one of the apertures slightly. If the shadow at the edge of the diffraction disk
moves with it, that is the limiting aperture. If the condenser aperture is angle-limiting (and higher
angles are needed), switch to a larger aperture if possible. If it is the SA aperture, switch to a larger
SA aperture but remember to check that the aperture allows only one beam to pass!
• A properly focused beam will typically have a small bright spot in the center, surrounded by a halo
(caused by the spherical aberration of the objective lens).
• Optimize the diffraction angle by slightly changing the Intensity setting to get the largest disk size and
at the same time not running against the SA aperture.
• If ‘sausage’-shaped dark areas are visible in the pattern, the beam is not properly centered inside the
SA aperture.
One problem with LACBED patterns is that they mix diffraction and image information because the
interaction area between the specimen and beam is large (the beam is focused but not at the specimen
itself). This is the price one pays for having no overlap and yet large disks. Because of the mix of image
and diffraction information, LACBED patterns often display distortions (due to specimen bending) and
thickness changes across the disk. Another ‘feature’ of LACBED patterns is that they show rubbish on
the specimen surface with high contrast (but often only visible once the negatives have been recorded).
Make sure the specimen is as clean as you can get it.
It is also possible to have simultaneous bright-field (transmitted-beam) and dark-field (diffracted) beams
in single pattern. To achieve that do not insert an SA aperture but stay in image mode and defocus the
beam (Intensity) until the beams of the diffraction pattern touch each other.
Tecnai on-line help Modes 29
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
6 Analysis
There is a big difference between EDX and EELS analysis. In the case of EDX analysis, the detector is
mounted close to the specimen and X-rays can be detected from the whole specimen area, not only the
area intended (and hit by a focused beam). In the case of EELS it is much easier to keep 'spurious'
signals out from the detector. For EDX it is important therefore to pay attention to the conditions for
analysis.
Note: Never use a normal holder for EDX analysis. Special low-background holders with beryllium
shielding around the specimen exist in single-tilt and double-tilt versions. Some of the regular holders
(especially the single tilt) also have very 'deep' specimen cups and completely shield the specimen from
the EDX detector unless the tilt angle is well above 25°.
Tecnai on-line help Modes 30
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
There is a second factor related to the diffraction- or image-coupling. The standard mode of operation for
EELS analysis is diffraction (image coupling). The diffraction pattern is simply placed at the entrance
aperture of the PEELS or Imaging Filter. Area selection is done with the focused beam. One reason for
using diffraction is that one can simply move from one area for analysis to another by shifting the beam;
the diffraction pattern will remain stationary and so it is not necessary to center the beam on the EELS
entrance aperture. This same principle applies to analysis in STEM. It should be realized, however, that
the beam shifts (in one direction; the other direction is parallel to the energy axis of the spectrum) will be
visible in the spectrum as a spectrum shift. This effect gets magnified at low camera lengths (as often
used for EELS). The effect is readily visible when EELS spectrum acquisition is done in STEM with a
continuously scanning beam at low camera length. Under these conditions the apparent energy
resolution may be 10 eV or more. For proper operation under such conditions a descan facility is needed
(but not yet available on Tecnai).
The α angle can be measured simply from a diffraction pattern. The equations can be derived as
follows:
CBED α / 2θB = A / D
The latter formula says that the angles in the diffraction pattern (convergence angle and a Bragg angle of
a diffracted beam) are proportional to the ratio between the distances measured in the pattern (the
radius of the diffraction disk A and the distance from transmitted to diffracted beam D).
The β angle is more complicated because it depends on the operating mode of the microscope. If the
microscope is in image mode (diffraction-coupled in EELS terminology), the β angle is determined by the
objective aperture. To measure this, record a diffraction pattern with the objective aperture in and
substitute the radius of the objective aperture for the radius of the diffraction disk in the formula for the α
angle above .
In diffraction (image-coupled) the β angle is determined by the effective size of the EELS entrance
aperture. If the entrance aperture were at the same level as the viewing screen (or plate camera), one
could simply take the radius of the aperture and substitute once again in the formulas for α above.
However, the aperture is much further down and so it projects a smaller size as seen from the final
cross-over in the microscope (in the differential pumping aperture at the top of the projection chamber).
To determine the b angle one thus needs to know the distances from the cross-over to the plate camera
(the reference for the camera length value; this distance is 438.5 mm) and from the cross-over to the
EELS entrance aperture (748.75 mm; it is the same for PEELS and Imaging Filter). From these data it is
easy to construct a table with β acceptance angle values (using a spreadsheet program like Microsoft
Excel):
• Make a first column listing the camera lengths (viewing screen up!) of the microscope (leave the top
cell A1 empty). When the camera lengths are for the EFTEM lens series, make a factor
"EFTEM Factor" with value 21.35 to divide the values as listed (these camera lengths refer to the
CCD as the reference position, not the plate camera). For the normal lens series this factor equals 1.
• Fill cells B1, C1, D1 and E1 (for PEELS, omit E1 for Imaging Filter) with the values of the entrance
apertures.
• Fill in the table with the formula (resulting in mrads)
1000 * “EFTEM Factor” * (dcross-over to plate / dcross-over to EELS) * (aperture size / 2) / (camera length)
where aperture size is the value in the first row and camera length is the value in the first column.
Aperture (mm) 1 2 3 5
Cam Length (mm)
14 21.69 43.38 65.07 108.45
27 10.85 21.69 32.54 54.23
35 8.37 16.73 25.10 41.83
44 6.66 13.31 19.97 33.28
62 4.72 9.45 14.17 23.61
84 3.49 6.97 10.46 17.43
135 2.17 4.34 6.51 10.85
180 1.63 3.25 4.88 8.13
265 1.10 2.21 3.31 5.52
450 0.65 1.30 1.95 3.25
630 0.46 0.93 1.39 2.32
910 0.32 0.64 0.97 1.61
1750 0.17 0.33 0.50 0.84
2650 0.11 0.22 0.33 0.55
3500 0.08 0.17 0.25 0.42
3900 0.08 0.15 0.23 0.38
Tecnai on-line help Modes 32
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
7 STEM
In the STEM (or Scanning) mode of the microscope images are acquired by moving a focused beam in a
raster across the specimen and collecting a signal at each x,y pixel coordinates. The signals for all pixels
together make the STEM image.
The scanning of the beam across the specimen on the Tecnai microscope is achieved through a set of
beam deflection coils (called the AC coils) that is separate from the 'static' beam shift coils (or DC coils).
The AC beam deflection of the scan is thus superimposed on the DC deflection (which is used to align
the beam along the optical axis - the rotation center - and center the beam). The AC deflection coils have
their own characteristics and thus their own pivot points, separate from those of the DC coils (the
procedure to align the AC coils is similar to the DC alignment, though).
STEM magnification works different from TEM magnification. The TEM magnification is the result of the
magnification by the objective lens (a constant value) and the - variable - lenses of the projector system
(Diffraction, Intermediate, Projector lenses). The STEM magnification is the result of the deflection of the
beam. If the beam is deflected far from the optical axis, the scanned area is large and thus the STEM
magnification low. When the beam is deflected only a little, the scanned area is small and the STEM
magnification high.
Some STEM detectors are located close to the specimen (secondary-electron, backscattered electron)
and for these the setup of the magnification system is irrelevant (they would still work even if the
microscope shutter - below the specimen area - would be closed). For other detectors, like the bright-
field and dark-field detectors, the setup of the magnification system is important. The setup of the bright-
field/dark-field detectors makes clever use of a characteristic of a beam that is being scanned parallel to
the optical axis: the diffraction pattern remains stationary while the beam moves. It is therefore possible
to detect the bright-field signal by placing the central (transmitted) beam on a bright-field detector, while
an annular (ring-shaped) dark-field detector around the bright-field collects the signal from (some of) the
diffracted beams. Which diffracted beams (or rather, which range of diffraction angles) are being
collected on the dark-field detector depends on the camera length of the diffraction pattern. At low
camera lengths the collected angles are large (and the dark-field detector effectively is a high-angle
annular dark-field detector), while at higher camera lengths the angles are smaller. The limitation on
camera lengths on the lower side is determined by the off-axis diffraction shift required to move the
diffraction pattern to the detector (the bright-field/dark-field detectors are located about 3 cm away from
the center of the viewing screen), while on the high side the limitation (in this case only for dark-field) is
the size of the diffraction disk of the central beam (since the beam is focused, the diffraction pattern has
disks, not spots). Once the central-beam disk becomes too large, it starts to fall on the dark-field
detector.
There are typically two camera lengths around 90 to 100mm. One of these is rotation-free, the other is
not (it is rotated relative to the other camera lengths). The rotated camera length is used for STEM high-
angle dark-field imaging with the normal dark-field detector (on the lowermost rotation-free camera
lengths the high diffraction angles are shadowed by the differential pumping aperture, so very little high-
angle dark-field signal is available).
Tecnai on-line help Modes 33
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
Currently only the 'Nanoprobe' type of STEM (that is, the microscope is effectively in the nanoprobe
mode) is implemented in the Tecnai software, but later Microprobe and LM STEM will be implemented
as well.
When the pivot points are set correctly, the scanning beam will remain
parallel to the optical axis. All beams will pass through the same cross-
over in the back-focal plane of the objective lens.
When the pivot points are wrong the beam will either diverge away from
the optical axis or converge (picture below). When the beam is
diverging, the outermost positions of the beam are further away on the
specimen than in the parallel-beam case. Consequently, the beam
scans a larger area of the specimen and the scanning magnification will
be lower.
One limitation on the degree to which the beam remains parallel to the optical axis is spherical
aberration. Beams that travel far off-axis are affected more strongly than beams closer to the axis. The
consequence is that the scanning beam at low magnifications will not remain truly parallel to the optical
axis but tilts slightly towards the optical axis. The main consequences are a change in effective
magnification across the image and some movement of the diffraction pattern.
Note : In addition to spherical aberration of the objective lens (which does affect the scan pattern), there
can also be an effect of spherical aberration of the diffraction lens for some camera lengths. This effect is
noticeable from the stronger movement of the diffraction pattern.
7.3 Detectors
Since the beam in STEM is focused on the specimen, the signal is generated only from the area where
the beam is actually located. This makes it possible to use a wide range of detectors for STEM. Some of
these detectors produce a signal in a similar way to TEM imaging. The Bright-Field (BF) detector collects
the same signal as the TEM Bright-Field image : the transmitted beam. Other detectors such as the
Secondary-Electron (SE) or Energy-Dispersive X-ray (EDX) detector can only be used with a focused
beam because these detectors lack the optics (electron or X-ray) to separate signals from different areas
of the specimen when a broad, defocused beam is used. In principle, all detectors can be used to
acquire STEM images (even a slow-scan CCD could be used in principle to record and process signals
and thereby generate a STEM image). In practice some detectors receive too weak a signal (EDX) or
read out too slowly (CCD) to be used for image acquisition.
The non-retractable BF detector consists of a scintillator (converting electrons to light) and photo-
multiplier (detecting and amplifying the light signal, then converting it to electron current). The scintillator
has a diameter of 7 mm. The assembly (together with the dark-field detector) is located in the so-called
near-axis position underneath the projection chamber, which is about 3 cm ENE of the center of the
viewing screen.
WARNING : POTENTIAL DAMAGE ! The retractable BF detector can be damaged by a very high
electron dose. If you are using the detector with a very high beam current (e.g. for X-ray mapping),
change to a high camera length so the central-beam disk is large and the electron dose per detector
area is not too high.
Important note on the retractable BF detector. The area covered by the BF detector is larger than the
holes in the DF2 and DF4 detectors. Consequently, when you set contrast and brightness with the BF
inserted but the DF retracted and then insert one of the DF detectors, the area of the BF detector
receiving signal will be much reduced and typically no BF signal is observed any more. Set the contrast
and brightness again (AutoCB) and the signal will re-appear.
Tecnai on-line help Modes 35
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
The retractable DF detectors (there are two with different diameters) are annular solid-state detectors
with outer diameters of 24 mm and inner diameters of 2 (DF2) and 4 (DF4) millimeters. These detectors
are located above the the retractable BF detector.
In order to attract the secondary electrons an extraction anode is placed above the specimen. The
extraction anode can be supplied with voltages in the range -50 to +150 Volts. Where a backscattered-
electron (BS) detector is mounted in combination with an SE detector, the extraction anode is integrated
with the BS detector.
Because of the placement of this detector, alignments affecting the positioning of the diffraction pattern
(as for BF/DF) have no relevance (since that effect occurs much further down the column than where the
Tecnai on-line help Modes 36
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
SE detector is mounted). The pivot point alignment are important, however, because they affect the scan
raster itself.
For additional details, see also the last two paragraphs under SE detector.
The EDX signal can be recorded for each pixel in a STEM raster, allowing collection of X-ray images.
Since collection of EDX spectra is slow, these images are generally recorded with a limited number of
pixels and in a single acquisition, and processed afterwards.
Note: The centering of the diffraction pattern on the screen depends on the diffraction shift set as well as
on the rotation center. Misalignment of the rotation center (which effectively is a beam tilt) gives a
diffraction shift, so check the rotation center as well. In addition, the centering of the diffraction pattern
may be sensitive to the magnification-system lens settings. Using projector normalization makes the
position much better reproducible.
Tecnai on-line help Modes 37
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
The pivot points and the perpendicular correction are the most important user adjustments. The pivot
points (which determine the ratio between the upper and lower coils, for x and y separately) make sure
the beam moves parallel to the optical axis. The perpendicular correction corrects for any rotation
between the upper coils and the lower coils by adding a small lower-y shift to the x shift (executed itself
by upper and lower-x) and a small lower-x shift to the y shift (executed by the upper and lower y shift)
The relative strengths of the coils as well as the perpendicularity are set through separate adjustments
on the upper-x and upper-y coils .
All these adjustments should result in a STEM image with minimum distortions.
The scanning acquisition board puts out voltages for x and y (called line and frame in STEM), causing
the beam to be moved around the specimen. These voltages can cover the full range possible or can be
only a subrange. The microscope itself translates these voltages into beam deflections. The amplitude of
the beam deflection is defined by the combination of the voltage from the scanning acquisition board (in
TIA) and by the scanning magnification (set by the microscope software). This combination has
important consequences for the magnification and resolution in an image, as described below.
The detector signals are fed into the scanning acquisition board. The Analog-to-Digital (ADC) converters
of the board convert the current coming off the detector and convert it into a digital signal. The ADC
inputs of the scanning acquisition board are not fed directly from the detectors but instead from three
video channels (with each channel directly connected to an ADC converted). The detectors themselves
can be switched from one channel to another. This setup exists for two reasons:
• it makes it possible to have more detectors than the maximum number of ADC converters available.
• the video channels themselves contain hardware that adjust the amplification and offset of the
detector signals to the optimum range for the ADC converters, similar to the detector contrast and
brightness (except that the video level adjustment is a factory/service setting because it is fixed - that
is, not dependent on beam current, specimen or detector type).
Tecnai on-line help Modes 38
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
The scan acquisition board can output voltages within a certain maximum range. It is also possible to
have the acquisition cover only part of the maximum range. These ranges can be covered by a user-
defined number of pixels.
Resolution refers to the number of pixels taken across the maximum scan range. This a resolution of
2048 means that the full range is covered by 2048 pixels (in the x direction). A resolution of 512 means
that the same range is covered by 512 pixels, so the distance between the pixels is 4x larger than for the
resolution 2048.
Frame size refers to the range covered by the acquisition. If the value equals the resolution, the scan
covers the maximum range. Any lower value has the scanning take place over a sub-range. Thus, at a
resolution of 2048 and a frame size of 512 the scan covers only a quarter of the range (and thus the total
area covered is 1/16th because both x and y are affected).
STEM magnification affects the maximum range of the scan frame and is thus a factor by which the
output signal from the scan acquisition board is multiplied (or rather divided, because a higher STEM
magnification reduces the size of the scan frame).
Some examples
Let us assume a STEM setup with the following parameters: resolution 2048, frame size 2048, STEM
magnification 20000x. What happens when we change:
• Resolution to 512. The Frame size will automatically go to 512, the STEM magnification stays the
same and the field of view stays the same as well. The only thing that changes is that the image now
consists of 512x512 pixels instead of 2048x2048 pixels.
• Frame size to 512. The scan frame now covers only a subrange (512/2048 so one-quarter of the total
range available) and the effective magnification in the image has increased by a factor 4 (even
though the STEM magnification setting itself remain unchanged).
• STEM magnification to 80000x. The area scanned by the beam is reduced by a factor 4. The other
settings are unaffected. Unlike the case where the frame size was changed, it is now still possible to
collect an 2048x2048 image at this STEM magnification.
Why is there a duplication in the controls (Frame size and STEM magnification)? The scan acquisition
board does not have enough range (theoretical maximum 4096, in practice limited to 2048) in its settings
to give a reasonable range of scan magnifications and keep a reasonable number of pixels in the image.
The STEM magnification range covers a factor 100 or more. If the frame size were to be used for that
Tecnai on-line help Modes 39
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
purpose, the image at the highest magnification would only have a maximum of 41x41 pixels (in practice
20x20 pixels due to other limitations).
Ultimately, the effective magnification of the image as seen on the monitor or a print also depends on the
how the image is displayed or printed. You can, for example, display an image of 16x16 pixels on the
monitor such that 1 image pixel is 1 monitor pixel and the image size is about 5x5 mm. You can also
display that same image much larger so that 1 image pixel covers 40 monitor pixels and the image size
on the monitor is about 200x200 mm. In the latter case the apparent magnification is clearly much larger
than in the former. The only absolute criterion for size in the image is therefore the scale bar.
Contrast and brightness are interdependent in the sense that the brightness comes on top of the
contrast. This means that changing the brightness setting has no effect on the contrast (the total range of
the signal stays the same; it is only shifted up or down), but changing the contrast does change the
Tecnai on-line help Modes 40
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
brightness level (in the diagram above, the green lines would move up when the red lines would go to
higher angles).
A further control over contrast and brightness is present at the level of the video signal. Since we display
the image in a digital form, it is possible to subtract or add a constant value from / to the image, or
multiple / divide the image by a constant factor. These are the video contrast and brightness levels used
for display.
There is a significant difference between detector contrast and brightness and video contrast and
brightness. The latter only affects how the image is displayed on the monitor and doesn't change the
information in the image (by resetting contrast and brightness you can always get back to the original
setting). The detector contrast and brightness are absolute. If the detector brightness is set so high that
the whole image is white, there is no manipulation of the video contrast and brightness possible that will
result in information in the image.
In general the optimum setting for detector contrast and brightness is such that the whole range of the
video signal fits within the allowed video signal boundaries (0 to 65536, or 16 bit). Usually the 16-bit
range in the video levels is sufficient to allow later manipulation of the video contrast and brightness (or
any other form of image processing) to bring out any detail needed. Detectors signal levels above or
below the maximum and minimum will be uniform white and black and will no longer have any image
information in them.
• Make sure the TIA control panels are visible and click on the Video tab
Tecnai on-line help Modes 41
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
• Click on the Lock button to lock the video scale (no more automatic adjustment).
Now the video range is set to its maximum and the output signal from the detector can be set to cover
the full range from black to white by adjusting detector contrast and brightness.
7.6.6 Filters
Ideally images recorded on an electron microscope contain information and no noise (random variation
not related to information coming from the specimen). In practice there are a number of sources of noise
- which reduces the quality of the image - such as electron shot noise and electronic noise. The shot
noise (the square root of the total number of electrons making up the image per pixel) is unavoidable and
can only be reduced by increasing the electron dose, thereby making the ratio of the number of electrons
and its square root larger and thus the noise less significant. In the case of STEM there are two aspects
to electronic noise that can affect the images:
• noise on the beam deflection (beam position)
• noise on the video signal
In the case of noise on the beam deflection, the voltage coming from the Digital-to-Analog Converter
(DAC) of the scan acquisition board is imperfectly translated to an accurate scanning beam position due
to various reasons. In order to reduce this type of noise, the STEM system can be equiped with scan
filters (FEG instruments only). In the case of noise on the video signal, the detected electron signal is
imperfectly translated to a digital value for a pixel in the scanning image. In order to reduce this type of
noise, the STEM system is equiped with video filters.
Both the scan filter and the video filters are low-pass filters, that is, they allow a low-frequency signal to
pass through while a high-frequency signal is stopped. Since real information in the scanning image
typically comes from low-frequency signals, while most electronic noise has a high frequency, the filters
remove the major part of the noise. Inherently, the filters use our knowledge from STEM image
acquisition. For example, if we collect a STEM image with 100 milliseconds per pixel, then we know that
the beam deflection and the video level will change 10 times per second. If the beam deflection system
or video signal changes much more rapidly than that, it must be due to noise. We can then smooth out
the rapid variation (noise) to end up with a better STEM image.
The scan filter is needed only on FEG systems. It is set in the STEM Imaging Scan (Expert) control
panel. For this beam deflection filter there are four settings, Off (very fast scanning), Fast, Medium and
Slow (slow scan image acquisition). When the scan filter is in automatic mode, it will be adjusted to the
scanning speed. In manual control, which is only available by experts, the use of the wrong setting can
lead to excessive noise (Off while doing the final image acquisition slowly) or image distortion especially
at the left-hand side where each new line starts (Slow while scanning very rapidly). The filter must
therefore be matched to the scan speed used. Only experts can override the automatic mode.
The video filter is set in the STEM Detector Selection (Expert) control panel. For the video filter, each
channel has a wide range of settings, selectable from a drop-down list. The filters can also be controlled
automatically in which case they are matched to the scan speed. In manual control, which is only
available to experts, the correct filter setting can be determined by lowering the value until the image
starts to have horizontal streaks (signal variations are smeared out over several pixels). Now increase
the value again by approximately two steps (or at least until the streaks are completely absent).
Tecnai on-line help Modes 42
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
8 EFTEM
EFTEM (Energy-Filtered TEM) makes use of the fact that (some of) the beam electrons lose energy
inside the specimen (this process is called inelastic scattering). Energy losses on the one hand degrade
the image (since electrons that have lost energy are focused differently from those that have not lost any
energy, strong energy losses result in image blurring, an effect that increases in strength with specimen
thickness). On the other hand, the energy losses contain specific information about the specimen
(chemical and physical). In EFTEM, the electrons are separated according to their energies, making it
possible to filter out the blurring effects or retrieve the chemical or physical information from the
specimen.
When the energy-loss electrons are separated according to their energy, they form an energy-loss
spectrum. A typical energy-loss spectrum consists of the zero-loss peak (those electrons that have lost
no or negligible energy), and towards higher energy losses a signal that at first increases strongly (within
the first 50 volts, usually with a maximum around 25 volts) and then decays towards high energy. The
decay is not monotonous but superimposed on this general background are so-called energy loss edges
(regions where the signal first rises steeply, then decays again towards higher energy), which are the
result of energy losses through interactions with specific atoms (the edges are thus element-specific).
The amount of inelastic scattering increases with specimen thickness (in general quite rapidly),
dependent on the incident electron energy and on the material the beam is interacting with (in general
the heavier the material, the stronger the interaction). An important parameter for EFTEM is the so-called
Mean Free Path, which is a dimension that indicates the pathlength inside the specimen wherein all
electrons (statistically speaking) will have undergone one inelastic scattering event (since some
electrons will have undergone multiple scattering by then, after one mean free path there still remain
some unscattered electrons). Typical mean free paths are of the order of 50-100nm for 120kV electrons,
100-200 for 200kV and 150-300 for 300kV. Above one mean free path is is still possible (and often even
advantageous) to filter images in order to remove energy-loss electrons. However, the other main
application - elemental mapping - becomes much more difficult and often even impossible at such
specimen thicknesses. For good elemental mapping ultra-thin specimens are therefore important.
of 3 mm diameter in the center of the projection chamber. The electron beam passes through a (sector
or prism) magnet that describes part of a circle. The sector magnet separates the electrons according to
their energy into an energy spectrum. After the magnet lies a retractable slit and thereafter a series of
lenses. The lenses restore the image (which can also be a diffraction pattern) at the entrance aperture
so it can be viewed on a TV or recorded on a slow-scan camera.
In image mode, one image plane lies at the level of the viewing screen (or plate camera), with a second
one at the level of the recording camera of the Imaging Filter (behind the imaging lenses of the Filter
itself). In this mode, a diffraction plane occurs at the level of the differential pumping aperture (a 200 mm
aperture that separates the projection chamber from the column) and a second at the slit of the Filter.
The second diffraction plane thus combines a diffraction pattern with a spectrum. In diffraction mode, all
image and diffraction planes are reversed with respect to the image mode.
One important aspect about these image and diffraction planes is the inverse relation between
magnification or camera length of these planes. Thus, if the magnification in image mode is high, then
the size (camera length) of the diffraction pattern in the differential pumping aperture and at the slit of the
Filter is small. If the image magnification is low, then the diffraction patterns are large. And, since the
magnification series for EFTEM contain extremely small real magnification, the diffraction patterns in the
pumping aperture and at the Filter slit can be enormous! The same applies to the images when the
microscope is in diffraction with a small camera length. Under these circumstances (low magnifications,
small camera lengths) alignments become highly critical and some phenomena may appear:
• Astigmatism that can be strong and increases to lower magnifications due to charging of the slit of
the Filter. If the diffraction pattern at the spectrum plane becomes very large, the slit not only cuts off
energy-loss electrons but also works like a very small and asymmetric objective aperture. This may
lead to increasing image astigmatism towards lower magnifications. To avoid or reduce such effects,
use a small objective aperture (thereby removing most of the diffracted beams) and use a somewhat
larger slit width.
• The slit becomes visible as a shadow in the image or diffraction pattern. At low magnifications or
camera lengths the electrons beams go through high angles relative to each other and, due to
spherical aberration, cannot be focused properly at a single plane - the slit - causing the higher-angle
beams to be cut off. Increase the size of the slit, if possible.
• Slight beam shifts make the diffraction pattern disappear at low camera lengths. When the image at
the differential pumping aperture becomes very large (as happens at low camera lengths), even
slight beam shifts may cause the beam to be intercepted by the differential pumping aperture. Use
the specimen stage rather than the beam shift for aligning the area of interest for diffraction.
There is one important aspect to the cross-over correction: in image mode the cross-over correction is
the same as a diffraction shift and vice versa (the cross-over correction uses the same image deflection
coils as the image/diffraction shift. This means for example that the alignment values of the diffraction
shift (the centering of all diffraction pattern together, not the alignment of the individual camera lengths)
also affect the cross-over correction. Also if (by accident) a diffraction shift is executed in image mode
(such as happens when the Diffr shift is constantly active on the Multifunction knobs), the cross-over
correction will be affected.
8.4.3 Normalizations
The image or diffraction shifts used for the image/diffraction alignment and the cross-over alignment can
be very sensitive to the actual values of the magnetic fields of the lenses in the projection system
Tecnai on-line help Modes 45
Tecnai 12 to Tecnai F30 Software version 4.0
(Diffraction, Intermediate and Projector lenses). The lens normalizations bring these lenses to more
reproducible settings - and, as a consequence, more reproducible image/diffraction shifts and cross-over
corrections. It is therefore advised to allow the microscope to execute a projector-system normalization
whenever the magnification or camera length is changed (an alternative to the automatic normalization it
is also possible to do the normalization by hand, by assigning projector normalization to one of the
Control Pad user buttons).
8.4.4 SA diffraction
Because of the cross-over correction (which shifts the image while in diffraction, but the shift occurs
before the SA aperture so the 'area of interest' moves relative to the SA aperture), SA diffraction is
difficult to execute in EFTEM. In addition, the larger area of selection (relative to CBED) causes
problems at low camera lengths (because the image in the differential pumping aperture and spectrum
planes is so large) such as diffraction astigmatism that cannot be corrected.
Instructions
Multi Position Sample Holder
For
FEI Compustage
-1-
FEI Compustage Multi Position Sample Holder
Includes:-
1 Multi Sample holder
1 Loading jig with circlip expander
1 Circlip Extraction Tool 016
1 Circlip pusher
1 spare "0" ring
1 spare circlip
1 Instruction manual
The specimen sample holder is always shipped and is best stored in the wooden
storage box with the acrylic cover tube. If the rod is to be transported by post or
courier then a packing piece needs to be placed between the handle and the box end.
Use the specimen loading jig at all times whilst removing or loading samples. This
will prevent undue pressure on the bearing surfaces of the rod and prevent any
distortion of the tip.
-2-
Carefully place the rod onto the loading jig with the circlips facing upwards. Hold the
rod steady using a gloved hand or lint free tissue between the hand and the rod, this
will prevent tarnishing and will maintain the cleanliness of the rod.
Circlip Pliers
Circlip
Grid
Sample holder
Using the circlip extraction tool, place the end into the circlip. Press the circlip
extraction tool (Circlip pliers) together to expand the tip and there by grip the
internal grove of the circlip.
-3-
Pressure here to grip the Circlip Ring
Circlip pliers
Circlip
Grid
Sample holder
Hold the specimen rod onto the stand and carefully pull out the circlip vertically
upwards, to remove the circlip from the rod.
With the circlip tool over a clean surface or over a piece of lint free tissue release the
tension on the circlip extraction tool. This will release the circlip and allow the tool to
continue removing further circlips.
Place the specimen grids into the specimen rod hole vacated by the circlip and check
that it is seated flat into the base.
Again using the circlip extraction tool, place the end into the circlip. Press the circlip
extraction tool together to expand the tip and there by grip the internal surface of the
circlip.
Press the circlip into the recess by pressing the expanded circlip tool squarely and
vertically down into the circlip recess.
Release the tension on the circlip extraction tool. This will release the circlip and
allow the tool to be removed from the circlip which should now be held firmly by the
rod, and there by securing the specimen grid.
Circlip Pliers
Circlip
Grid
Sample holder
-4-
Check that the circlip has been pressed home and is in good contact with the grid with
the cirlip pusher This will prevent circlip loss while entering the microscope and will
prevent specimen drift and charging while under the beam of electrons.
Note the use of the pusher tool is only for testing that the circlip is sitting squarly in
its correct position. It is not an insertion tool.
Circlip Pusher
If the circlip is not a good fit into the sample holder the circip will need to be
expanded using the mandrill on the side of the loading jig.
Regally inspect the circlip for signs of damage.
Circlip
-5-
Inserting the rod into the microscope
Select standard holder when asked by the Microscope Computer, which type of
sample holder?
Changing
samples
-6-
Sample position 3
Cleaning
Remove the circlips from the rod and clean the tip of the rod and the circlip using as
little mechanical polishing as is necessary to remove the tarnish. Wenol or any other
suitable EM cleaning agent can be used. It is recommended that the cleaning agent is
removed using 5% Quadraline / distilled water in an ultrasonic bath, followed by
distilled water, followed by acetone or methanol.
Only the first 30mm of rod end should be immersed into the liquids for cleaning.
Other parts of the rod may be wiped with a solvent loaded lint free cloth.
Maintenance
It may become necessary during use, to apply a small film of vacuum grease to the
external 'O' ring of the rod to assist insertion and withdrawal from the EM. We would
recommend the use of Fombalin high vacuum grease in very small amounts, as per
the Microscope manufacturers instructions.
It is recommended after a period of time depending on use that the external 'O' ring on
the rod be replaced. This is best achieved by removing the old ring using a wooden
cocktail stick. Slide the sharp end of the cocktail stick under the 'O' ring and using a
gloved hand roll the 'O' ring out of the grove and off the rod. Clean the 'O' ring grove
using a polishing cloth and then wipe over the surface with a small amount of solvent
Acetone, Ether, or any suitable EM cleaning solvent.
During use the circlips may become loose in the specimen rod due to wear this will be
noticed while loading the circlips into the rod. In this situation a circlip expansion
mandrel has been provided in the loading jig. Using gloved hands or lint free tissue to
hold the circlip push the circlip onto the expansion mandrel which is attached to the
Vee block end on the specimen support jig. This will expand the external diameter of
the circlip, and allow it to grip the rod internal surface once again.
-7-
Circlip Mandril which is used to expand circlips
Push
circlip
up the
mandrill
Replacement parts:
-8-
Warranty
E.M.S Specimen rods are guaranteed for a period of 12 months against faulty
workmanship or faulty materials.
Exclusions are:- When the bearing jewel has been damaged,
When the rod has been bent,
When the rod has been unassembled.
emservice429@btinternet.com
The manufacturer reserves the right to make small changes to the product
which may show as a slight variations in the operation manual.
-9-
TEM on-line help 1
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Low Dose works on film as well as on CCD cameras. Please note that the CCD camera must support
use of the beam blanking (pre-specimen "alternate shutter") for shuttering to be effective in Low Dose.
adjustments on an adjacent area. The location of that area is defined through distance and rotation
controls. Two separate positions can be set, e.g. when one of the positions falls on a grid bar or for
focusing a tilted specimens.
Beam deflection
coils
Minicondenser
lens
Objective Objective-
lens condenser
lens
Beam shift
Specimen
Image shift
Objective-
imaging
Objective lens
aperture
Image deflection
coils
SA plane
Schematic diagram of the operation of the off-axis shift of the Focus state. The user controls the image
shift below the specimen, thereby bringing an off-axis area (tan ray path) into view. The microscope
automatically compensates the image shift with a beam shift to keep the illumination centered on the
area currently in view (otherwise the illumination would move away from the center and remain on the
area that should not be damaged).
The Exposure state has the conditions appropriate for the actual exposure. Under normal circumstances
the Exposure state is switched to only initially during setup (defining the Low Dose settings) or after an
exposure as a check.
TEM on-line help 7
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
1. Preparation
a) Switch to the Exposure state (press Exposure button).
Select the Settings tab in the flap-out and press Exposure Reset.
Set conditions like magnification, spot size, intensity.
Center the beam.
Read off the exposure time and enter it in the Expose panel.
Use the electron dose rate read-out to verify that the dose on the specimen per exposure will be
below the tolerance limit.
b) Switch to the Focus state (press Focus button).
Select the Settings tab in the flap-out and press Focus Reset.
Set conditions like magnification, spot size, intensity.
Set the required off-axis shift (with Multifunction X,Y or the trackbars in the Focus panel).
Center the beam.
If necessary repeat for the second Focus substate (except for magnification, spot size and
intensity which are the same for the two substates).
Make sure that the illumination of the focus areas does not overlap with the area of interest
(Exposure state area).
c) Switch to the Search state (press Search button).
(If the microscope is equipped with an off-axis TV that must be used in the Search state, use the
TV toggle to switch to the off-axis detector position.)
Select the Settings tab in the flap-out and press Search Reset.
Set conditions like magnification, spot size, intensity.
Switch to Exposure state and center a recognizable image feature with the goniometer, then
switch back to the Search state and center the same feature using the Multifunction X,Y knobs.
Verify that the electron dose rate on the specimen is negligible (i.e. ≤ 0.01 e-/Ǻ²s). On Titan you
can use the Dose rate display value in the TEM user interface information area.
d) Switch to Exposure, Focus and Search again and check the conditions (especially centering of
the beam).
e) If necessary, recenter the beam and repeat the whole procedure.
f) To check for overlap between the focus-state illumination and the exposure area, leave the
illumination on a suitable specimen (one that will show damage) for a while in both focus and
exposure states, then check on the imprints left by the beam at low magnification (Search state).
The imprint of the Focus illumination which should be off-center) should not overlap with that of
the Exposure state.
2. Operation
a) Switch to the Search state and locate a number of good specimen areas. Store these using the
Stage control panel function.
b) (If the microscope is equipped with an off-axis TV that must be used in the Search state, use the
TV toggle to switch to the off-axis detector position.)
c) Press the Blank button (blank the beam).
d) Move to the first good area (or the best) and wait a short time to allow the goniometer to settle.
e) Press the Blank button again (unblank the beam).
f) If necessary, center the area accurately with the goniometer.
g) Switch to Focus and focus the image.
h) (If the microscope is equipped with an on-axis CCD that must be used in the Focus state, use the
TV toggle to switch to the on-axis detector position.)
TEM on-line help 8
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Spotsize The spotsize (C1 lens) is independent for all three states.
Intensity The intensity (C2 lens) is independent for all three states.
Illumination modes The illumination modes are independent between Search on the one hand and
Focus and Exposure on the other (Focus and Exposure are thus the same by
definition). This means e.g. that Search may be in Microprobe and
Focus/Exposure in Nanoprobe.
Imaging modes The imaging modes are independent between Search on the one hand and
Focus and Exposure on the other (Focus and Exposure are thus the same by
definition). This means e.g. that Search may be in diffraction or LM and
Focus/Exposure in HM imaging (Microprobe).
Focus The focus settings are independent between Search on the one hand and Focus
and Exposure on the other (Focus and Exposure are thus the same by definition).
Separate settings are stored by the software for :
• HM Image focus
• LM Image focus
• D (HM) diffraction
• LAD (LM) diffraction
Focus differences between magnifications used for the Focus and Exposure
states can be either compensated (properly) by using the Parfocal Magnification
series alignment. As an alternative, the focus difference can be measured and
entered as a single-exposure series and series switched on. The software will the
automatically apply the focus change (but only during the actual recording of the
exposure, not when the state is changed from Focus to Exposure).
Beam shift The Search and Focus states react to beam shifts in Exposure states and in their
own states. The beam shift is built up as follows. First of all any 'User' beam shift
at the start of using Low Dose is ignored (this means that the right point to start is
to define the Low Dose settings with the beam well aligned by means of the 'Align
Beam Shift' alignment). The Exposure state stores its own settings for the beam
shift, made during Low Dose operation. The Focus and Search states each have
their own independent beam shifts on top of the Exposure beam shift. The Focus
beam shift comes on top of the compensation for the image shift.
TEM on-line help 9
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Image shift The Search state has an independent image shift relative to the Exposure state to
allow accurate alignment of the Search image to that of the Exposure image to
ensure recording of the proper area when coming from a Search state at much
lower magnification. The Search state image shift can be set only by using the
Multifunction knobs. The Focus state image shift is a totally different setting
because it uses the image shift with compensated beam shift.
Diffraction shift The Search state has a setting for the diffraction shift that is added to any shift in
Focus and Exposure (where the diffraction shift is the same). The Search shift is
somewhat independent to allow compensation of diffraction shifts introduced by
strong defocussing (as often applied in the Search state).
When Low Dose is stopped (by pressing the Low Dose button or exiting the TEM User Interface), the
buttons and knobs get back their original setting.
1.1.8 Spotscan
Spotscan is an option for the Low Dose software. It relies on hardware installed in the microscope PC
and microscope and will not function without the proper hardware.
The Low Dose version with spotscan supports two modes of exposure:
• The normal 'flood-beam' exposure wherein the whole exposure area is illuminated by a broad beam
and exposed together.
• The spotscan exposure wherein a smaller beam is stepped across the area to be exposed and each
spot is exposed individually.
Spotscan settings are defined in the Spotscan tab of the Low Dose Control Panel flap-out.
TEM on-line help 11
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The Low Dose Control Panel contains the functions used for Low
Dose electron microscopy. A more extensive description of Low
Dose and its use is given on the Low Dose page.
Important notes:
Low Dose only supports operation in a restricted set of optical
conditions. Note supported are the STEM mode on any
microscope and the Porbe and Free Condenser Control modes
on Titan.
Low Dose does not support EFTEM handling. You can use the
EFTEM lens series but the actual series (normal or EFTEM) is
not stored with the Low Dose settings and Low Dose does not
switch between the two lens series during operation.
Low dose button
The Low Dose button activates or deactivates Low Dose. The
status can be seen from the color of the button (gray is off, yellow
is on). When Low Dose is activated, it saves the currently active
settings of the microscope and changes them to Low Dose
settings (Search at start-up, any other state when Low Dose has
been active previously). When Low Dose is switched off, it
restores the microscope to the status it had before Low Dose
was switched on.
Note: The magnifications (or cameral lengths) listed for the three Low Dose states are the so-called
reference magnifications (the values on the plate camera, that is, the ones displayed by the TEM User
Interface with the main screen up). These fixed values are used to avoid confusion (which could occur
when Low Dose would continuously adjust values when the screen goes up and down). The values with
the screen down are roughly 10% lower than with the screen up.
Blank button
The Blank button toggles the beam blanker on and off. The beam is blanked (that is, no electrons come
down the column) when the button is yellow. The beam blanker uses an offset on the gun tilt which is
calibrated (by supervisor or user).
Note that the beam blanker may also used by other software (e.g. during normalizations). The status of
the Blank button will reflect that.
Peek button
The Peek button toggles the diffraction peek function on and off. When Peek is active the beam blanker
is used with a reduced blanking amplitude that should be calibrated so just enough electrons are coming
down the column to allow centering or focusing of the diffraction pattern.
The button is visible only when the function is enabled in the Options tab of the Low Dose flap-out. The
Peek button is only enabled if the following two conditions are met:
1. The Exposure state is active.
2. The microscope is in diffraction.
TEM on-line help 12
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Status
The status line displays the current Low Dose status as well as any error messages..
Search button
The Search button switches Low Dose to the Search state.
Search settings
The settings used for the Search state (microscope mode, magnification or camera length, spot size,
intensity and image shifts) are displayed underneath the Search button.
Focus button
Pressing the Focus button switches the Low Dose function to the Focus state.
Focus substates
The Focus state has two substates, 1 and 2, that can have different settings for the off-axis beam and
image shifts. Switching between the two substates is done by selecting the corresponding radio button
on the Low Dose control panel or pressing the TEM User Button selected when the Focus state is
already active.
Focus settings
The settings used for the Focus state (magnification or camera length, spot size, intensity and image
shifts) are displayed underneath the Focus button. The microscope mode is not displayed because it is,
by definition, the same as for the Exposure state.
Exposure button
Pressing the Exposure button switches the Low Dose function to the Exposure state. This is not the
same as making the plate-camera exposure! The Exposure state activated by the Exposure button is
meant for setting up the conditions under which the Low Dose exposures will be made.
Exposure settings
The settings used for the Exposure state (microscope mode, magnification or camera length, spot size,
and intensity; in addition the exposure time is shown at the bottom) are displayed underneath the
Exposure button.
TEM on-line help 13
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Expose button
When the Expose button (or the TEM Exposure button on the left-hand Control Pad) is pressed, the
actual Low Dose exposure is started. The progress of the exposure is displayed in the status as well as
by the status of the state and blank buttons. The medium for exposure (plate camera or CCD) depends
on the setting chosen.
Series
The Series check box enables the automatic exposure of a series. The settings for the series are defined
in the Series panel. The Series check box is only enabled when at least one setting has been defined for
series. Series and Double cannot be used together.
Double
The Double check box enables double exposure (multiple exposures on a single plate). The exposure
times for the double exposures are defined in the Double panel. The Double check box is only enabled
when at least one setting has been defined for double. Double and Series or Use spotscan cannot be
used together.
Use spotscan
Only on systems where spotscan is installed :
When the Use spotscan option is enabled the exposure(s) will be taken as spotscans, not flood-beam
exposures. The Exposure time will change to spot dwell time (exposure time per spot). The spotscan as
executed is defined in the Spotscan tab of the flap-out. Spotscan and pre-exposure or Double cannot be
combined.
Dim screen
In order to prevent light from the monitor from striking the plate (which is lying open in the projection
chamber during the exposure; it is therefore always important to switch room lights off and cover the
windows of the projection chamber), the monitor screen can be blanked during the exposure. The
blanking will initially display text in dark gray (instructions on how to remove the screen dim if it doesn't
remove itself after exposure). This text can be removed by unchecking the Text visible check box in the
top left corner. The setting will be remembered from one microscope session to the next.
TEM on-line help 14
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Notes:
• Should the screen dimmer fail to be removed after the exposure, then it can always be removed by
pressing Shift+Esc on the keyboard. Do not use Alt+Tab to switch to another window because that
will (except in exceptional cases) not work.
• This option does not work when a CCD is used as recording medium (there is no danger of light
leaking from the monitors onto the CCD).
Exposure time
Because the conditions during operation (search and focus) are not suitable for measuring the exposure
time to be used during the actual Low Dose exposure (due to differing magnification/camera length, spot
size and intensity settings), the exposure time must be set by the operator. Switch to the Exposure state
initially and determine the exposure time as indicated by the plate camera of the microscope. If
necessary, adjust the exposure settings (spot size, intensity) and then enter the desired exposure time
on the Plate camera panel (type or enter by pressing the up or down spin buttons). If the CCD is used for
exposure, the proper exposure time must be entered in the camera setup (NOT in DigitalMicrograph but
in the TEM Control Panel for MSC cameras). Low dose itself does not define CCD settings.
While Low Dose is active, the manual exposure of the plate camera is set to the same setting as the
exposure time for Low Dose plate exposures. When Low Dose is switched off, the plate camera manual
exposure time setting that was active before Low Dose was switched on is restored.
If spotscan is used :
The dwell time (in milliseconds) determines how long each individual spot will be exposed. The scan
board that drives the beam itself allows dwell times down to 1 microsecond. The beam deflection coils of
the microscope cannot support such high scan rates (the scan will not consist of individually stepped
spots but a blurred line) and advised dwell times are 10 milliseconds or higher.
To estimate the dwell time, select the required spotscan settings, go to the Exposure state and insert the
small viewing screen. Read off the auto exposure time in the Plate camera control panel of the
microscope. Estimate the ratio of the spot diameter and the small screen diameter. Divide the measured
exposure time by the square of the ratio (it goes by area). This will be the dwell time.
If the spotscan spot is much smaller than the small screen, increase the magnification so the spot makes
up about 1/3 to 1/2 of the small screen. Estimate the ratio as described above but modify it further by
dividing it by the square of the ratio of the measurement magnification and the true exposure
magnification (once again it goes by area).
For good results, you may want to bracket initial attempts (take one exposure at a 3x shorter dwell time,
one at the dwell determined and another at a 3x longer dwell time) and thereby calibrate the required
dwell times.
If Double is active : The exposure time as indicated is not used. Instead the exposure times as defined
for double exposure are used.
Wait time
In order to allow the microscope to stabilize after the mechanical 'shocks' from the loading of the plate a
waiting time is set before the exposure is taken. For high resolution allow at least 5 seconds waiting time.
At lower magnification or lower resolution a shorter waiting time can be set.
Pre-exposure
The Low Dose mode allows pre-exposing the specimen (the beam is put on the specimen but the
exposure shutter of the microscope stays closed so this exposure has no effect on the plate) to allow
stabilization (in case of charging). When this function is enabled, it is possible to choose a pre-exposure
time.
TEM on-line help 15
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Note: When pre-exposure is active, the resolution of the exposure may not be as good as ultimately
achievable in Low Dose due to drift of the shutter (below the specimen) during the actual exposure,
especially if the waiting time after the pre-exposure is short (1 second or less). During Low Dose
exposure without pre-exposure the shutter is opened several seconds before the beam is unblanked for
the Low Dose exposure.
The off-axis shift for the Focus state is controlled by distance and (rotation) angle. Thereby it is possible
to circle around an area of interest by simply changing the rotation angle, without any danger of
accidentally moving towards the real area of interest. Circling may be necessary, e.g. in the case where
the off-axis area lies on a grid bar. Once calibrated the 0 and 180° angles will lie along the tilt axis.
Focussing with a tilted specimen can be done either at 0 or 180° (where the focus will be the same as on
the area of interest provided the specimen is flat) or at 90 and 270° with an equal off-axis distance and
taking the focus setting halfway in between.
Distance
The off-axis shift distance can be set with the distance trackbar and the Multifunction X knob. The
distance should be set such that the off-axis shift is sufficient to ensure that the Focus-state beam does
not overlap onto the Exposure area, while as the same time keeping it as small as possible. The trackbar
is active only in the Focus state.
Angle
The off-axis shift rotation angle can be set with the angle trackbar and the Multifunction Y knob. The
trackbar is active only in the Focus state.
TEM on-line help 16
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The series panel contains settings used for automated through-focus series. The through-focus series is
totally flexible. It simply will execute as many exposures as there are entries in the list, changing the
focus by the amount specified for the particular setting. Multiple entries with the same value, or the value
0 are allowed. It is also allowed to enter a single non-zero value In that case each Low Dose exposure
will be made with the focus between Focus state and Exposure state offset by the specified amount
(making it e.g. possible to focus in the Focus state to minimum contrast - close to zero or Gaussian focus
- and have each Low Dose image recorded at -1000 nm).
Note: The focus settings are not absolute but are values relative to the focus set when the exposure
series is started.
Focus setting
The Focus settings list is filled by entering values for the focus (underfocus is taken as negative) in the
Focus setting edit control in nanometers and pressing the Add button.
Add button
The Add button allows insertion of a new setting into the focus settings list. The value for the new focus
must be inserted into the Focus setting edit control. The maximum number of values is 20.
Delete button
The Delete button allows removal of settings from the list. Select a setting and press Delete.
Move up
The through-focus exposures are recorded in the sequence as they occur in the list. To change the
sequence, select a setting and press Move up to move it up in the list.
Move down
The through-focus exposures are recorded in the sequence as they occur in the list. To change the
sequence, select a setting and press Move down to move it down in the list.
TEM on-line help 17
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The double panel contains settings used for recording double exposure (multiple exposures on a single
plate). The double exposure setup is totally flexible. It simply will execute as many exposures as there
are entries in the list, changing the exposure times as indicated in the list for the particular setting.
The double exposure sequence is similar to that for a normal low-dose exposure except that the plate is
not removed until the last double exposure has been done (or the exposure is cancelled). After one
exposure has been recorded, further execution pauses until the operator presses the Expose button (on
the Low Dose Control Panel) or the Exposure button (on the left-hand TEM Control Pad) again. Pressing
either of these buttons while an exposure is taking place (the Expose button is yellow) cancels further
exposure, otherwise it starts the next exposure in the sequence. When dim screen is active, the dimmed
screen will display a message alerting the operator to press Exposure to start the next exposure.
Between individual exposures of a double exposure sequence, it is possible to lower the screen and look
at the image. Be aware, however, that the Low Dose state remains in Exposure. The Peek and Beam
Blanker functions become accessible when the screen is lowered.
When Double exposure is selected in the Expose tab, the Low Dose exposure time as listed becomes
meaningless, and the double exposure times in the list are used instead.
Exposure time
The exposure times list is filled by entering values for the exposure time (in seconds) in the exposure
time edit control and pressing the Add button.
Add button
The Add button allows insertion of a new setting into the exposure times list. The value for the new
exposure time must be inserted into the exposure time edit control.
Delete button
The Delete button allows removal of settings from the list. Select a setting and press Delete.
Move up
The double exposures are recorded in the sequence as they occur in the list. To change the sequence,
select a setting and press Move up to move it up in the list.
TEM on-line help 18
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Move down
The double exposures are recorded in the sequence as they occur in the list. To change the sequence,
select a setting and press Move down to move it down in the list.
Pattern
The spotscan can be executed in either a hexagonal pattern or a square pattern. In the case of a
hexagonal pattern, the closest packing of the spots is achieved, with each second row of spots displaced
1/2 spot (as a result each spot has six nearest neighbors, arranged in a hexagon around it). In the
square pattern, the spots lie at the corners of squares (and each spot has four neighbors: above, left,
right and below).
Orientation
The spotscan pattern can be rotated through 360 degrees. When calibrated, the 0 and 180° directions
have the x direction of the spotscan coincide with the a tilt axis of the CompuStage.
Focus correction
An automatic focus correction can be applied to spotscan exposures for tilted specimens. The focus
correction required is automatically derived from the CompuStage alpha tilt angle. If you use pre-tilted
specimens or pre-tilted cartridges, specify an offset angle to compensate for the difference between the
CompuStage alpha tilt value and the real tilt angle of the specimen.
TEM on-line help 19
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
For focus correction to work properly, it is very important that the orientation angle is set to 0 and the
following calibrations have been done:
• Image/beam shift for the active mode (found in the Alignments Control Panel).
• Spotscan Pivot points
• Spotscan Beam shift
• If the size of the spots is affected by the objective-lens current (especially smaller spots and in
nanoprobe), Spotscan Focus-Intensity.
Setup
The spotscan setup contains a number of functions to set the scan area and distance between spots.
The total number of spots is indicated.
Note: The TEM magnification to be used for the spotscan should be set before switching any of the
spotscan setup functions on, because the optimum beam deflection range is not reset when the
magnification is changed while spotscan setup functions are active (in this way the scan can be
observed, for example, at lower magnification).
None
When None is checked, the spotscan setup is disabled and spotscan wobbles or beam shifts are
switched off. This is necessary after a setup, otherwise the microscope is not usable.
Outline
To set the total area scanned by the beam, you can either use the Outline function or set X and Y
separately. In the Outline function the beam is moved continuously to the four corners of the scan range
(for a 'normal' setting, this usually implies that the spots are just off the viewing screen and thus invisible
- you can lower the magnification to check). Adjust the X and Y scrollers to set the required scan frame
(should be at least the size of a negative). The scan area size is indicated above the X and Y sliders (in
arbitrary units when not calibrated, otherwise in micrometers).
Static X
To set the total area scanned by the beam, you can either use the Outline function or set X and Y
separately. With the Static X function the beam is moved to the extreme X position of the scan range.
Adjust the X scroller to set the required scan frame (should be at least the size of a negative). The scan
area size is indicated above the X and Y sliders (in arbitrary units when not calibrated, otherwise in
micrometers).
Static Y
To set the total area scanned by the beam, you can either use the Outline function or set X and Y
separately. With the Static Y function the beam is moved to the extreme Y position of the scan range.
Adjust the Y scroller to set the required scan frame (should be at least the size of a negative). The scan
area size is indicated above the X and Y sliders (in arbitrary units when not calibrated, otherwise in
micrometers).
X, Y sliders
The X and Y sliders become activated when Outline, Static X (X slider only) or Static Y (Y slider only) are
on. They control the size of the scan range for the X and Y directions.
Spot wobble
To determine the distances between spots, click on Spot wobble. The spot will wobble back and forth
and the scroller can be adjusted until the spots just touch each other. The spot distance is indicated
above the spot slider (in arbitrary units when not calibrated, otherwise in micrometers). The number of
spots in the total scan is also indicated.
TEM on-line help 20
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Note: The optimum beam deflection range (reset when spotscan setup functions are switched on)
affects the spot distance. Therefore always check the spot distance after setting the scan range.
Preview
The result of the spotscan setup can be viewed on the viewing screen to check that everything is alright
for the exposure. This function is available only in the Low Dose Exposure state (press the Exposure
button). The progress of the scan is indicated by the progress bar in the top of the panel (blue
increasingly fills the bar).
View
Pressing the View button starts and stops the spot scan.
Slower
When the Slower button is pressed, the spot dwell time is increased by a factor 2.
Faster
When the Faster button is pressed, the spot dwell time is reduced by a factor 2.
To 0,0
When the button To 0,0 is pressed, the scan is stopped and the beam is moved to the 0,0 position
(center of the scan frame). If the beam is not centered on the screen, it should be shifted to the center
with the normal beam shift (or Align beam shift alignment). The control of the AC beam deflection coils
(used by spotscan) remains on.
Shift away
When the Shift away button is pressed, the beam will be moved to an extreme X,Y position. It should no
longer be visible on the screen, unless the magnification has been lowered from the exposure
magnification used during the setup. The control of the AC beam deflection coils (used by spotscan)
remains on.
AC off
To switch the AC coils (used by spotscan) control off after the preview, press the AC off button.
TEM on-line help 21
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The Settings tab of the Low Dose Control Panel contains controls
that are related to the Low Dose settings. In addition to settings
related to the optics, Low Dose also allows a choice of media
(screen, plate, TV or CCD) for each state independently. The
accessibility of these media may change and is reflected in the
lists (under "Use:"). The system used for the media is explained
under the TV / CCD tab.
Search Reset
Pressing the Reset button resets the currently active Search
settings to zero. What gets reset depends on the Mode only / All
choice. The button is only active in the Search state.
Search Medium
The choice between (Viewing) Screen, TV and CCD for the
Search state is made by selecting one of the items in the drop-
down list. (See picture below).
Right: The list of possible media for the Search state (the items
except for Screen are dependent on the microscope
configuration).
TEM on-line help 22
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Focus Reset
Pressing the Reset button resets the currently active Focus settings to zero. What gets reset depends on
the Mode only / All choice. The button is only active in the Focus state.
Focus Medium
The choice between (Viewing) Screen, TV and CCD for the Focus state is made by selecting one of the
items in the drop-down list.
Exposure Reset
Pressing the Reset button resets the currently active Exposure settings to zero. What gets reset
depends on the Mode only / All choice. The button is only active in the Exposure state.
Exposure Medium
The choice between Plate (Camera) and CCD exposure is made by selecting one of the items in the
drop-down list.
Filename
Settings can be loaded from and saved to file. When a filename has been defined (through a Load or
Save), the name will be listed. When a file is loaded, the entry also lists which file version was loaded. If
the same settings are used all the time (for any particular user), there is no need to save and load
settings since the currently active Low Dose settings are always saved upon exiting and restored upon
opening of the program (for each user individually).
Load button
Opens a standard Open File dialog that allows selection of a file with Low Dose settings. This file will be
read and settings in the file will be made active. The file name must have the extension ".lds".
Save button
If no file name for Low Dose settings has been defined, this opens a standard Save File dialog that
allows entering a file name under which the currently active Low Dose settings will be stored. The file
name must have the extension ".lds" (the extension will be added automatically by the software).
Save As button
Opens a standard Save File dialog that allows entering a file name under which the currently active Low
Dose settings will be stored. The file name must have the extension lds (the extension will be added
automatically by the software).
TEM on-line help 23
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The Calibrate tab of the Low Dose Control Panel contains the
functions necessary for the Low Dose calibrations.
Blanker button
The Blanker button starts the beam blanker calibration procedure. The beam blanker relies on a user-
calibrated offset of the gun tilt. Once the gun tilt has been aligned properly the beam blanker calibration
can be done. The user then turns the Multifunction X knob until the electron beams is no longer visible.
For safety with the beam blanker it is advisable to turn the gun tilt a bit further than the point where the
light disappears (safety margin).
Peek button
The Peek button starts the peek calibration procedure. The peek function uses a user-calibrated offset of
the gun tilt. Once the gun tilt has been aligned properly the peek calibration can be done. The user then
TEM on-line help 24
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
turns the Multifunction X knob until the electron beam is about 10% of the initial setting (almost no visible
light).
Note: This is an alignment and not a Low Dose calibration. The results are stored in the operator's
alignments.
Note: Part of this adjustment is an alignment. Those results are stored in the operator's alignments.
Calibration instructions
Instructions during the calibration procedures will be displayed here.
OK button
Pressing the OK button (or the L1 user button on the TEM Control Pads) proceeds with the calibration
procedure to the next step.
TEM on-line help 25
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Cancel button
Pressing the Cancel button cancels the calibration procedure. All intermediate settings determined so far
will be removed. The microscope returns to its starting position.
Filename
Calibrations can be loaded from and saved to file. When a filename has been defined (through Load or
Save), the name will be listed. If the same calibrations are used all the time (for any particular user),
there is no need to save and load calibrations since the currently active Low Dose calibrations are
always saved upon exiting and restored upon opening of the program (for each user individually).
Load button
Opens a standard Open File dialog that allows selection of a file with Low Dose calibrations. This file will
be read and calibrations in the file will be made active. The file name must have the extension cal.
Save button
If no file name for Low Dose calibrations has been defined, this opens a standard Save File dialog that
allows entering a file name under which the currently active Low Dose calibrations will be stored. The file
name must have the extension cal (the extension will be added automatically by the software).
Save As button
Opens a standard Save File dialog that allows entering a file name under which the currently active Low
Dose calibrations will be stored. The file name must have the extension cal (the extension will be added
automatically by the software).
TEM on-line help 26
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The Options tab of the Low Dose Control Panel contains a range
of optional settings.
Enable peek
If this option is checked, the Peek button becomes visible and, when appropriate, enabled.
Normalizations
Magnetic lenses suffer from hysteresis - an effect that makes the magnetic field difficult to set
reproducibly because the effective field depends on the direction of change (up or down). Hysteresis can
affect the position of the beam (due to changes in C1 - spot size and C2 - intensity) as well as the image
or diffraction pattern (mostly the projector system consisting of the diffraction, intermediate and projector
1 and 2 lenses). The magnetic field of a lens can be made reproducible by normalization, a procedure
that erases the recent history of a lens by running it to maximum and minimum power. This forces any
TEM on-line help 27
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
setting in between to be reached through a well-defined and reproducible path, starting always from the
same point. In Low Dose the normalizations are applied to achieve a reproducible swithing between the
states. A drawback of the normalization is that it is time-consuming. In order to allow full flexibility in this,
the user can select which lenses should be normalized during the possible switches. The default settings
are displayed in the panel above. It is NOT advised to normalize the objective lens when switching
between Focus and Exposure (this can affect the focus) and only normalize the objective lens in the
switch from the Search to the Focus/Exposure state when Search is in LM and Focus and Exposure are
in HM TEM.
Normalize
Normalizes the lenses selected by the check boxes to the right of the button.
User buttons
Under User buttons, the user defines which TEM Control Pad User Buttons (L1 .. L3, R1 .. R3) are used
by Low Dose and which button does what. If a user button name (L1..R3) is listed in the drop-down list of
a function, that function is assigned to a TEM User Button (otherwise the list will display None). If a new
selection is made by selecting another entry in a list, the software will re-assign any function previously
assigned to the particular User Button (if present) by shifting it to the next empty User Button.
Dose measurement
In the Exposure state you can measure the dose on the specimen. The dose is derived from the screen
current and the magnification. The dose is reported in electrons per square nanometer per second. In
order to derive the dose for the actual exposure, multiply by the exposure time used. If the small
(focusing) screen is out, the diameter of the beam must be entered (unless it is larger than the main
screen). If the small (focusing) screen is in, the beam must be larger than the small screen for a proper
measurement.
Dose measurement is continuous if the Continuously check box is checked. However, the Dose
measurement will only run in the Exposure state (if Low Dose is switched to another state, the dose
measurement is stopped). You can stop a continuous dose measurement by pressing the (now yellow)
button again. If the Continuously check box is unchecked, a single dose measurement will be done.
Should you find that the dose measurement on your microscope deviates significantly from
measurements by other methods, then it is possible to adjust factors in the registry (all string values in
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Fei\LowDose) :
• "BS Factor" for microscopes with maximum high tension values less than 200 kV or high-tension
settings less than 200 kV.
• "BS Factor 200" for high-tension settings less than 300 kV.
• "BS Factor 300" for the high-tension setting of 300 kV.
TEM on-line help 28
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The same logic applies to the selection when loading settings files. If the medium is available, it will
become selected. If not, it will only become selected once the medium is available and the default
medium is selected in the meantime). Note that what is saved in the settings files are the media that
would be selected when the proper CCD controller(s) is(are) present, and not necessarily what is
currently displayed in the lists as chosen.
An example
In the example we have a system with an Imaging Filter plus an off-axis TV camera. The user sets up
the system such that:
• Search is on the off-axis TV camera. Because the off-axis shift in EFTEM is too limited at low
magnifications, the Search magnification is chosen sufficiently high that the off-axis image shift can
reach the camera (note that Low Dose does not change lens series - normal to and EFTEM or vice
versa).
• Focus is defined on the GIF TV-rate camera.
• Exposure is on the GIF CCD camera.
When changing states, Low Dose will automatically select the appropriate detector position, lift the
viewing screen, and insert or retract the GIF TV camera. When DigitalMicrograph is not available, the
media will default to off-axis TV (since this does not rely on DigitalMicrograph), screen (the GIF TV
camera control is only through DigitalMicrograph) and plate (the CCD camera is not available). If
DigitalMicrograph becomes available again, the media will automatically be switched back to the
previous selection.
one from the drop-down list (this function is identical to that in the CCD/TV Control Panel). The controller
is not specific to Low Dose. Low Dose does not automatically select a controller.
TV rate
In the schematic diagram of part of the microscope there are four possible locations for TV-rate cameras,
the Wide-Angle TV port (above the viewing screen), directly below the viewing screen (on- and off-axis)
or further below (e.g. a GIF). If more than one TV-rate camera is present, select the particular option for
the TV-rate camera that will be used during Low Dose imaging.
CCD
In the schematic diagram of part of the microscope there are four possible locations for CCD cameras,
the Wide-Angle TV port (above the viewing screen), directly below the viewing screen (on- and off-axis)
or further below (e.g. a GIF).
Options
• Reset Search, Focus, Exposure settings for current mode or all
• Peek enabled
• TV/CCD use per state
• TV/CCD settings
• Multifunction knobs enabled or disabled in Search and Focus states
• Normalizations selected for Low Dose state transitions
• Switch from Search to Focus via Exposure
• TEM User Button assignment
Exposure settings
• Exposure time
• Waiting time after plate in
• Dim screen enabled/disabled
• Pre-exposure used and time
• Pre-exposure waiting time
• Exposure series enabled/disabled
• Exposure series defocus values
• For spotscan: use spotscan for exposure, and spotscan settings like dwell time and amplitudes
Search state
• Mode
• Magnification
• Camera Length
• Spotsize
• Intensity
• On Titan: Illuminated area
• Focus of Objective lens (for HM image and LAD), of Diffraction lens for (HM D and LM Image)
• Beam Shift
• Image Shift
• Diffraction Shift
TEM on-line help 31
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Focus state
• Substate (1 or 2)
• Magnification
• Camera Length
• Spotsize
• Intensity
• On Titan: Illuminated area
• Beam Shift (both substates separately)
• Image Shift (both substates separately)
Exposure state
• Mode
• Magnification
• Camera Length
• Spotsize
• Intensity
• On Titan: Illuminated area
• Focus of Objective lens (for HM image and LAD), of Diffraction lens for (HM D and LM Image)
Peek amplitude
2 TEM Photomontage
2.1 Introduction
A photomontage consists of a series of images that together make one large image. The advantage of a
montage over a lower-magnification image is the fact that the individual images of the montage are
recorded at higher magnification and thus allow resolving finer details. By photomontage it is possible,
for example, to record detailed images and still allow an overview of the whole specimen area
investigated. A photomontage can in principle be executed by hand. It is, however, difficult to ensure that
sufficient overlap exists between the images to avoid gaps in the montage and at the same time
minimize the number of images needed. The TEM Photomontage option makes it possible to define and
automatically execute recording of a complete photomontage.
Photomontage control
panels for Plate (left) and
for CCD (right) as
recording medium.
The Photomontage Control Panel contains two sets of functions for photomontage :
• Functions that load the Photomontage Display window (a separate window that is typically positioned
in the data space of the TEM User Interface) or determine its size.
• Functions that give rapid access to often-used photomontage functions. These functions may change
as a function of the medium selected (Plate or CCD).
TEM on-line help 33
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Display
The Photomontage Display window is only loaded on operator request. To load it press the Display
button. A message will appear that the Photomontage server is being loaded. Once the server is
running, the window will be displayed, the Display button will turn yellow, and the message will
disappear. You are now ready to start working with Photomontage.
If the Display button is pressed again, the Display window will disappear. It is, however, not unloaded but
simply hidden. If you display it again (by once more pressing the button), it will still have kept all the
photomontage settings as set previously. The window is only unloaded when you close the TEM User
Interface.
Size adjustable
When this option is checked, the Display window can be positioned anywhere you like (the software will
remember your settings and restore them) and you can define its size in the standard Windows way
(click and drag on a border). If the option is off, the Display window will be fixed in size and position to fill
the data space of the TEM User Interface.
The following controls will be enabled or disabled when their counterpart in the Display window is
enabled or disabled.
Set magn.
Starts the procedure to define the magnification to be used for the montage.
Calib rot.
Starts the rotation calibration procedure (Plate only) for the currently active magnification.
Modify
Switches montage modification (Plate only) on or off. When modification is active, the Modify button will
be yellow.
CCD / Plate
Changes selection of the recording medium (CCD or Plate). If a montage has been defined for the other
medium, that montage will be removed.
Auto
Starts the Automatic Exposure procedure for Plate or CCD as medium . When Photomontage is in the
Automatic Exposure procedure, the Auto button will be yellow.
Manual
Starts the Manual Exposure procedure (Plate only). When Photomontage is in the Manual Exposure
procedure, the Manual button will be yellow.
Mount
Starts the Mount procedure for CCD Photomontage. When Photomontage is in the Mount procedure, the
Mount button will be yellow.
TEM on-line help 34
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The main functionality of Photomontage resides in the menu of the display window. A typical sequence
for setting up and executing a plate-negative photomontage is as follows:
• If necessary, check that all options are defined as needed.
• Define the photomontage area by bringing a series of points on the perimeter of the area to the
center of the screen with the specimen stage and using Add boundary point to enter it.
• Select the magnification to be used for the photomontage.
• If necessary, calibrate the rotation.
• If necessary, modify the montage suggested by the software.
• Execute the exposure of the montage, either automatically or manually.
• Store and/or print the data for later reference.
TEM on-line help 35
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The window will display the photomontage, showing the area overlaid with the individual exposures.
Initially the exposures are simply labelled by their sequence number. Once an exposure has been
recorded, it number will be replaced by the exposure number (provided there is enough room for the
longer labels). The colors used for the display are freely user-configurable.
Menu
The menu gives access to all photomontage functionality.
Montage
The montage is displayed in the window. The gray area is the area of the specimen covered. The green
rectangles are the individual exposures, labelled here still with sequence numbers.
Stage axes
The x,y directions of the stage axes are indicated on the screen.
Scale bar
The scale bar gives an indication of the sizes of the photomontage area and individual exposures.
Status bar
The status bar lists on the left the current stage position. On the right it will display hints for getting
started, messages in case of errors, or the current setting of the magnification used for the montage and
the number of exposures in the montage.
Note: The magnification listed is the so-called reference value (the value on the plate camera, that is,
the one seen with the screen up). This fixed value is used to avoid confusion (which could occur when
TEM on-line help 36
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
photomontage would continuously adjust values when the screen goes up or down). The values with the
screen down are roughly 10% lower than with the screen up.
Border icons
The border icons behave as the standard Minimize, Maximize and Close buttons. The Close button,
however, does not truly close the window but hides it. The window is closed only upon closing the TEM
User Interface. The Maximize button is only visible if the window size can be adjusted freely.
New montage Starts a new montage (resetting all previous montage values)
Open list Not enabled in on-line version (off-line only).
Save list, Saves the list of exposures with their X,Y locations and exposure numbers in a
Save list as text file, Save as allows definition of different file name
Save graphic, Saves the current display as a bitmap, Save as allows definition of a different file
Save graphic as name
Control options Leads to the Control options dialog
Load options Loads options from file
Save options Saves options to file
Printer setup Leads to printer setup dialog
Print list Prints the list of exposures with their X,Y locations and exposure numbers
Print graphic Prints the current graphical display
Add boundary point Insert the current specimen-stage X,Y location into the list of points that define
the photomontage boundary.
Set magnification Defines the magnification to be used for the photomontage. If the rotation
calibration has already been done and the rotation calibration option is off, the
photomontage will be calculated immediately after this procedure.
Calibrate rotation Starts calibration procedure for determining the rotation angle between the
photomontage boundaries and the camera. The photomontage will be
(re)calculated immediately after this procedure.
Modify montage Starts or stops modification of the photomontage: mouse double-click or click
and drag, Cursor keys, Ctrl Cursor keys, Insert, Delete and Undo changes
become active or inactive. When the menu item is checked, modification is
active. Modification will automatically be switched off when certain other
procedures like Exposure are started.
Insert Inserts a new exposure at the cross set by mouse double click. The new
exposure will be fit to the existing montage, not centered at the cross.
Delete Deletes the exposure at the cross set by double clicking the left-hand mouse
button.
Delete from list Allows deletion of one or more exposures by number from a list displayed.
Undo changes Undo changes will revert to the photomontage defined before Modify montage
was switched on.
Display list Shows the list of exposure, with sequence number, and X,Y locations, and if
available the exposure number. The list can be printed directly from here (as
well as from the File menu).
Back to setup Removes the currently defined montage and switches back to the situation
where boundary points can be defined or deleted.
Plate type
The software supports rapid selection of exposure sizes from any of the three pre-defined plate camera
formats (the inch size, European cm format and Japanese cm format).
The Camera dimensions consists of two values, stored separately for each camera, for the horizontal
and vertical size of the exposure. In the case of the film cameras, horizontal is left to right for the
microscope operator (longest dimension for plate film), vertical is towards and away from the operator.
It is advisable to check the values for the system used. Measure on a used negative the longest (=
horizontal) and shortest (= vertical) exposed area (discounting the plate number). Subtract 2 to 3 mm to
account for reproducibility of the plate camera.
CCD
Not relevant for plate montage.
Overlap
The overlap between the exposures is the percentage of the horizontal or vertical axis that must be
common to both exposures to ensure fit of the photomontage without gaps. The overlap can be set
either automatically or at a fixed value. If done automatically the program will adjust the overlap for the
magnification used (a higher value at higher magnification, typical values are 10% at 5000x or below,
20% at 30kx, 30% at 50kx).
Note: It is allowed to define a negative fixed overlap value. In that case the individual exposures will not
overlap but instead be spaced apart. In this way an area can be covered by a regular grid of exposures
without requiring them to fill the whole area. This function can be used for example for statistical
analysis.
TEM on-line help 39
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Exposure
The Exposure options concern whether a sound signal should announce start and finish of individual
exposures and how long the software should wait after stage movement before taking an exposure.
Rotation
If the Rotation option Always calibrate is switched on, the software will start the rotation calibration
procedure automatically whenever a new montage is defined (directly after Set magnification). Otherwise
the software will use a stored value for the current magnification. If no such value exists, the rotation
must be calibrated before the montage is calculated.
Note: Although the magnifications are in principle rotation-free on most instruments, deviations up to
several degrees can exist and these can affect the accuracy of photomontage, especially with small
overlaps. The rotation calibration must be still be done therefore.
Colors
The four types of colors (Background, Area, Exposures, Labels) for the display can be freely selected.
The selection is made in the Control options dialog or by clicking on the window with the right-mouse
button. The latter will popup a menu that allows definition of the colors.
Note: There is one exception to free color selection: if hyperlabels are used the Label color cannot be
blue (this is the flash color of the hyperlabel).
Use hyperlabels
The software provides a special feature in the form of hyperlabels (labels that act like hyperlinks: when
the cursor moves over them they flash their color to blue and a mouse-click brings up a dialog with
information about the point, with additional functionality such as Go to or Delete). The labels are used in
the boundary point definition phase to display the boundary points themselves. Thereafter the labels are
those of the exposures.
TEM on-line help 40
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The strange shape of the area in the left-hand picture is the result of intersecting lines and does not
properly represent the photomontage because point 4 was loaded between points 3 and 5 instead of
between points 1 and 2. If a point is found to be out of sequence, then use the hyperlabel option to
delete that point.
TEM on-line help 41
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
After the estimate the montage is calculated. Dependent on a variety of factors the suggested montage
may be good enough or it may require modification. In the former case you can proceed directly to
automatic exposure (plate camera only) of manual exposure.
Once a rotation value has been determined for a particular magnification, it will be stored by the
software.
During modification mouse double-click and mouse click-and-drag operations on the window have the
following meaning.
• Mouse double-click puts a cross marker at the point where the cursor was during the double click. If
the cross lies inside an exposure (don't go too far towards the edge; also don't click on the label if it is
a hyperlabel, because then the hyperlabel dialog comes up) that exposure can be deleted. If the
cross lies near a potential exposure location, that location can be inserted as a new exposure.
TEM on-line help 42
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
• Mouse click-and-drag shifts the exposures relative to the montage area (the actual shift is only
displayed once the mouse button is released.
At the top the software indicates the progress of the procedure (in this case no exposures have been
recorded yet). An estimated total duration is given. This is subject to considerable uncertainty because
various procedures that can be time-consuming (stage movement, screen up/down) are only accounted
for in a general overhead on top of the exposure time.
The Sound on checkbox allows changing the Sound option during the actual procedure.
Underneath the progress bar various values are listed such as the currently available exposure stock,
exposure number and exposure time. For the exposure time two options exist if automatic exposure time
is selected on the microscope. By default the software simply uses the exposure time as currently
measured (this implies that during the whole exposure sequence the viewing screen will remain up). If
the Measure for each checkbox is checked, the screen is lowered for each exposure to allow the
microscope to measure the exposure time for each individual exposure. Since the small focussing is not
motorized, the exposure time will always be read off the main screen then.
TEM on-line help 43
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Finally at bottom right there are two selections (for plate camera only) that allow automatic modification
of the film text on the plate. If the first is checked, a line is entered in the film text with 'Montage exposure
#' where # is replaced by the sequence number of the exposure. If the second is checked a line is
entered with 'Loc X xxx.xx Y yyy.yy' where xxx.xx and yyy.yy are replaced by the stage x,y location of
the exposure. Both options can be used together. Existing film text will be shifted down (if more than 4
lines exist after insertion of the montage data, the excess lines will be lost and not restored afterwards).
After the exposure procedure is stopped, the film text is restored to its original setting (minus any excess
lines lost).
Exposures that have been recorded will have their plate exposure numbered entered in the list and, if
sufficient space is available, their label on the screen is also replaced by the exposure number.
Note 1: The procedure will stop or pause when an error is encountered, e.g. plate stock zero. In that
case the operator can rectify the condition leading to the error and continuing with the procedure.
Note 2: While exposing (both automatic and manual), the program uses a backlash correction procedure
to make the positioning the exposures more accurate. However, because the backlash correction
(probably) wasn't done during definition of the boundaries, there may be a systematic shift of the whole
pattern of exposures of up to about 500 nm. For montages at high magnifications it is important therefore
to check the exposure locations (e.g. go to selected exposure locations through hyperlabels), especially
if the edge of the area covered by the exposures is close (less than 1 um) to the intended photomontage
area.
At the top the software indicates the progress of the procedure (in this case no exposures have been
recorded yet).
Underneath the progress bar various values are listed such as the currently available exposure stock,
exposure number and exposure time.
At bottom right there are two selections (for plate camera only) that allow automatic modification of the
film text on the plate. If the first is checked, a line is entered in the film text with 'Montage exposure #'
TEM on-line help 44
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
where # is replaced by the sequence number of the exposure. If the second is checked a line is entered
with 'Loc X xxx.xx Y yyy.yy' where xxx.xx and yyy.yy are replaced by the stage x,y location of the
exposure. Both options can be used together. Existing film text will be shifted down (if more than 4 lines
exist after insertion of the montage data, the excess lines will be lost and not restored afterwards). After
the exposure procedure is stopped, the film text is restored to its original setting (minus any excess lines
lost).
Exposures that have been recorded will have their plate exposure numbered entered in the list and, if
sufficient space is available, their label on the screen is also replaced by the exposure number. IF the
exposures are recorded on a CCD camera the exposure numbers given are 'CCD1', 'CCD2', etc.
Note: While exposing (both automatic and manual), the program uses a backlash correction procedure
to make the positioning the exposures more accurate. However, because the backlash correction
(probably) wasn't done during definition of the boundaries, there may be a systematic shift of the whole
pattern of exposures of up to about 500 nm. For montages at high magnifications it is important therefore
to check the exposure locations (e.g. go to selected exposure locations through their hyperlabels),
especially if the edge of the area covered by the exposures is close (less than 1 um) to the intended
photomontage area.
Note 1: Two magnifications are involved in the montage, the magnification at which the reference image
is acquired and the magnification at which the individual montages images are acquired. In order to
ensure the software is able to record the montage images at the correct locations, it is very important
that these two magnifications are accurately aligned to each other. To check, it is best to find a
recognizable image feature, center that in the CCD (search) image at one magnification (mark the
position by putting in an image marker), then change to the other magnification (you may need to use
normalization to obtain accurate image positioning) and check that the feature is also exactly in the
center at this magnification.
Note 2: Recording and mounting a CCD montage requires a good deal of memory. If there are too many
images the system will slow down very much. Before starting a montage, check the amount of memory
available in Task Manager (right-click on an empty part of the Taskbar and select Task manager, select
the Mem usage in the Performance tab. After the montage exposure, check again. If the amount of
memory remaining is not at least as much as was needed for the montage acquisition, do not mount the
montage).
Note 3: As an alternative to image acquisition into a data series in TIA and final assembly of the images
into a montage image by the photomontage software, you can acquire the images for storage in files. In
this way you can acquire any number of images, unlimited by memory, but you cannot have the software
assemble the images into a montage image.
Supported file formats for image acquisition to file are Extended-header and Small-header binary, TIFF,
and MRC file format, the latter either into separate images or a single file containing the whole series.
TEM on-line help 45
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The main functionality of Photomontage resides in the menu of the display window. A typical sequence
for setting up and executing a plate-negative photomontage is as follows:
• If necessary, check that the options are defined as needed.
• Define the photomontage area by acquiring a CCD image - the reference image - that contains the
whole area that the photomontage should cover and using Acquire image to retrieve the image from
TIA.
• Select the magnification to be used for the photomontage.
• Execute the exposure of the montage.
• Execute the montage mount.
Menu
The menu gives access to all photomontage functionality.
Montage
A schematic view of the montage is displayed in the window. The reference image is in the background,
with overlaid on it the boundary as defined in red outlined by white. The blue-white lines indicate are the
individual exposures. The individual montage images will be in an image series in TIA. After mounting
the mounted montage will also be in TIA. Both image series and montage are located in a display
window titled "Montage".
Scale bar
The scale bar gives an indication of the sizes of the photomontage area and individual exposures.
TEM on-line help 46
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Status bar
The status bar lists on the left the current stage position. On the right it will display hints for getting
started, messages in case of errors, or the current setting of the magnification used for the montage and
the number of exposures in the montage.
Note: The magnification listed is the so-called reference value (the value on the plate camera, that is,
the one seen with the screen up). This fixed value is used to avoid confusion (which could occur when
photomontage would continuously adjust values when the screen goes up or down). The values with the
screen down are roughly 10% lower than with the screen up.
Border icons
The border icons behave as the standard Minimize, Maximize and Close buttons. The Close button,
however, does not truly close the window but hides it. The window is closed only upon closing the TEM
User Interface. The Maximize button is only visible if the window size can be adjusted freely.
New montage Starts a new montage (resetting all previous montage values).
Open list Not enabled in on-line version (off-line only)
Save list, Saves the list of exposures with their X,Y locations and exposure numbers in a
Save list as text file, Save as allows definition of different file name
Save graphic, Saves the current display as a bitmap, Save as allows definition of a different file
Save graphic as name.
Control options Leads to the Control options dialog
Load options Loads options from file
Save options Saves options to file
Printer setup Leads to printer setup dialog
Print list Prints the list of exposures with their X,Y locations and exposure numbers
Print graphic Prints the current graphical display
Export series Exports the series of images in TIA to one of the supported formats (Extended
Header Binary, MRC, TIFF).
TEM on-line help 47
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Calibrations have a set hierarchy (some calibrations can only be done once others have been done).
They are specific to a number of conditions :
CCD camera used in combination with the microscope lens series (Normal or EFTEM)
High tension
Microscope mode (LM, Microprobe, Nanoprobe, Lorentz)
For the microscope modes, only the Nanoprobe mode does not require full calibrations. For that mode
only the Focus/Stigmator calibration must be done separately (the rest of the calibrations if the same as
in the Microprobe mode).
Calibrations can only be done by TEM Experts (private calibrations for these users) and Supervisor,
Service or Factory (dependent on availability, these calibrations are what basic microscope Users get.
Calibration is done on the basis of a standard specimen, a cross-grating. This specimen has squares on
it with a spacing of 463 nm.
TEM on-line help 48
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Note: If the image-shift calibration fails at low magnifications because of the presence of strong contrast
from grid bars, go to the center of the cross-grating specimen and use the triangle area in the "A" to do
the image-shift calibration.
Acquire image Starts the retrieval of the reference image from TIA.
Set magnification Defines the magnification to be used for the photomontage.
Calibrate rotation Not enabled for CCD. Calibrations are under the Calibrate menu.
Execute Pressing Execute will start the automatic mounting of the montage images.
Show log Will display a log containing information about the mounting of the images.
Plate type
Not relevant for CCD montage.
CCD
With CCD acquisition, there are two ways to handle the images:
• Collect the images into a data series in TIA. This series can then be used later as the basis for
generating the montage image. The number of images strongly depends on image size and memory
available.
• Collect the images as a file series. Each image is saved to file but not kept in a data series in TIA.
While there is no limit to the number of images (except hard-disk space), you have to use other
software to assemble the images into a single montage image. Supported file formats are Extended
Header Binary, MRC and TIFF. The former two contain information about microscope settings in their
header, while for the TIFF images you only guide to the image position is the file name (which
contains the x, y values separated by underscores).
• The CCD Store images only is disabled if you have already acquired images. To switch between
data series in TIA and files, you have to redefine the montage (File, New montage).
Overlap
The overlap between the exposures is the percentage of the horizontal or vertical axis that must be
common to both exposures to ensure fit of the photomontage without gaps. The overlap can be set
either automatically or at a fixed value. If done automatically the program will adjust the overlap for the
magnification used.
Note: It is allowed to define a negative fixed overlap value. In that case the individual exposures will not
overlap but instead be spaced apart. In this way an area can be covered by a regular grid of exposures
without requiring them to fill the whole area. This function can be used for example for statistical
analysis.
TEM on-line help 51
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Exposure
The Exposure options concern whether a sound signal should announce start and finish of individual
exposures and how long the software should wait after stage movement before taking an exposure.
Rotation
Not relevant for CCD montage.
Colors
Not relevant for CCD montage.
Use hyperlabels
The software provides a special feature in the form of hyperlabels (labels that act like hyperlinks: when
the cursor moves over them they flash their color to blue and a mouse-click brings up a dialog with
information about the point, with additional functionality such as Go to). The labels are those of the
exposures.
At the top the software indicates the progress of the procedure (in this case no exposures have been
recorded yet). An estimated total duration is given once a few images have been recorded (prior to that
the time cannot be estimated).
The Sound on checkbox allows changing the Sound option during the actual procedure.
The advantage of the manual exposure procedure over the automatic procedure is that you get the
chance after each "image move" to check the settings (like focus) and to have the option to record the
CCD images manually (through the Acquire function of the CCD/TV control panel of the TEM user
interface).
Initially the button with the caption Next will display First. Press the button to get started. The stage or
image shift will be set to the first image position. Once that is done the Expose to acquire the CCD image
TEM on-line help 55
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
in the normal Photomontage display window in TIA and add it to the series of images. The Next button is
re-enabled and you can go to the next position, and so on. If the Exposure function is not used, the Next
button does not get disabled.
If you do not acquire the CCD images through the Expose function, the progress bar will show only half
of the progress (each progress step is a move or an image acquisition).
Note: If the mounted image with check on image positions by cross-correlation (case 3) shows large
shifts or the faded image mounting (case 2) does not produce a good fit, there are two potential
problems:
• The calibrations are not good. Redo the calibrations.
• The images are distorted (lens distortions). Because lens distortions are smaller closer to the central
axis of the microscope, use smaller CCD areas (if necessary in combination with more images) to
record CCD montages.
TEM on-line help 56
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
double Astigmatism 2 Y
double Astigmatism 3 X
double Astigmatism 3 Y
double Camera type serial number
double Camera position (WA, MSC, GIF)
double Magnification
double Camera length
double STEM magnification
double Lens series
double Lorentz
double Spot size
double Microscope mode
double Objective lens value
three doubles Currently undefined
double Image shift X (m)
double Image shift Y (m)
double Image shift X (pixels)
double Image shift Y (pixels)
double Stage X (m)
double Stage Y (m)
double Stage Z (m)
double Stage A (rad)
double Stage B (rad)
double Image minimum level
double Image maximum level
double Image real (0) or reciprocal space
further doubles undefined
Many of the values stored in the extended header are used by the TrueImage reconstruction software as
a first guess to optimize the reconstructed wave function.
TEM on-line help 58
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Please note: Some values have rather odd numbering. That is because prior usage determined that
certain values were fixed too low and the addition of more types dictated the necessity for numbers
below, while 0 is generally avoided. The 0 is typically an undefined number.
Starting Df (nm) 80
Focus step (nm) 84
DAC setting 88
Spherical aberration 92
Semi-convergence 96
Info limit (nm-1) 100
Number of images 104
Image number in series 108
Coma 1 112
Coma 2 116
Astigmatism 2 1 120
Astigmatism 2 2 124
Astigmatism 3 1 128
Astigmatism 3 2 132
Camera type number 136
Camera position 140 WA = 1, MSC = 2, GIF = 3
Unused 144
Unused 148
TEM on-line help 61
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
3.1 Introduction
During an investigation of a specimen on a TEM grid, it is often difficult to keep track of grid holes
already investigated and grid holes still to be done. Furthermore, moving from one grid to another usually
requires lowering the magnification, moving the specimen stage to the new hole and increasing the
magnification again for a more detailed investigation. Such systematic searches are made much easier
by TEM Grid Scanning.
Grid Scanning makes use of the fact that grids are regular arrays of square or hexagonal holes. Once a
few essential points are known (through a calibration procedure in Grid Scanning), the software can
calculate the position of other grid holes and the specimen stage of the TEM microscope (the
CompuStage) can be moved from one grid hole to another by a simple keyboard or mouse command.
Holes passed during the Grid Scanning are displayed on the screen, making it easy to keep track of
areas already investigated. Interesting specimen locations can be stored with comments added. Stored
locations can be retrieved easily. Grid Scanning data can be saved in a data file for later retrieval. If
reference points are defined, the software recalculates old to new locations, making it easy to retrieve
previously stored locations, even if the grid is later not exactly in the same position.
To use TEM Grid Scanning first use the TEM Workspace layout to drag the Grid Scanning Control Panel
into a workset. Go to the tab of the workset and press the Display button in the Grid Scanning Control
Panel. The Grid Scanning Display window will be loaded and its functionality become available. You can
leave the Grid Scanning Control Panel in your workset for future use. The Display window will only be
loaded when the Display button is pressed.
The major part of the Grid Scanning functionality is present only in the Display window. The Control
Panel also provides rapid access to the more often-used functions.
Display
The Grid Scanning Display window is only loaded on operator request. To load it press the Display
button. A message will appear that the Grid Scanning server is being loaded. Once the server is running,
the window will be displayed, the Display button will turn yellow, and the message will disappear. You
are now ready to start working with Grid Scanning.
If the Display button is pressed again, the Display window will disappear. It is, however, not unloaded but
simply hidden. If you display it again (by once more pressing the button), it will still have kept all the Grid
Scanning settings as set previously. The window is only unloaded when you close the TEM User
Interface.
Freely sizeable
When this option is checked, the Display window can be positioned anywhere you like (the software will
remember your settings and restore them) and you can define its size in the standard Windows way
(click and drag on a border). If the option is off, the Display window will be fixed in size and position to fill
the data space of the TEM User Interface.
The following controls will be enabled or disabled when their counterpart in the Display window is
enabled or disabled.
Next
Moves the stage to the next hole.
Previous
Moves the stage back to the previous hole.
Center
Moves the stage back to the center of the current hole.
Add
Adds a stored location for the current stage position. If text has been inserted for a label, this text will
automatically be added to the location. If labels are not used, the label text is disabled. If labels are used
and the location label field in the Control Panel is empty, a dialog will be displayed in the Grid Scanning
Display in which the label can be entered. (So the difference is that the label in the Control Panel is
defined before storing the location while in the display it is done afterwards.)
Location label
Text entered here will be added as a label to a location stored.
TEM on-line help 63
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The main functionality of Grid Scanning resides in the menu of the display window. A typical sequence
for setting up and executing a Grid Scanning is as follows:
• If necessary, check that all options are defined as needed (some options cannot be changed later
unless New grid is select first in the File menu).
• Define the grid hole parameters by bringing three special points on a grid hole and its neighbor to the
center of the screen with the specimen stage during the calibration procedure.
• Start moving from gird hole to grid hole, storing locations along the way.
• If the data for the grid must be stored for later retrieval with the grid again in the microscope, define
the reference points.
• Store and/or print the data for later reference.
Menu
The menu gives access to all Grid Scanning functionality.
Status information
Grid Scanning displays some status information in a legend at top left of the display. This includes the
number of holes passed and of stored locations.
Status bar
The status bar lists on the left the current stage position. In the center it displays the major options
chosen for the grid scan. Error messages can be displayed on the right.
Border icons
The border icons appear to behave as the standard Minimize, Maximize and Close buttons. The Close
button, however, does not truly close the window but hides it. The window is closed only upon closing
the TEM User Interface.
New grid Starts a new grid scan (resetting all previous montage values).
Open Opens an existing grid scanning file.
Save, Saves the grid scanning data in a file, Save as allows definition of different file
Save as name.
Control options Leads to the Control options dialog.
Load options Loads options from file.
Save options Saves options to file.
Printer setup Leads to printer setup dialog.
Print list Prints the list of stored locations and labels.
Print graphic Prints the current graphical display.
TEM on-line help 65
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Calibrate grid Insert the current specimen-stage X,Y location into the list of points that define the
Grid Scanning boundary.
Reference points Starts procedure for storing reference points.
Show ref.pt. data After reference points from an old file have been found again, the software can
display the relation between old and new reference points, such as rotation angle
and relative shifts.
New spiral Allows starting of a new spiral scan at a user-defined location.
Next hole Moves stage to next hole. How the movement is executed depends on the type of
scan chosen.
Previous hole Moves stage back to previous hole.
Hole center Moves the specimen stage back to the centre of the current grid hole.
Start/resume auto In automatic movement mode the scan can be (re)started with start/resume auto.
Stop auto In automatic movement mode the scan can be stopped with stop auto.
Add Adds the current stage location to the stored locations list.
Delete Deletes one or more locations from the stored locations list.
Display list Displays a list with all stored locations (X, Y, label) and allows printing of the list.
Show number Shows a list of stored locations (with number and label), allowing selection of one
location for which the data (X,Y, label) will be shown. A button Goto allows moving
the stage to the stored location.
Grid type
The software supports two types of grid, with square and with hexagonal (honeycomb) holes. Identify the
type of grid before the calibration is started
Scan pattern
The scan pattern is one of four:
A Linear scan is a scan where the holes are arranged in lines that
stretch from one side of the grid to the other. These lines
themselves are accessed once again in a spiral.
On a linear scan an increasing number of holes is passed (follow
the red lines with arrows). Passed holes are shown in their proper
orientation in green, the current stage position is shown by the red
square.
TEM on-line help 67
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Scan type
The Scan type can be either manual or automatic. In manual scan, the operator must command the
software to move the specimen stage from one hole to the next. In automatic scan, the software waits
until the delay time has passed and then moves the stage to the next hole.
Relocatable grid
A Relocatable grid is a specially shaped grid that has an asymmetric 'ear'
that fits into the single-tilt specimen holders delivered since 1993. The 'ear'
takes care that the grid can be loaded into the specimen in only one way,
without rotation and very little sideways movement. The relocatable grid thus
makes it easy to remove specimens from the microscope holder and putting
them back in and still retrieve stored locations easily.
If relocatable grids are used, switch on the option under Control Options.
Grid Scanning will then make it possible to drive back directly to the old
location of the first reference point which should be very close to the current
location of that point.
Use labels
The label refers to user-written comments (up to a maximum of 100 characters) than are stored together
with stored locations. If Use labels is checked the software will bring up a dialog allowing insertion of the
location label.
Use hyperlabels
The software provides a special feature in the form of hyperlabels (labels that act like hyperlinks: when
the cursor moves over them they flash their color to blue and a mouse-click brings up a dialog with
information about the point, with additional functionality such as Go to or Delete).
TEM on-line help 68
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Colors
The four types of colors (Background, Foreground, Holes, Locations, Current location) for the display
can be freely selected. The selection is made in the Control options dialog or by clicking on the window
with the right-mouse button. The latter will popup a menu that allows definition of the colors.
Note: There is one exception to free color selection: if hyperlabels are used the Location color cannot be
blue (this is the flash color of the hyperlabel).
The three calibration points lie on opposite sides of a grid hole (1, 2) and in the next grid hole (3). The
choice of the points doesn't matter (for instance, 1 and 3 can be closest to the operator, 2 furthest away);
what counts is their relation.
After the third point has been entered the software knows the size of a grid hole, the orientation and the
shift necessary to go from one hole to the next.
The software then will drive the stage to a grid hole 750 m away from the current position, where a
point similar to number 1 must be found. From the position of this point, the software fine-tunes the
calibration. If no fourth point can be identified with certainty, simply press OK without moving the stage.
Reference points should be located close to but not at the periphery of the specimen. Locations further
from the center increase the accuracy of relocation but if a reference point later lies outside the reach of
the stage, then it is not possible to recalculate the old locations to new ones. Because specimens are
often shifted up to 0.2 mm when re-inserted into the specimen holder, keep the reference points less
than 800 m away from the center.
Setting the reference points can be done at any stage of Grid Scanning (but before the data are saved
into a file, otherwise the reference points are not included in the file). When an old file containing
reference points is opened, the software will ask to redo the reference points immediately. If the
reference points are not redone at this stage, the software will display the stored locations and tracks in
their original configuration. The reference points can then still be done later.
During this procedure this software can assist in finding back the old reference points through the Assist
function. The Assist function will list a number of possibilities depending on which reference points must
be found again:
• Move the specimen stage to the old location for point 1.
• Move the specimen stage in a circle, around 0,0 for point 1, around 1 for point 2, etc.
• Calculate alternative locations for points 2 and 3 on the assumption that the specimen is upside
down.
After finding reference point 1, the software will calculate what the most likely new location is for
reference point 2 and ask if the stage must be driven there. The same is done for point 3 (if a third
reference point had been set originally).
For each reference point found back as well as the whole set of the reference points the software will go
through a number of consistency checks (distances between old points and new points comparable,
angles from the center of gravity of the old three-point triangle and old points and the center of gravity of
the new three-point triangle and new points comparable).
The software can handle rotation, shift and mounting upside down of the specimen. The software also
calculates a 'stretch' parameter that is related to the percentage difference in dimensions between old
and new reference points. The software cannot however accommodate severe distortions due to
bending of the specimen, so some care should be taken to ensure the integrity of the specimen. The
various values can be displayed under Show ref. pt. data.
TEM on-line help 70
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The two sets of reference points define two triangles. The first effect may be that one triangle is mirrored
relative to the other (when the grid is upside down). In the calculation of the data the software will first
'undo' the mirror operation. After removing any mirror, we again have two triangles which are now
(usually) rotated relative to each other. The software next 'undoes' the rotation. The final result will be
two triangles that are somewhat shifted relative to each other.
Rotation angles
The software calculates the rotation angles for four points on each triangle: the center of gravity and the
three reference points individually. The values for all angles should be consistent (larger deviations for
individual points may occur when the points lie too close to 0,0 since the angles are defined as between
the lines through New - 0,0 and old - 0,0).
Relative shift
The shift is can also be calculated for the centers of gravity of the triangles.
Stretch factors
The distances between reference points in the old and new triangles should be similar (e.g. Old 1 to 2
should be of the same length as New 1 to 2). Strong deviations in the stretch factors from 1.0 are an
indication that either one or more reference points is wrong or the grid has been distorted considerably
during unloading/loading.
If there are serious errors in the reference points, note down the positions of the new reference points
most likely to be correct and open the file again. Go through the reference points procedure again to find
the proper reference points.
TEM Smart Tilt combines a range of tools that assist in diffraction experiments:
• A representation of the TEM viewing screen with the orientation of the tilt axes and tilt angles
indicated. The display is coupled directly to the active camera length on the microscope.
• The possibility to double-click with the left-hand button of the mouse anywhere on the 'viewing
screen' displayed and the feature corresponding to that location will be brought to the center of the
diffraction pattern by tilting.
• Accurate measurement of tilts necessary to bring certain features in the diffraction pattern along the
optical axis or tilt them half-way ('Bragg' tilting to go from a diffracted beam in Bragg condition to the
systematic row). After Bragg tilting it is possible to tilt left or right around the systematic row
afterwards in user-defined tilt steps.
• Rapidly toggle between focussed diffraction pattern and shadow image for both SAED and CBED.
To use TEM Smart Tilt first use the TEM Workspace layout to drag the Smart Tilt Control Panel into a
workset. Go to the tab of the workset and press the Display button in the Smart Tilt Control Panel. The
Smart Tilt window will be loaded and its functionality become available. You can leave the Smart Tilt
Control Panel in your workset for future use. The Display window will only be loaded when the Display
button is pressed.
The major part of the Smart Tilt functionality is present only in the Display window. The Control Panel
also provides rapid access to the more often-used functions.
The Smart Tilt Control Panel contains two sets of functions for
Smart Tilt:
• Functions that load the Smart Tilt Display window (a
separate window that is typically positioned in the data space
of the TEM User Interface) or determine its size.
• Functions that give rapid access to often-used Smart Tilt
functions.
TEM on-line help 72
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Display
The Smart Tilt Display window is only loaded on operator request. To load it press the Display button. A
message will appear that the Smart Tilt server is being loaded. Once the server is running, the window
will be displayed, the Display button will turn yellow, and the message will disappear. You are now ready
to start working with Smart Tilt.
If the Display button is pressed again, the Display window will disappear. It is, however, not unloaded but
simply hidden. If you display it again (by once more pressing the button), it will still have kept all the
Smart Tilt settings as set previously. The window is only unloaded when you close the TEM User
Interface.
Freely sizeable
When this option is checked, the Display window can be positioned anywhere you like (the software will
remember your settings and restore them) and you can define its size in the standard Windows way
(click and drag on a border). If the option is off, the Display window will be fixed in size and position to fill
the data space of the TEM User Interface.
The following controls will be enabled or disabled when their counterpart in the Display window is
enabled or disabled.
Full
Starts the Full (zone-axis) tilt procedure.
Bragg
Starts the Bragg tilt procedure.
Left
Tilts one tilt step to the left.
Right
Tilts one tilt step to the right.
Switch
Starts the switch direction procedure.
Tilt step
Defines the step used for tilting right and left.
Focus
Sets beam or diffraction pattern focus to the focussed setting.
Defocus
Sets beam or diffraction pattern focus to the defocussed setting (shadow image).
Flap-out button
The flap-out leads to the Smart Tilt Options tab.
TEM on-line help 73
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The Smart Tilt Options contains several settings for using Smart
Tilt.
Buttons visible
The Smart Tilt display has the possibility to display a toolbar with buttons for often-used functions. The
Buttons visible option decides if this toolbar is visible or not.
Show reminder
The various Smart Tilt procedure rely on a properly centered diffraction pattern at the start. The operator
can either make sure that the pattern is always properly centered. Or the software can remind the
operator in each.
User buttons
You can assign some of the Smart Tilt functions to User Buttons (L1..L3, R1..R3) on the TEM Control
Pads. This may make it easier to control, especially when intensively observing the diffraction pattern on
the viewing screen. Each function can be assigned to one of the User Buttons by selecting one from the
drop-down list. If None is selected, the function is not connected to a User Button. When a function is
assigned to a button already occupied, the function of the occupied button will be switched automatically
to en empty user button.
The buttons are disconnected as long as Smart Tilt is not loaded or when it is hidden (e.g. by pressing
the Display button).
Menu
The menu gives access to all Smart Tilt functionality.
Toolbar buttons
Toolbar buttons giving rapid access to often-used functions can be found on the left-hand side of the
Smart Tilt display (the display of the toolbar is optional). If there is sufficient room the buttons will be
large, otherwise they are small (as shown here). From top to bottom the buttons are Full tilt, Bragg tilt,
Left, Right, Switch direction, Undo, Redo, Tilt step, Focus and Defocus.
Display
The display is a representation of the viewing screen of the TEM microscope with its inscribed circles
and plate markers. On top of this, Smart Tilt displays the tilt axes in their orientation and circles
representing tilt angles. The tilt axes are shown in red, the blue circles on the screen mark tilt angles and
the green line (if present) marks the direction of the diffraction spot used for Bragg angle tilting.
Convention: The direction of the tilt axes (+/-) is displayed in such a way that the center of a Laue circle
will move in the direction of the marker on the screen if that particular direction and sign of tilt is chosen.
TEM on-line help 75
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
By double clicking with the left-hand mouse button on the area covered by the screen, the software is
instructed to change the tilt of the CompuStage by the values corresponding to the point where the
mouse button was clicked.
Convention: The tilt under mouse-button control is such that the point corresponding to the cursor
location is brought to the center of the diffraction pattern. Note that this tilt is in the opposite direction to
the movement indicated by the tilt axes on the screen.
Status bar
The status bar lists on the left the current stage position. In the center it displays the major options
chosen for the grid scan. Error messages can be displayed on the right.
Border icons
The border icons appear to behave as the standard Minimize, Maximize and Close buttons. The Close
button, however, does not truly close the window but hides it. The window is closed only upon closing
the TEM User Interface.
All camera lengths Calibration procedure going through all camera lengths.
Current camera length Calibration procedure for the current camera length.
Alpha tilt Calibration of the alpha tilt against the diffraction shift.
Beta tilt Calibration of the beta tilt against the diffraction shift.
TEM on-line help 76
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Show reminder The tilting operations rely on a measurement of the diffraction shift. Starting
position must therefore always be a well-centered diffraction pattern. If the
reminder is on, the operator will be reminded before each diffraction-shift
measurement to check the centering of the diffraction pattern.
Zone axis Starts the Full (zone-axis) tilt procedure.
Bragg Starts the Bragg tilt procedure.
Set step Sets the tilt step used for Left and Right tilting. The tilt step is the absolute
change in angle in space (so made up of the proper combination of alpha and
beta tilt).
Left Tilts around the systematic row (defined by the Bragg tilt or Switch direction
operation) to the left.
Right Tilts around the systematic row (defined by the Bragg tilt or Switch direction
operation) to the right.
Switch Changes the direction of the systematic row. This procedure is similar in
operation to the Bragg tilt except that only the measurement is executed and
no change of tilt is made.
Undo Switches back to previous stage position.
Redo Goes forward to next stored stage position.
Display list Display the list of past tilting operations. Any of the items can be selected by
clicking. A right-hand mouse-button click will popup a menu with Hide list
(equivalent to using Display list in main menu again), Go to selected
position, Copy (as text).
Copy (as text) Copies contents of tilt list as text to the clipboard. It can then be pasted into
any program that accepts text input.
Compucentric Enables (checked) or disables compucentric tilting. Function is disabled when
TEM Compucentricity is absent.
The central beam in the diffraction pattern must now be shifted to the marker indicated (or as far as
possible in the direction of the marker). Note that the distance shifted is not relevant, it is the direction
that is important.
In the procedure for all camera lengths, the software goes through the same procedure for all camera
lengths.
The tilt calibration procedure consists of the following steps (all executed after instructions from the
program):
• Tilt a crystal to a zone axis that is well-defined and will be recognisable from the Kikuchi pattern even
when tilted off axis.
• Center the diffraction pattern accurately.
• Tilt the zone axis away as far as possible (the higher the tilt away from zone axis, the more accurate
the calibration will be) with one tilt axis only, while still being able to recognise it.
• With the diffraction shift recenter the zone axis (the intersection of the Kikuchi bands) on the screen.
TEM on-line help 78
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
This procedure provides the program with the necessary data to transform a diffraction shift (orientation
and value) to a tilt (direction and value).
A suitable specimen for the procedure is one that will show strong Kikuchi bands and one that isn't bent
(bending of the specimen will change the apparent tilt of the specimen and thus lead to an incorrect
calibration). The silicon substrate of semiconductor specimens (somewhat thicker areas tend to show
good Kikuchi bands and are also usually straight, unlike the thin edge) has been found to be quite good.
Next the pattern has been shifted with the diffraction shift so now the
zone axis has been centered on the screen. The center of the viewing
screen is marked by the black cross.
Besides bringing a crystal from the Bragg condition into the symmetrical condition, this option also
defines the direction for right and left-perpendicular tilting (tilting around the systematic row that contains
the diffracted beam just used for setting the Bragg angle). The direction of the original diffracted beam is
indicated on the viewing-screen representation by a green line from the center.
Next the diffracted beam is centered on the screen with the diffraction
shift. The center of the viewing screen is marked by the black cross.
In the shadow image Fresnel contrast can be visible. This Fresnel contrast (not the diffraction contrast -
an area scattering strongly will remain dark in the transmitted beam) depends on whether the shadow
image is underfocus or overfocus, both in SAED and CBED. Going from under- to overfocus results in a
Fresnel contrast reversal as well as a flip of the image visible in the disks by 180°. In order to get
consistent results, one should always choose one or the other.
TEM on-line help 81
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
5 TEM Compucentricity
5.1 Introduction
The β tilt of the double-tilt holder is not eucentric. Its motion therefore results (in the ideal case) in a
change in the X and Z values. (In non-ideal cases also Y and α are changed a little.) This non-eucentric
behaviour can make it hard to keep track of a feature of interest in the specimen during tilting. TEM
Compucentricity makes it possible to reduce these non-eucentric motions and thereby makes it easier to
use the β tilt.
Schematic diagram of the effect of the β tilt. The thick black lines show the locations of the X and Z stage
axes, while the dotted black line indicates the eucentric height. The central blue circle is the β tilt axis,
which is displaced from its 'ideal' X 0, Z 0 location. The dotted blue circles indicate the path traveled by a
point when tilted around β. Tilting around β for the point lying on the smaller dotted blue circle requires a
small correction to X and Z (red arrow lines) to bring the area back to the same position in space (but a
different stage position). For the point lying on the larger dotted blue circle the correction (red arrow
lines) is much larger because it is further away from the tilt axis itself. The corrections are applied
automatically when compucentric tilting is used.
Since specimen holders deviate from the 'ideal' model, a correction can (and for good results should) be
made for this 'non-ideal' behaviour through a calibration procedure. Data are stored for each specimen
holder separately. Prior to calibration holders must therefore be identified by name.
TEM on-line help 82
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
To use the TEM Compucentricity first use the TEM Workspace layout to drag the Compucentricity
Control Panel into a workset. Go to the tab of the workset with the Compucentricity Control Panel. Select
an existing holder or add a new one. If necessary calibrate the holder. From there on compucentric tilting
is available.
Note: Due to the construction of the CompuStage and the nature of the Goto procedure, the Y axis will
change when the Z is changed. In order to ensure getting the correct stage position after compucentric
tilting, the tilting is done in two stages, the first setting the X, Z, α and β positions, and the second the Y
position.
Holder list
The holder list gives an overview of all holders currently defined. The list gives the names and the
Windows NT user name of the person who defined the holder. The holder list can be sorted
alphabetically on holder name and user name by clicking on the buttons Holder and User at the top of
the list. Repeated clicking on the same button reverses the sorting order. The Select button doesn't
become enabled until one holder in the list is selected.
One entry in the list is always Default. This entry defines the 'ideal holder' which has its β tilt axis defined
as 0 for all parameters.
Select
The Select button can be clicked once a selection in the holder list has been made. When the Select
button is pressed the calibration parameters of that holder are entered into TEM Compucentricity. To
reset the parameters to 0, select the Default holder and press Select.
Note: If no user-defined holder (any other selection than Default) is selected, the flap-out tabs Data,
Calibrate and Cal. data are not accessible.
TEM on-line help 83
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Remove
The Remove button allows removal of the holder selected from the list. Holders can only be removed by
their owners (the user with the same name as in the list) or the supervisor. The software will ask for
confirmation before a holder is removed.
Copy
The Copy button allows copying the parameters from one holder data set to a new holder data set. First
enter a new name for the holder. Then select a holder from the list and press Copy.
Holder name
A new holder data set is defined by entering a name in the edit control at the bottom of the Control Panel
and either pressing Add or Copy.
Add
When a name in entered for the holder in the edit control at the bottom the Add button becomes active.
When the button is pressed a new data set is entered in the list. Add is equivalent to a copy of the
Default holder data set.
Flap-out button
The flap-out leads to the Compucentricity Options, Data, Calibrate and Cal. data tabs.
Note: If no user-defined holder (any other selection than Default) is selected, the flap-out tabs Data,
Calibrate and Cal. data are not accessible.
The data can be copied by either clicking with the right-hand mouse button in the tab (and selecting
Copy to text) or clicking inside the tab and pressing Ctrl+C. The data are then copied to the clipboard as
text and can be pasted into any software that accepts text input.
Note: If no user-defined holder (any other selection than Default) is selected, the flap-out tabs Data,
Calibrate and Cal. data are not accessible.
Note 1: It is important that all points are correct. Since it may be impossible to achieve the correct
eucentric height (due to the limitations of the Z range) at high tilts and high values of X (further from
zero than -500 m or +500 m), calibration should in general not be attempted too far away from the
center of the stage. The accuracy of the calibration depends, however, on the location where the
calibration is executed, with improved accuracy if the calibration point is close to the area where
compucentric tilting will be done. The worst case is to calibrate close to the tilt axis (where the
compensations are small so stage position measurement errors can dominate over the actual
compensations) and then tilt much further away from the actual position of the tilt axis. A much better
general procedure is to combine calibrations at about -400 m and +400 m from the tilt axis position.
TEM on-line help 85
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Note 2: All β tilts set by the calibration procedure will be executed compucentrically. That means that the
image feature selected should stay reasonably close to the center of the screen, unless the current
holder calibration is far off (which may be the case when starting from the default settings).
Start button
The Start button starts the calibration procedure. The software instructs the operator to set the tilt close
to 0 and center the recognizable image feature.
Instructions panel
The instructions panel gives instructions during execution of the calibration procedure.
Continue button
The Continue buttons leads to the next step of the calibration procedure. When the procedure is finished,
the calibration parameters and residual are calculated, dependent on the option Replace, Add or
Compare chosen. After the procedure the stage is reset to the position (and tilts) at which the calibration
procedure was started.
Cancel button
The Cancel button cancels the calibration procedure. The stage is reset to the position (and tilts) at
which the calibration procedure was started.
Replace
If a calibration already exists, the Replace option is enabled. When this is selected the new calibration
will replace the earlier calibration (all points).
Add
If a calibration already exists, the Add option is enabled. When this is selected the new calibration will be
added to the earlier calibration. If ten points were already present, the first point is deleted and all points
are shifted down one to make room for the data of the new point.
Compare
If a calibration already exists, the Compare option is enabled. When this is selected the two new
calibrations will be calculated, one in which the new calibration is used only (Replace) and one in which it
is added to the earlier calibration (Add). The Cal. data tab will become active and the data are displaced
side by side. Choose an option (Replace or Add) and press Continue.
TEM on-line help 86
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Note: If no user-defined holder (any other selection than Default) is selected, the flap-out tabs Data,
Calibrate and Cal. data are not accessible.
TEM on-line help 87
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
6.1 Introduction
TEM k-Space Control is software that uses an input set of crystal-lattice parameters and lattice type to
Create a stereographic projection of the crystal’s zone axes
Simulate the electron diffraction patterns and Kikuchi lines that would be seen in the TEM when the
crystal is tilted to various orientations.
The Kikuchi- and diffraction-pattern simulations can aid the identification of diffraction patterns from the
crystal’s zone axes in the TEM.
In conjunction with the automatic control of the CompuStage and the ability for on-line diffraction pattern
measurement of the microscope, TEM k-Space Control becomes a powerful tool for crystallographic
research with the TEM. The orientation of the crystal can be determined with respect to the tilt axes of
the CompuStage and the crystal can then be tilted by the software to any zone axis within the range of
the specimen tilts.
You can leave the k-Space Control Control Panel in your workset for future use. The Display window will
only be loaded when the Display button is pressed.
The flow of working with k-Space Control falls into three separate parts:
1. Definition of the crystal structure
2. Determination of the orientation of the crystal
3. Changing the orientation
k-Space Control provides assistance with the determination of the orientation by:
• Automatic indexing of the zone axis on the basis of the on-line measurement or manual entry of two
diffraction vectors and their angle.
• Display of the diffraction patterns and Kikuchi maps.
Please note: The intersection of Kikuchi lines on the display may not coincide with the displayed
locations of the zone axes. In that case the location of the zone axis is correct. The intersections of the
Kikuchi lines may come out in the wrong position because the software simplifies Kikuchi lines to straight
bands. Clicking on a Kikuchi-line intersection will therefore not necessarily bring the intersection to
center, because it is the crystallographic direction that is centered.
To change the orientation of the CompuStage to bring it into agreement with the orientation as seen on
the k-Space Control display, press the Stage to button.
screen of the microscope. The maximum index for the Kikuchi lines and the scaling are changed on the
Display tab of the Control Panel flap-out. Note that the Kikuchi lines themselves are not indexed.
The Kikuchi line index determines up to what values of the hkl indices Kikuchi lines will be displayed.
The acceptable maximum values will generally depend on the effective camera constant and whether
the lines are shown with relative intensities or bright (see below). At low values, Kikuchi lines up to high
indices will tend to fill the display completely and give a very messy result, while at high camera
constants the use of low maximum indices may result in the conspicuous absence of lines expected. In
general, a value of 3 is useful for lower camera constants.
Please note: The intersection of Kikuchi lines on the display may not coincide with the displayed
locations of the zone axes. In that case the location of the zone axis is correct. The intersections of the
Kikuchi lines may come out in the wrong position because the software simplifies Kikuchi lines to straight
bands.
TEM on-line help 93
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Please note: The diffraction pattern displayed is based on the crystallographic parameters as input. This
may deviate from the true diffraction pattern as seen on the microscope because the k-Space Control
software does not account for structure factors, multiple scattering and possible forbidden diffractions.
6.4.6 Lattice
The display can be set so that a projection of the crystal unit cell is shown. In the center, the unit cell is
outlined and circles display the generalized positions in the unit cell (so at the corners for Primitive,
corners and faces for Face-centered, etc.). For unit cells beyond the central one (their number depends
on the setting of the Lattice points on the Display tab of the Control Panel flap-out) only the circles are
shown and no further lines.
6.4.7 Markers
The markers show the positions of the reference axes used during two-zone indexing. The axes are
displayed by squares with a number, easiest seen when zone axis and Kikuchi Line display is off.
Displaying the reference axes makes it easy to tilt back to these axes.
The marker for zone memory 2 which represents the secondary zone
axis from Two-Zone Indexing. The position of the marker differs from
the zone axis (102) to which it corresponds for the reason detailed
below.
The position of one of the markers may deviate from the exact position of the zone axis to which is
corresponds because the primary zone axis is assumed to be absolute and any difference between the
calculated and measured angles is taken up by giving the secondary zone axis some freedom to move
(along the line connecting the two zone axes). Thus, in the example shown above, the 102 axis is
displayed at its crystallographic correct position while the marker shows the measured stage position.
TEM on-line help 95
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
After these dialogs have been considered, a step-by-step procedure for Two-zone indexing is given.
Calculator
Pressing the Calculator button leads to the Calculator dialog for the zone memory selected.
Zone memory
A total of five memories is available for zone axes, which can be used in any combination (but the
software always uses only a combination of the two axes currently selected). The memory is selected via
the spin buttons next to the Calculator buttons for the primary and secondary zone axes. The spin
TEM on-line help 96
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
buttons work such that the selection for the other zone axes (that is, secondary for the primary-axis spin
button and vice versa) is always skipped. It is thus not possible to have the primary and secondary zone
axes on the same zone memory. If you want to use zone memory 2 as the primary axis, while it currently
is at the secondary axis, and another as the secondary, then first change the secondary zone from 2 to
another value and then the primary axis can be changed to select 2.
Zone axis
The two zone axes used for the indexing are displayed in the edit controls just below the “Calculator”
buttons. The zone index can be changed by clicking on the required index in the list underneath or by
typing in the index.. The special keyboard keys are used to enter negative values.
View pattern
When the View pattern button is pressed, the diffraction display on the right will show the diffraction
pattern for the primary of secondary zone axis. If the camera constant is on manual scaling, the value
will be set to a camera constant of 10 to allow viewing of the pattern.
Diffraction pattern
The diffraction pattern is displayed to the right. This pattern either corresponds to the pattern determined
by the current orientation of the Lab grid or to the pattern of the zone axis selected for which the 'View
pattern' button was pressed. By viewing the diffraction pattern it is, for example, possible to compare the
displayed pattern with that on the microscope. In this it is possible to distinguish between solutions that
are mirror images of each other.
Suggestion
After two zone axes have been defined through the calculator, the software will determine a match
between zone axes, based on the angle measured with the stage. The match is usually only one of a set
of possible permutations. For example, the match suggested with 00-1 and 02-1 is equally valid to the
match selected (of 100 and 102).
Index
Pressing Index exits from the Two-zone indexing dialog, while changing the orientation as defined by the
selection for the two zone axes.
Note: The position of the primary zone axis is assumed to be absolute (so it is made to coincide exactly
with the stage position measured for it) and any difference between the calculated and measured angles
TEM on-line help 97
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
is taken up by giving the secondary zone axis some freedom to move (along the line connecting the two
zone axes). Such differences can occur because of the accuracy of the measurement of the stage
position, including the effects of backlash on the tilts (which may result in deviations up to 0.2° or so) or
because the crystal is bent and the second zone axis orientation was not determined from the exact
same place in the crystal.
Cancel
Pressing Cancel exits from the Two-zone indexing dialog, while leaving the orientation as it was.
Measurement
The Zone Axis Calculator can use the same method for measuring in diffraction as the standard
Measuring control panel. Please see the description there as to the execution of such measurements.
The results of the measurements are automatically inserted into the edit controls for d1, d2 and the
interplanar angle.
d1
d1 is the first d-spacing used for indexing of the zone axis. The value for the d-spacing (in nanometers)
can be determined with the on-line measurement or entered by hand.
d2
d2 is the second d-spacing used for indexing of the zone axis. The value for the d-spacing (in
nanometers) can be determined with the on-line measurement or entered by hand.
Ratio
When Calculate is pressed, the ratio between the two d-spacings as measured is calculated. This value
can be compared to the calculated value.
TEM on-line help 98
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Interplanar angle
The interplanar angle is the angle between the two d-spacings. The value for the interplanar angle (in
degrees) can be determined with the on-line measurement or entered by hand.
Setup
Pressing the Setup buttons brings up the Match constraints dialog in which the limits on deviations are
set for the match between d-spacings and interplanar angle.
Calculate
When the Calculate button is pressed, the d1, d2 and interplanar angle are matched against calculations
of d-spacings an their interplanar angles, and possible matching zone axes are determined.
Calculated values
Under calculated values are listed the matches of the calculations:
• Indices for the best matches for d1 and d2
• Calculated d-spacings for d1 and d2
• Calculated interplanar angle between matches for d1 and d2 spacings
• Ratio between matches for d1 and d2 spacings
Resultant zone
The resultant zone list contains all matching zone axes. The contents of this list is copied to the Two-
zone indexing dialog when OK is pressed.
OK
Pressing OK exits from the Zone-axis calculator dialog, while keeping the newly defined match for the
zone axis. The data like d-spacings, interplanar angle and stage tilts are stored in the zone memory. The
stage axes are read when the OK button is pressed. It is important, therefore, to keep in mind that the
stage tilts at that particular moment must be such that they coincide with the orientation of the zone axis.
Cancel
Pressing Cancel exits from the Zone axis calculator indexing dialog, without changing any of the values.
OK
Pressing OK exits the match constraints dialog while keeping any changes made to the values of the
match constraints.
Cancel
Pressing Cancel exits the match constraints dialog without changing the values of the match constraints.
• Press the 2-Zone button in the Crystal tab of the flap-out of the k-Space Control panel.
• In the Two Zone Indexing dialog, select a zone-axis memory for the primary zone axis with the spin
buttons and press Calculator for the Primary zone axis.
TEM on-line help 100
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
• In the Zone Axis Calculator, use the measuring procedure to define two d-spacings and their
interplanar angle or enter the values by hand (the latter as in the example dialog below).
• If it is required to display the diffraction pattern for the select one axis, Press View Pattern for the
Primary zone axis.
• Press the Calculate button. Calculated values will now be inserted and the Resultant Zone axis list
will be filled.
• Press OK to exit from the Zone Axis Calculator dialog and go back to the Two-Zone Indexing dialog.
• If it is required to display the diffraction pattern for the select one axis, Press View Pattern for the
Secondary zone axis.
If necessary, it is possible to refine the orientation by using the k-Space display to tilt to a more suitable
zone axis, storing the relevant zone axis through the Stage Control Panel, then re-entering the Two-
Zone Indexing dialog and either replacing one or both the existing zone axes in the existing zone
memories or changing to different zone memories and storing the results of the new zone axes there.
These characters are the first six characters in the normal fonts (it can be checked in the Windows
program Character Map, available under Accessories). Except for the ‘bar’ 2 as “, most of these
characters are above the corresponding number on many keyboards. (Note: there is no real consistency
in this, due to the fact that many countries have their own keyboard lay-out).
The same characters are also used when the keypad keys are used (when Num Lock is on). So the
keypad key 1 gives the 'bar one' character while the key above the Q gives the normal one.
The special font is used automatically where needed, as e.g. in the Zone edit control on the k-Space
Control Panel and various dialogs of the k-Space Display.
TEM on-line help 105
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Display
The k-Space Control Display window is only loaded on operator request. To load it press the Display
button. Once the server is running, the window will be displayed, and the Display button will turn yellow.
You are now ready to start working with k-Space Control.
If the Display button is pressed again, the Display window will disappear. It is, however, not unloaded but
simply hidden. If you display it again (by once more pressing the button), it will still have kept all the k-
Space Control settings as set previously. The window is only unloaded when you close the TEM User
Interface.
Sizeable
When this option is checked, the Display window can be positioned anywhere you like (the software will
remember your settings and restore them) and you can define its size in the standard Windows way
(click and drag on a border). If the option is off, the Display window will be fixed in size and position to fill
the data space of the TEM User Interface.
The following controls will remain disabled until a crystal structure has been defined through New on the
Crystal tab of the flap-out.
Stage to
When Stage to is pressed, the CompuStage will be tilted to the currently active orientation on the k-
Space Control display. If the orientation entered is out of reach for the stage tilts, the Stage to button will
be disabled. The function is enabled once the orientation of a crystal has been determined.
Zone
In the Zone edit control the crystallographic notation of a zone axis can be entered. Individual indices
cannot exceed a single character (so the 1001 for ten-zero-one is not allowed). Negative indices are
entered using the special keyboard keys.
Tilt to
When Tilt to is pressed, the stereographic projection is tilted to the zone axis indicated in the Zone edit
control. There are no limitations imposed on the tilting. The tilt applies only to the display, not to the
stage. The function is enabled once the orientation of a crystal has been determined.
TEM on-line help 106
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Camera constant
The magnification of the stereographic projection and the other elements displayed depends on the
camera constant. This value can either be defined by hand, using the camera constant slider, or
automatic (in which case it is linked to the active camera length). The range of camera constants used
by k-Space Control is 1 to 20.
The camera constant (the camera length*the electron wavelength) is in mm*nm, so a camera constant of
1 means a distance of 1 mm corresponds to 1 nm d spacing (on the printed page; due to monitor size
difference these values may not be exact on the monitor display).
The camera constant (L*λ) forms part of the formula for converting distances in a diffraction pattern to d
spacings:
D*d = L*λ or d = (L*λ) / D
where D is the distance of the diffraction spot in the pattern to the origin of the pattern (the transmitted
beam). Thus while 1 mm at a camera constant of 1 means 1 nm d spacing, 2 mm means 0.5 nm d
spacing (as D occurs in the denominator).
Table of (approximate) camera lengths against camera constant for different accelerating voltages.
Note: For displaying the diffraction pattern, it is necessary to choose a larger camera constant,
otherwise the spots will be too close together and invisible. If the diffraction pattern display is on and no
pattern is visible, increase the camera constant.
Auto
The magnification of the display of the stereographic projection and the other elements displayed
depends on the camera constant. This value can either be defined by hand, using the camera constant
slider, or automatic (in which case it is linked to the active camera length). If Auto is checked, the
adjustment is automatic, otherwise it must be set with the Camera constant slider.
Stage grid a
The Stage grid a value defines the tilt angle given to the stage a axis of the k-Space display. The stage
grid tilt is changed to the value defined when the Set button is pressed.
Stage grid b
The Stage grid b value defines the tilt angle given to the stage b axis of the k-Space display. The stage
grid is changed to the value defined when the Set button is pressed.
Set
The stage grid tilts are changed to the values defined for stage grid a and b when the Set button is
pressed.
Flap-out button
The flap-out leads to the k-Space Control Crystal, Info, Display and View tabs.
TEM on-line help 108
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
New
In order to start working on a new crystal or phase, the software must know the crystal structure. To this
purpose the lattice parameters and crystal-structure type must be entered in the Crystal data dialog. The
program works on a triclinic basis so for crystals with higher symmetry, the symmetry derives simply
from the lattice parameters (all angles 90° and dimensions the same for cubic, all angles 90° and a=b for
tetragonal, etc.). For hexagonal crystals the rhombohedral notation must be used.
For simplified entering of the data, a set of crystal structures has been predefined (cubic, tetragonal,
etc.). These are used simply to avoid defining unnecessary entries (e.g. when cubic is selected all
angles will be set to 90° and b and c will be equal to a). These crystal structures are not imposed on the
underlying calculations (as stated above, all is done on a generalized, triclinic basis). Thus a selection of
cubic with a value of 0.52 for a is equivalent to selecting triclinic and entering the 0.52 for a,b and c and
setting all angles to 90° (but selecting the cubic crystal structure is less work than entering all the values
by hand).
TEM on-line help 109
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Print Setup
When the Print Setup button is pressed, the k-Space Control software displays the printer setup dialog
(e.g. for selecting the paper size).
Print
Printing causes the current display to be printed on the printer selected (if necessary, changes to printer
setup can be made under the Printer setup button). Note that printing is done on a white background so
the color selection may need to be adjusted.
Open
Via the Open dialog an existing oriented crystal structure can be read from disk. Crystal structure files
have the extension .xtl. In the crystal structure file, the program saves the lattice parameters and the
crystal-structure type.
Save
Once defined, crystal data can be saved for later recall. If no filename has been defined yet, the program
displays the Save As dialog in which the filename can be set. If a filename has already been defined,
then using Save will overwrite the existing file while under Save As a new filename can be given. Before
overwriting an existing file, the software will ask for confirmation.
Save As
Once defined, crystal data can be saved for later recall.
For working with k-Space Control, the orientation of the crystal must be determined. For the
determination, two indexing methods are available, the Two-zone and the Manual method.
2-Zone
When the 2-zone button is pressed, the Two-zone indexing method of determining the orientation of a
crystal, is started.
Manual
When the Manual button is pressed, the Manual indexing method of determining the orientation of a
crystal is started.
If the Compucentricity option is present on the microscope, the tilting can be done with the aid of
Compucentricity whereby the non-eucentric behavior of the β tilt axis is corrected.
Parameters
Under Parameters the crystal lattice parameters are listed.
Type
Under Type the type of crystal lattice is listed.
Indexing
Under Indexing the method used to determine the crystal orientation is listed. If the two-zone method
was used, the primary and secondary zone axes used for the indexing are listed.
Matrix
The orientation matrix of the crystal is defined as the matrix that relates the crystal axes to the lab grid
(see also V. Randle, 1992, Microtexture determination and its applications, The Institute of Materials,
London). The orientation matrix can be copied to the clipboard by clicking with the right-hand mouse
button on the Info Control Panel and selecting Copy matrix to clipboard in the popup menu.
The format of the output is a nine numbers separated by tabs on a line and each line separately. You
can copy these directly into programs like Microsoft Excel and you will get 3x3 cells filled with the matrix
values.
TEM on-line help 111
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Crystal indices
Crystal indices determines the maximum value used for the uvw indices of the zone axes displayed (a
number between 1 and 6). The zone axes can be displayed with or without the index label (depends on
the Display check box).
Diffraction
Diffraction determines the maximum value used for the hkl indices of the diffraction spots displayed (a
number between 1 and 6). The diffraction-pattern spots can be displayed with or without the index label
(depends on the Display check box).
Display (diffraction)
The status of the Display check box determines whether the spots of the diffraction pattern are shown
with or without label.
Lattice points
The Lattice points value determines the number of lattice points used on the display (a number between
1 and 6). For lower numbers fewer unit cells are shown. Only the central unit cell is indicated by lines.
Bright
Kikuchi lines can be displayed with relative intensities (where Kikuchi lines that have lower intensities in
the microscope are displayed with lower intensities on the k-Space Control display) or as bright. In the
latter case all Kikuchi lines will have the same (green) intensity.
Note that the relative intensities are not based on the structure factors that normally also determine the
intensities of Kikuchi lines but on a general approximation.
Stage orientation
Generally, the orientation of the stage tilt axes does not correspond to the a tilt being E-W and the b tilt
N-S as shown on the k-Space Control display. On most instruments the majority of camera lengths
typically have a running about NNW-SSE and b ENE-WSW. You can adjust the stage grid display to
reflect this deviation in orientation by entering a rotation angle for the stage orientation.
Lab grid
The Lab grid is the grid displaying the stereographic projection.
The color can be selected by clicking on the colored rectangle to
the right. Whether the Lab grid is displayed or not depends on
the status of the check box (checked = display).
Stage grid
The Stage grid is the grid displaying the orientation and tilts of the CompuStage a and b tilts. The color
can be selected by clicking on the colored rectangle to the right. Whether the Stage grid is displayed or
not depends on the status of the check box (checked = display).
Kikuchi
Kikuchi refers to the color of the Kikuchi lines. This is currently fixed to green. Whether the Kikuchi map
is displayed or not depends on the status of the check box (checked = display).
Zone axes
Zone axes defines the color for the zone axis symbols. The color can be selected by clicking on the
colored rectangle to the right. Whether the zone axes and their indices are displayed or not depends on
the status of the check box (checked = display).
Diffraction pattern
Indices defines the color for the spots of the diffraction pattern. The color can be selected by clicking on
the colored rectangle to the right. Whether the diffraction is displayed or not depends on the status of the
check box (checked = display).
Lattice
Lattice defines the color for the display of the schematic lattice. The color can be selected by clicking on
the colored rectangle to the right. Whether the lattice is displayed or not depends on the status of the
check box (checked = display).
Markers
Markers defines the color for the markers that indicate the position of the zone axes used for defining the
crystal orientation with the Two-zone indexing method. The color can be selected by clicking on the
colored rectangle to the right. Whether the markers are displayed or not depends on the status of the
check box (checked = display).
Font size
Under font size you select the size of the font used for displaying the zone axis and diffraction spots
indices.
TEM on-line help 114
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
7.1 Introduction
Free Lens Control allows control over individual lenses of the Tecnai microscope. The following
limitations apply.
Safety
• The spot size (first condenser lens or C1) cannot be taken lower than the value for spot size number
1.
• On 200 kV systems the spot size (first condenser lens or C1) cannot be taken lower than the value
for spot 5 when the high tension is higher than 120 kV and no holder is present in the CompuStage.
• On 200 and 300 kV systems the spot size (first condenser lens or C1) and intensity (second
condenser lens or C2) are blocked when the gun is in conditioning.
Operation
• All lens settings range from 0 to 100%, except for the first condenser lens which has a minimum
value as decribed above and the minicondenser lens which ranges from -100 to 100%.
• The changes in lens settings are not persistent. If microscope settings are changed that affect lens
settings (e.g. the switch between Microprobe mode and Nanoprobe mode), the Free Lens settings
are overruled. In order to avoid interference as much as possible, the relevant knobs on the Control
Pads of the microscope are disconnected. Thus the Intensity knob is disconnected when C2 is
changed, the Focus knob when the objective lens is changed, and the Magnification knob when one
of the projection system lenses(Diffraction, Intermediate, Projector 1, Projector 2) is changed. These
knobs are reconnected when Free Lens Control is deactivated. There are, however, many controls
that can interfere with Free Lens Control and not all can be blocked.
• As long as a particular lens has not been changed through Free Lens Control, its particular
microscope control is not disconnected. Thus, if you only change settings of the projection system,
the control of the condenser system (spot size, intensity) can still be done with the normal
microscope controls.
TEM on-line help 115
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Activate
When the Activate button is pressed the Free Lens Control is
switched on (the button becomes yellow) or off.
Microscope value
The microscope value lists the current lens value as it is on the microscope. The display will update each
time a lens setting is changed, also when Free Lens Control is not active.
Enter button
When the Enter button is pressed, the Free Lens Control value is transmitted to the Free Lens Control
slider. If Free Lens Control is active, the new value is then set on the microscope (otherwise only the
slider setting changes).
For the objective lens all steps are ten times smaller, for the minicondenser they are two times smaller.
Flap-out button
The flap-out button leads to the Registers tab of the Free Lens Control Control Panel.
Introduction
Free Lens settings can be stored in up to 10 registers. The settings of the registers are stored for each
individual user when the user logs off and reloaded when the user logs on again. Sets of registers can
also be stored in a file and loaded from file.
Register list
The register list contains the labels of the registers defined by the
user. The label of a register can be anything (up to 255
characters) except empty. If you do not specify a label yourself,
the software will automatically call the register 'Register' with a
serial number when a new register is added.
Registers are selected by clicking on the entry in the list. The
label of the selected entry is copied automatically to the register
label edit control.
Set to 'scope
When a register has been selected, its settings can be
transferred to Free Lens Control by pressing the Set to 'scope
button. If Free Lens Control is active, these settings (all lenses
together) are transferred immediately to the microscope. If Free
Lens Control is not active, the settings are transferred to the
sliders but not the microscope. To set only part of the register
settings, first deactivate Free Lens Control, then use Set to
'scope. Re-activate Free Lens Control and press the Enter
buttons of the lenses that must be set on the microscope to
transfer those settings to the microscope.
Register label
The register label edit control contains the label of a register. It
can be either a label typed in for a new register or the register
TEM on-line help 117
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
currently selected. The label of a register can be anything (up to 255 characters) except empty. If you do
not specify a label yourself, the software will automatically call the register 'Register' with a serial number
when a new register is added. The software does not check for label contents (that is, whether two
registers have the same label).
Add
When the Add button is pressed, a new register is added to the currently defined registers. The settings
of the new register are those currently defined for Free Lens Control. Registers can be added
irrespective of whether Free Lens Control is off or on.
Overwrite
When the Overwrite button is pressed, the currently selected register is overwritten with new settings.
These settings are those currently defined for Free Lens Control. Registers can be added irrespective of
whether Free Lens Control is off or on.
Delete
When the Delete button is pressed, the currently selected register is deleted. The software asks for
confirmation.
Open
When the Open button is pressed, the Open file dialog is displayed in which a file can be selected (the
extension for Free Lens Control files is .frl). The contents of this file are then loaded into the registers
(overwriting anything that is there).
Save, Save as
Through the Save or Save as buttons the contents of the registers can be saved to a file (the extension
for Free Lens Control files is .frl). When the Save button is used and a file name has been defined
previously, the contents of the existing file are overwritten. When no file name has been defined or the
Save as button is used, the Save file dialog is displayed, allowing definition of the file name under which
the settings are stored. When the file name is the same as an existing file, the software will ask if that file
must be overwritten.
TEM on-line help 118
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
8 Magnification Calibration
The values measured are entered into the magnification tables of DigitalMicrograph™ and/or TIA CCD
or in the TIA STEM magnification table. The control panel is accessible only to Supervisor, Service and
Factory.
Note: The magnifications as used by Magnification Calibration for CCDs always are the so-called
reference magnifications. These are the magnifications as displayed by the microscope when the main
viewing screen is up. This applies even to CCD cameras located in the wide-angle position (above the
viewing screen at the top of the projection chamber), because it is the reference magnifications that are
used by the CCD camera software to determine the effective magnifications from the magnification
tables. There thus is an apparent discrepancy between the magnification value displayed by the
microscope and by the Magnification Calibration software as well as the CCD magnification tables for
wide-angle CCD cameras.
Instructions
The instructions field will display instructions on how to proceed or a status description of the function
currently running or finished.
TEM on-line help 119
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Start button
The Start button starts the calibration procedure. The software will link up to DigitalMicrograph or TIA
and when successful, will display the name of the camera, the lens series (TEM or EFTEM) and high
tension setting. If TIA CCD is present on a system with Gatan cameras, the software will also require
that TIA is running (otherwise the TIA CCD magnification table will not be set).
The Start button will change to a yellow color and its caption to
Stop. Pressing the Start button when it is yellow will stop the
calibration procedure.
Starting the calibration procedure will open a log in a separate window. The log shows what is being
done and what the results are. It can be saved in text format (under the File menu of the log window).
The log can also be printed (if a printer is available to the system). Text files can also be opened in the
log file window.
Next button
During the calibration procedure the operator will be expected to do certain things as setting up
illumination, specimen area and focus, as well as change specimen (later in the procedure). Once these
things have been done (as given by the instructions displayed), pressing the Next button will continue
with the procedure.
Flap-out button
The flap-out button leads to the Report, File and Options tabs of the Automated Experiments Control
Panel.
Note: The software is not suitable for calibration of the LAD (LM) camera lengths nor for the Lorentz
mode camera lengths.
Note: The STEM magnifications are strongly dependent on the pivot points, perpendicular corrections
and distortion adjustment. For STEM magnifications as accurate as possible, the same STEM settings
should be used as during the calibration. It is therefore advised to adjust the pivot points and
perpendicular corrections carefully before the calibration and store these settings in an alignment file
(after the calibration, because that may have included adjustment of the STEM distortion) and having
users always use those alignments. If the STEM distortions initially were a long way off, stop the
procedure after the distortion adjustment and check the pivot points and perpendicular corrections, and
then restart the procedure.
The LM-STEM procedure is only available on FEG systems because on other instruments the cross-
grating squares usually cannot be resolved reliably because of the large spot size in LM-STEM.
are less than 0.1% (vector lengths of the grating square dimensions) and 0.1° (angle between
vectors).
• Direct cross-grating calibration of a comparable LM-STEM magnification. If the image distortion is too
high, once again the software will automatically adjust the distortions in an iterative procedure until
the distortions are less than 0.1% (vector lengths of the grating square dimensions) and 0.1° (angle
between vectors).
These STEM calibration procedures will be run for a total STEM rotation angle of 0°. This means that the
free (user) STEM rotation is set to 0°, and the aligned value (which corrects for the mismatch between
stage axes and STEM image axes) is also temporarily set to 0° (the latter value is reset at the end of the
procedure to the starting value). Effectively this means that the smallest distortions and most accurate
magnifications are achieved at the same STEM rotation angle.
Note: Both types of STEM-mode magnifications are strongly dependent on the pivot points,
perpendicular corrections and distortion adjustment. For STEM magnifications as accurate as possible,
the same STEM settings should be used as during the calibration. It is therefore advised to adjust the
pivot points and perpendicular corrections carefully before the calibration and store these settings in an
alignment file (after the calibration, because that may have included adjustment of the STEM distortion)
and having users always use those alignments. If the STEM distortions initially were a long way off, stop
the procedure after the distortion adjustment and check the pivot points and perpendicular corrections,
and then restart the procedure.
The LM-STEM magnification calibration does not result in a calibration file. The calibration value for the
LM-STEM magnification is directly set to the Tecnai software and also entered as a calibration value in
the system branch of the microscope settings in the registry.
cross-grating to another). Because of this, the magnification calibration uses one of two other types of
easily available specimens:
• Silicon in [110] orientation.
• Single-crystal gold in [001] orientation.
When appropriate in the procedure (dependent on magnification), the software will ask the operator to
insert one of these specimens, orient it, and focus so a lattice image becomes visible. For silicon both
<111> directions (0.31 nm) must be visible and for gold the <200> (0.204 nm). In the latter case, make
sure that the <200> are well visible. If the <200> are weak or invisible and the <220> spacings (0.144
nm) well visible, the software may confuse these and give the wrong calibration.
The software automatically will detect if silicon or gold is present (on the basis of the interplanar angles)
and perform the calibration.
Important: The illumination conditions for diffraction-ring analysis must be set such that there is
sufficient intensity in the rings, especially the most important one (0.235 nm). Especially on CCD
cameras with a limited bit depth (12- or 14-bits), this means that the center of the diffraction pattern must
be overexposed which will give blooming (the center shows a central overexposed blob, with two tails,
usually up and down, a bit like the image of an aircraft propeller). The blooming is necessary and does
not present a problem, neither for the CCD (which will NOT be damaged) nor for the ring analysis (which
knows that blooming can be present and takes care of that). If you reduce the illumination intensity
so that blooming is avoided, the rings analysis may fail.
TEM on-line help 125
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The images above show a diffraction pattern with a suitable amount of blooming (top left). The rings are
invisible until the contrast levels in the image are adjusted (top right). After the analysis the software will
convert the image to the log of itself, set the contrast levels and insert circles for the rings detected.
TEM on-line help 126
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Note: the STEM magnification is a rather arbitrary value, based on the approximation that a full STEM
frame should correspond to a frame covering 100x100mm at the same TEM magnification. Significant
deviations form this arbitrary value can be found. However, such deviations are unimportant. The only
really relevant value is the pixel size, which is what is calibrated.
Create report
When a calibration procedure has been executed successfully, the Create report button will become
enabled and a report can be made of the calibration just done.
History report
A historical overview can be made of the (at most) twelve last calibrations done - for the combination of
camera and microscope conditions. Click on one of the files in the list (this will define which conditions
will be used for the selection). press the History report button. The software will find the result of the last
twelve calibrations and display these in a graph.
The tabular format list the camera and microscope settings at the top. Below that follows a table with the
following columns:
• TEM - the magnification reported by the Tecnai microscope (the reference magnification on the plate
camera, displayed by the microscope when the viewing screen is up).
• X-grating - the results of the magnification calibration from the cross-grating directly.
• Im. shift - the result of the magnification calibration performed using the image shift of the
microscope.
• Lattice - the result of the magnification calibration performed with high-resolution images of gold [001]
or silicon [110].
TEM on-line help 129
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
• User - the value used for the magnification table. In most cases there will be only one calibration
method for each magnification, but in some cases there may be more than one. In that case the used
magnification indicates which of the method results is used (the other method then gives a cross-
check).
• Error (%) - each result is based on the measurement of two vectors (see the description of the
methods). The error indicates the consistency in the measurement of the two vectors and is NOT an
indication of the absolute accuracy achieved.
• CCD/TEM - the ratio between the measured magnification on the CCD camera and the TEM
reference magnification. On a perfect system, these values would all be the same.
TEM on-line help 130
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The history format list the camera and microscope settings at the top. Below that follows a graph
displaying the CCD to TEM ratio or nominal to measured ratio for STEM images for each magnification.
The last calibration is shown with filled red circles, the other calibrations have other symbols (unfilled,
change of color and symbol type). A 2% error bar is shown in the top right-hand corner of the graph (not
in the picture above). Note that the data of the above example are not real data.
The graph allows rapid assessment of the quality of each calibration (measurement consistent with
earlier or later calibrations) as well as (any) change in time of calibrations performed.
TEM on-line help 131
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Focus on :
For focusing there is a choice between the main screen (the main screen is lowered automatically to
allow focusing) and the CCD camera (Preview mode; CCD image acquisition in the Preview mode will
start automatically). To use the latter, set the CCD Preview mode to a suitable setting (continuous
acquisition, half or quarter size, exposure time ~0.25 sec).
TEM on-line help 132
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
With a GIF
With a GIF there is a choice for focusing between the TV camera (the camera is inserted automatically to
allow focusing) and the CCD camera (Preview mode; CCD image acquisition in the Preview mode will
start automatically). To use the latter, set the CCD Preview mode to a suitable setting (continuous
acquisition, half or quarter size, exposure time ~0.25 sec).
TEM on-line help 133
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
The AutoGun Control Panel provides a number of automated procedures. A short description of these
procedures is given below.
Conditioning goes up to the specified level with the delay step, both as defined by the user.
On 100 and 120kV conditioning takes place by slowly increasing the high tension up to the maximum of
the instrument (these microscopes do not have the ability to increase the high tension beyond the
highest value). Once the user-defined goal has been reached, the conditioning procedure is finished. If
the currently active high-tension setting is not one of the fixed high-tension steps, the high tension will be
set to the closest fixed high-tension step below the current value.
On 200 and 300kV instruments, the conditioning will take place in the normal regime at low high tension
settings, but switch to true conditioning when an overvoltage (a high tension value beyond the normal
maximum of 200 or 300kV) is required. After the user-define goal has been reached, the procedure will
keep the high tension at that value for 10 more minutes for stabilization. Afterwards the high tension is
set to the closest fixed high-tension step equal to or below the current value.
The starting point for the conditioning depends on the current high-tension status :
• If the high tension is off, it will be changed to lowermost fixed high-tension step.
• If the high tension is on, the current high tension value defines the starting point.
During conditioning the control panel displays how much time conditioning is estimated to take. The
estimate is based on the assumption that there will be no delays due to vacuum pressures increases.
Notes:
TEM on-line help 134
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
• The alignments make use of the measurement of the current on the large fluorescent screen. This
screen must there be down and the small screen out. If the beam current is less than the minimum
detectable screen current, the procedure will either terminate or (in the spot size-dependent gun
shift) skip the smaller spot sizes.
• Some of the measurements take place at high magnifications and require a reasonably focused
beam. The latter is set through the focused beam function that is derived from the spot-size intensity
calibration (in the HM Beam and LM Beam alignment procedures). Because on a FEG the size of the
beam additionally depends on the extraction voltage and gun-lens setting, the software will ask the
user to focus the beam. The aforementioned calibration should nevertheless be done correctly,
because the software only asks for one spot, the others should then automatically be focused as
well.
• For a FEG, the is one more important alignment - the gun tilt pivot points. These cannot be aligned
on the basis of the screen-current measurement and are therefore not included.
• For a FEG the alignment depends on the gun settings, so all alignment values may change as a
function of extraction voltage and gun-lens setting - though in general the same sensitivity is present
as with the thermionic filament, with gun tilt most frequently needed and spot size-dependent gun
shift the least.
• The accessibility of alignments depends on user level. For 'Users' only the gun-tilt procedure is
accessible (the inherent assumption is that the remainder of the alignment is derived from Supervisor
or higher user levels). All other levels have access to all three procedures.
TEM on-line help 135
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Note: The AutoGun control panel covers all available functionality of the normal Filament (User)
control panel (and has more). It is suggested that you remove the normal Filament (User) control
from your user interface setup and insert the AutoGun control panel instead.
Light
The Light button starts the procedure to make light :
• Check high tension status and switch high tension on if needed.
• Check the status of the filament and switch it on if needed.
• Check the status of the Column valves and open these if needed.
• Switch to a low magnification in the HM range with suitable illumination settings.
If the first three conditions are fulfilled the button is yellow. If it is impossible to attain 'Light', the status
will display why.
When the yellow Light button is pressed, the light is 'switched off'. This means that the column valves are
closed and the filament is switched off.
When the make light (or switch off) is active, the button will be orange (a transitional status).
Align
The Align button starts or stops the gun-tilt alignment procedure. The color of the button indicates
whether the procedure is active (yellow).
Note: The gun-tilt pivot points can be difficult to align (especially on FEG microscopes) because the
beam moves when the pivot points are changed. AutoGun has a special feature that will detect the
change in pivot point and automatically compensates the gun-deflection settings to keep the beam
centered. This makes the alignment of the gun tilt pivot much easier. You do not have to activate
anything in AutoGun, just make sure it is in the user interface.
Status
The status label provides feedback on status and operation of the AutoGun functionality.
TEM on-line help 136
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
High tension
Pressing the High tension button switches the high tension on and off. The color of the button indicates
the high-tension status (yellow = on). The high-tension setting is the one shown in the drop-down list box
on the right. The High tension button has three possible settings:
• The high tension is enabled but off : the button is 'normal' gray.
• The high tension is on : the button is yellow.
• The high tension is disabled : the text in the button is gray.
The high tension is enabled through the High tension enable button on the System On/Off Panel.
High-tension selection
The high tension setting is by clicking in the drop-down list box and selecting the required setting (a
range of fixed settings, comprising :
• 40, 60, 80 and 100 kV for Tecnai 10
• 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 and 120 kV for Tecnai 12
• 20, 40, 80, 120, 160 and 200 kV for Tecnai 20
• 50,100,150,200, 250 and 300 kV for Tecnai 30
Filament
The Filament button switches the filament on or off. The color of the button indicates the filament status
(yellow = on). The button is only enabled when the high tension is on.
Emission current
The emission current display shows the value of the emission current.
Emission setting
The emission setting can be changed with the spin control within the range 1 to 6.
TEM on-line help 137
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Note: The AutoGun control panel covers a major part of the functionality of the normal Filament
(Expert) and High tension (Expert) control panels (and has more). It is suggested that you remove
these control from your user interface setup and insert the AutoGun control panel instead.
The functionality not covered is that related to the ability to set the high tension to other values
then the preselection (Free High Tension control).
Light
The Light button starts the procedure to make light:
• Check high tension status and switch high tension on if needed.
• Check the status of the filament and switch it on if needed.
• Check the status of the Column valves and open these if needed.
• Switch to a low magnification in the HM range with suitable illumination settings.
If the first three conditions are fulfilled the button is yellow. If it is impossible to attain 'Light', the status
will display why.
When the yellow Light button is pressed, the light is 'switched off'. In the case of the FEG this means that
the column valves are closed.
When the make light (or switch off) is active, the button will be orange (a transitional status).
Align
The Align button starts or stops the alignment procedure selected from the drop-down list on the right.
The color of the button indicates whether the procedure is active (yellow).
Note: The gun-tilt pivot points can be difficult to align (especially on FEG microscopes) because the
beam moves when the pivot points are changed. AutoGun has a special feature that will detect the
change in pivot point and automatically compensates the gun-deflection settings to keep the beam
centered. This makes the alignment of the gun tilt pivot much easier. You do not have to activate
anything in AutoGun, just make sure it is in the user interface.
Status
The status label provides feedback on status and operation of the AutoGun functionality.
TEM on-line help 138
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
High tension
Pressing the High tension button switches the high tension on and off. The color of the button indicates
the high-tension status (yellow = on). The high-tension setting is the one shown in the drop-down list box
on the right. The High tension button has three possible settings:
• The high tension is enabled but off : the button is 'normal' gray.
• The high tension is on : the button is yellow.
• The high tension is disabled : the text in the button is gray.
The high tension is enabled through the High tension enable button on the System On/Off Panel.
High-tension selection
The high tension setting is by clicking in the drop-down list box and selecting the required setting (a
range of fixed settings, comprising :
• 40, 60, 80 and 100 kV for Tecnai 10
• 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 and 120 kV for Tecnai 12
• 20, 40, 80, 120, 160 and 200 kV for Tecnai 20
• 50,100,150,200, 250 and 300 kV for Tecnai 30
The actual high tension value is displayed on the right. Normally this is the same as the value from the
drop-down list, but during conditioning it may differ.
Filament
The Filament button switches the filament on or off. The color of the button indicates the filament status
(yellow = on). The button is only enabled when the high tension is on.
Emission current
The emission current display shows the value of the emission current.
Emission setting
The emission setting can be changed with the spin control within the range 1 to 6.
Flap-out button
The flap-out button leads to the Control and Saturate tabs of the AutoGun Control Panel.
TEM on-line help 139
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Filament
The filament type can either be Tungsten or LaB6. The type of
filament can only be chosen by the Supervisor.
Filament limit
The filament limit is the value up to which the filament setting can be increased before it stops
automatically. The value can be adjusted by Expert user and Supervisor.
Condition status
It is not always possible to start the conditioning procedure. The Condition status indicates why
conditioning is not possible (apart from another procedure currently running). If conditioning is possible,
the condition status is not visible and the Condition button is enabled.
Condition
Pressing the Condition button starts or stops the Conditioning procedure. The color of the button
indicates the status (yellow = active).
Condition to
The value for condition to is the goal used by the conditioning procedure. For Experts the suggested
value is the maximum high tension plus 5% if an overvoltage is possible (200 and 300kV), otherwise it is
the maximum high tension.
Note: The AutoGun control panel covers a major part of the functionality of the normal Filament
(Supervisor) and High tension (Expert) control panels (and has more). It is suggested that you
remove these control from your user interface setup and insert the AutoGun control panel
instead.
The functionality not covered is that related to the ability to set the high tension to other values
then the preselection (Free High Tension control).
Light
The Light button starts the procedure to make light:
• Check high tension status and switch high tension on if needed.
• Check the status of the filament and switch it on if needed.
• Check the status of the Column valves and open these if needed.
• Switch to a low magnification in the HM range with suitable illumination settings.
If the first three conditions are fulfilled the button is yellow. If it is impossible to attain 'Light', the status
will display why.
When the yellow Light button is pressed, the light is 'switched off'. In the case of the FEG this means that
the column valves are closed.
When the make light (or switch off) is active, the button will be orange (a transitional status).
Align
The Align button starts or stops the alignment procedure selected from the drop-down list on the right.
The color of the button indicates whether the procedure is active (yellow).
Note: The gun-tilt pivot points can be difficult to align (especially on FEG microscopes) because the
beam moves when the pivot points are changed. AutoGun has a special feature that will detect the
change in pivot point and automatically compensates the gun-deflection settings to keep the beam
centered. This makes the alignment of the gun tilt pivot much easier. You do not have to activate
anything in AutoGun, just make sure it is in the user interface.
Status
The status label provides feedback on status and operation of the AutoGun functionality.
TEM on-line help 141
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
High tension
Pressing the High tension button switches the high tension on and off. The color of the button indicates
the high-tension status (yellow = on). The high-tension setting is the one shown in the drop-down list box
on the right. The High tension button has three possible settings:
• The high tension is enabled but off : the button is 'normal' gray.
• The high tension is on : the button is yellow.
• The high tension is disabled : the text in the button is gray.
The high tension is enabled through the High tension enable button on the System On/Off Panel.
High-tension selection
The high tension setting is by clicking in the drop-down list box and selecting the required setting (a
range of fixed settings, comprising :
• 40, 60, 80 and 100 kV for Tecnai 10
• 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 and 120 kV for Tecnai 12
• 20, 40, 80, 120, 160 and 200 kV for Tecnai 20
• 50,100,150,200, 250 and 300 kV for Tecnai 30
The actual high tension value is displayed on the right. Normally this is the same as the value from the
drop-down list, but during conditioning it may differ.
Filament
The Filament button switches the filament on or off. The color of the button indicates the filament status
(yellow = on). The button is only enabled when the high tension is on.
Cold run up
The Cold run up button starts or stops the cold run up procedure, which is a combination of conditioning,
filament autosaturation and full gun alignment. After the procedure has finished it will close the column
valves and switch the filament off again. The procedure is meant to be run after exchange of a filament
and the button is only enabled when the filament hour counter has been reset to 0 or a gun air has been
done. The color of the button indicates whether the procedure is active or not (yellow = active).
Emission current
The emission current display shows the value of the emission current.
Emission setting
The emission setting can be changed with the spin control within the range 1 to 6.
TEM on-line help 142
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Flap-out button
The flap-out button leads to the Control tab of the AutoGun Control Panel.
Filament
The filament type can either be Tungsten or LaB6 (CeB6 can be treated as equal to LaB6). The
instrument has two sets of values for controlling the filament. These are exchanged when the other
filament type is chosen. The type of filament can only be chosen by the Supervisor from the drop-down
list.
Filament limit
The filament limit is the value up to which the filament setting can be increased before it stops
automatically. The value can be adjusted by Expert user and Supervisor. Note that the Supervisor
setting is automatically used for the 'User' user level.
Condition status
It is not always possible to start the conditioning procedure. The Condition status indicates why
conditioning is not possible (apart from another procedure currently running). If conditioning is possible,
the condition status is not visible and the Condition button is enabled.
Condition
Pressing the Condition button starts or stops the Conditioning procedure. The color of the button
indicates the status (yellow = active).
Condition to
The value for condition to is the goal used by the conditioning procedure. For Experts the suggested
value is the maximum high tension plus 5% if an overvoltage is possible (200 and 300kV), otherwise it is
the maximum high tension.
TEM on-line help 143
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Reset count
Pressing the Reset count button resets the filament counter to zero (that is, the date becomes today and
the hour counter becomes zero). This function is only accessible to the Supervisor. Pressing the Reset
count button should be done after the filament has been exchanged.
TEM on-line help 144
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Note: The AutoGun control panel covers all available functionality of the normal FEG (User)
control panel (and has more). It is suggested that you remove the normal FEG (User) control from
your user interface setup and insert the AutoGun control panel instead.
Light
The Light button starts the procedure to make light:
• Check high tension status and switch high tension on if needed.
• Check the status of the FEG and switch to Operate if needed.
• Check the status of the Column valves and open these if needed.
• Switch to a low magnification in the HM with suitable illumination settings.
If the first three conditions are fulfilled the button is yellow. If it is impossible to attain 'Light', the status
will display why.
When the yellow Light button is pressed, the light is 'switched off'. In the case of the FEG this means that
the column valves are closed.
When the make light (or switch off) is active, the button will be orange (a transitional status).
Align
The Align button starts or stops the gun-tilt alignment procedure. The color of the button indicates
whether the procedure is active (yellow).
Note: The gun-tilt pivot points can be difficult to align (especially on FEG microscopes) because the
beam moves when the pivot points are changed. AutoGun has a special feature that will detect the
change in pivot point and automatically compensates the gun-deflection settings to keep the beam
centered. This makes the alignment of the gun tilt pivot much easier. You do not have to activate
anything in AutoGun, just make sure it is in the user interface.
Status
The status label provides feedback on status and operation of the AutoGun functionality.
TEM on-line help 145
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
High tension
Pressing the High tension button switches the high tension on and off. The color of the button indicates
the high-tension status (yellow = on). The high-tension setting is the one shown in the drop-down list box
on the right. The High tension button has three possible settings:
• The high tension is enabled but off : the button is 'normal' gray.
• The high tension is on : the button is yellow.
• The high tension is disabled : the text in the button is gray.
The high tension is enabled through the High tension enable button on the System On/Off Panel.
High-tension selection
The high tension setting is by clicking in the drop-down list box and selecting the required setting (a
range of fixed settings, comprising 20, 40, 80, 120, 160 and 200 kV for Tecnai F20 and 50,100,150,200,
250 and 300 kV for Tecnai F30).
Operate
The Operate button switches between the Operate and Standby FEG states. The button is only enabled
when the FEG is on.
Emission current
The FEG Emission current display shows the value of the emission current.
Gun lens
The Gun lens setting can be changed with the spin control within the range 1 to 8.
TEM on-line help 146
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Note: The AutoGun control panel covers a major part of the functionality of the normal FEG
(Expert) and High tension (Expert) control panels (and has more). It is suggested that you remove
these control from your user interface setup and insert the AutoGun control panel instead.
The functionality not covered is that related to powering the FEG up or switching it off and the
ability to set the high tension to other values then the preselection (Free High Tension control).
Light
The Light button starts the procedure to make light:
• Check high tension status and switch high tension on if needed.
• Check the status of the FEG and switch to Operate if needed.
• Check the status of the Column valves and open these if needed.
• Switch to a low magnification in the HM with suitable illumination settings.
If the first three conditions are fulfilled the button is yellow. If it is impossible to attain 'Light', the status
will display why.
When the yellow Light button is pressed, the light is 'switched off'. In the case of the FEG this means that
the column valves are closed.
When the make light (or switch off) is active, the button will be orange (a transitional status).
Align
The Align button starts or stops the alignment procedure selected from the drop-down list on the right.
The color of the button indicates whether the procedure is active (yellow).
Note: The gun-tilt pivot points can be difficult to align (especially on FEG microscopes) because the
beam moves when the pivot points are changed. AutoGun has a special feature that will detect the
change in pivot point and automatically compensates the gun-deflection settings to keep the beam
centered. This makes the alignment of the gun tilt pivot much easier. You do not have to activate
anything in AutoGun, just make sure it is in the user interface.
Status
The status label provides feedback on status and operation of the AutoGun functionality.
TEM on-line help 147
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
High tension
Pressing the High tension button switches the high tension on and off. The color of the button indicates
the high-tension status (yellow = on). The high-tension setting is the one shown in the drop-down list box
on the right. The High tension button has three possible settings:
• The high tension is enabled but off : the button is 'normal' gray.
• The high tension is on : the button is yellow.
• The high tension is disabled : the text in the button is gray.
The high tension is enabled through the High tension enable button on the System On/Off Panel.
High-tension selection
The high tension setting is by clicking in the drop-down list box and selecting the required setting (a
range of fixed settings, comprising 20, 40, 80, 120, 160 and 200 kV for Tecnai F20 and 50,100,150,200,
250 and 300 kV for Tecnai F30).
Operate
The Operate button switches between the Operate and Standby FEG states. The button is only enabled
when the FEG is on.
Emission current
The FEG Emission current display shows the value of the emission current.
Gun lens
The Gun lens setting can be changed with the spin control within the range 1 to 8.
Flap-out button
The flap-out button leads to the Control tab of the AutoGun Control Panel.
TEM on-line help 148
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Extraction limit
The filament limit is the value up to which the filament setting can be increased before it stops
automatically. The value can be adjusted by Expert user and Supervisor.
Condition status
It is not always possible to start the conditioning procedure. The Condition status indicates why
conditioning is not possible (apart from another procedure currently running). If conditioning is possible,
the condition status is not visible and the Condition button is enabled.
Condition
Pressing the Condition button starts or stops the Conditioning procedure. The color of the button
indicates the status (yellow = active).
Condition to
The value for condition to is the goal used by the conditioning procedure. For Experts the suggested
value is the maximum high tension plus 5% if an overvoltage is possible (200 and 300kV), otherwise it is
the maximum high tension.
Note: The AutoGun control panel covers a major part of the functionality of the normal FEG
(Expert) and High tension (Expert) control panels (and has more). It is suggested that you remove
these control from your user interface setup and insert the AutoGun control panel instead.
The functionality not covered is that related to powering the FEG up or switching it off and the
ability to set the high tension to other values then the preselection (Free High Tension control).
Light
The Light button starts the procedure to make light:
• Check high tension status and switch high tension on if needed.
• Check the status of the FEG and switch to Operate if needed.
• Check the status of the Column valves and open these if needed.
• Switch to a low magnification in the HM with suitable illumination settings.
If the first three conditions are fulfilled the button is yellow. If it is impossible to attain 'Light', the status
will display why.
When the yellow Light button is pressed, the light is 'switched off'. In the case of the FEG this means that
the column valves are closed.
When the make light (or switch off) is active, the button will be orange (a transitional status).
Align
The Align button starts or stops the alignment procedure selected from the drop-down list on the right.
The color of the button indicates whether the procedure is active (yellow).
Note: The gun-tilt pivot points can be difficult to align (especially on FEG microscopes) because the
beam moves when the pivot points are changed. AutoGun has a special feature that will detect the
change in pivot point and automatically compensates the gun-deflection settings to keep the beam
centered. This makes the alignment of the gun tilt pivot much easier. You do not have to activate
anything in AutoGun, just make sure it is in the user interface.
Status
The status label provides feedback on status and operation of the AutoGun functionality.
TEM on-line help 150
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
High tension
Pressing the High tension button switches the high tension on and off. The color of the button indicates
the high-tension status (yellow = on). The high-tension setting is the one shown in the drop-down list box
on the right. The High tension button has three possible settings:
• The high tension is enabled but off : the button is 'normal' gray.
• The high tension is on : the button is yellow.
• The high tension is disabled : the text in the button is gray.
The high tension is enabled through the High tension enable button on the System On/Off Panel.
High-tension selection
The high tension setting is by clicking in the drop-down list box and selecting the required setting (a
range of fixed settings, comprising 20, 40, 80, 120, 160 and 200 kV for Tecnai F20 and 50,100,150,200,
250 and 300 kV for Tecnai F30).
Operate
The Operate button switches between the Operate and Standby FEG states. The button is only enabled
when the FEG is on.
Emission current
The FEG Emission current display shows the value of the emission current.
Gun lens
The Gun lens setting can be changed with the spin control within the range 1 to 8.
Flap-out button
The flap-out button leads to the Control tab of the AutoGun Control Panel.
TEM on-line help 151
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Extraction limit
The filament limit is the value up to which the filament setting can be increased before it stops
automatically. The value can be adjusted by Expert user and Supervisor. For 'User' user level the
extraction limit as set by the Supervisor is used.
Condition status
It is not always possible to start the conditioning procedure. The Condition status indicates why
conditioning is not possible (apart from another procedure currently running). If conditioning is possible,
the condition status is not visible and the Condition button is enabled.
Condition
Pressing the Condition button starts or stops the Conditioning procedure. The color of the button
indicates the status (yellow = active).
Condition to
The value for condition to is the goal used by the conditioning procedure. For Experts the suggested
value is the maximum high tension plus 5% if an overvoltage is possible (200 and 300kV), otherwise it is
the maximum high tension.
10 AutoAdjust
Note: AutoAdjust only works with the default CCD camera controller (TIA). TIA must therefore be
running before AutoAdjust functionality is enabled.
Focus
When the Focus button is pressed, the AutoFocus procedure is started when the button is gray. When
the procedure is already running (the button is yellow), the procedure is canceled.
Δf
The AutoFocus procedures measures the current defocus (with or without astigmatism). Once the
procedure is finished, it will set the defocus to the user-defined value entered in the edit control.
Note: There are three separate user-defined defocus values, one for LM, one for HM imaging
(Microprobe) and one for Nanoprobe. The software will keep these separate. The value you enter is only
for the currently active mode. The value will be changed automatically to the relevant one if the mode is
switched.
Include stigmator
The AutoFocus procedure can be run with or without measurement and correction of astigmatism. The
procedure without astigmatism is faster than the procedure with, because fewer measurements must be
made. Note that the defocus measurement may be in error if astigmatism is present. It is advised to
include stigmation at the start of a microscope session or, thereafter, when the microscope is switched to
a different mode (in this case only LM or HM are relevant; Nanoprobe has the same stigmation as HM
image).
Tune
When the Tune button is pressed, the tuning procedure selected in the drop-down list is started when the
button is gray. When the procedure is already running (the button is yellow), the procedure is canceled.
TEM on-line help 153
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Status
The Status field shows information about the currently active procedure, feedback on possible failures,
and instructions to be carried out.
Next
When the user must carry out some instruction (as given in the Status field), the Next button becomes
enabled. Press the Next button to continue (after having carried out the instructions) or the Focus or
Tune button to cancel further execution.
Undo
When the last action performed by AutoAdjust (the Undo button will be enabled after finishing a
procedure) does not produce satisfactory results, you can go back to the starting position by pressing the
Undo button. Generally only one action will be undone (so if you perform focus after eucentric height, it
will only undo focus), except when the combined procedure (All) has been done, in which case all
actions performed successfully in the combined procedure will be undone.
Del Images
In TIA a number of images are created by AutoAdjust. These images are called Image 1 to5 plus another
image that can have various names, such as Cross-correlation. These images are necessary during
execution of an AutoAdjust procedure. After that, you may want these images removed, which is what
happens when you press the Del Images button.
Flap-out
The flap-out button leads to the Settings tab of the AutoAdjust Control Panel.
TEM on-line help 154
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Note: AutoAdjust only works with the default CCD camera controller (TIA). TIA must therefore be
running before AutoAdjust functionality is enabled.
Focus
When the Focus button is pressed, the AutoFocus procedure is started when the button is gray. When
the procedure is already running (the button is yellow), the procedure is canceled.
Δf
The AutoFocus procedures measures the current defocus (with or without astigmatism). Once the
procedure is finished, it will set the defocus to the user-defined value entered in the edit control.
Note: There are three separate user-defined defocus values, one for LM, one for HM imaging
(Microprobe) and one for Nanoprobe. The software will keep these separate. The value you enter is only
for the currently active mode. The value will be changed automatically to the relevant one if the mode is
switched.
Include stigmator
The AutoFocus procedure can be run with or without measurement and correction of astigmatism. The
procedure without astigmatism is faster than the procedure with, because fewer measurements must be
made. Note that the defocus measurement may be in error if astigmatism is present. It is advised to
include stigmation at the start of a microscope session or, thereafter, when the microscope is switched to
a different mode (in this case only LM or HM are relevant; Nanoprobe has the same stigmation as HM
image).
Tune
When the Tune button is pressed, the tuning procedure selected in the drop-down list is started when the
button is gray. When the procedure is already running (the button is yellow), the procedure is canceled.
TEM on-line help 155
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Status
The Status field shows information about the currently active procedure, feedback on possible failures,
and instructions to be carried out.
Next
When the user must carry out some instruction (as given in the Status field), the Next button becomes
enabled. Press the Next button to continue (after having carried out the instructions) or the Focus or
Tune button to cancel further execution.
Undo
When the last action performed by AutoAdjust (the Undo button will be enabled after finishing a
procedure) does not produce satisfactory results, you can go back to the starting position by pressing the
Undo button. Generally only one action will be undone (so if you perform focus after eucentric height, it
will only undo focus), except when the combined procedure (All) has been done, in which case all
actions performed successfully in the combined procedure will be undone.
Del Images
In TIA a number of images are created by AutoAdjust. These images are called Image 1 to5 plus another
image that can have various names, such as Cross-correlation. These images are necessary during
execution of an AutoAdjust procedure. After that, you may want these images removed, which is what
happens when you press the Del Images button.
Flap-out
The flap-out button leads to the Settings and Calibrate tabs of the AutoAdjust Control Panel.
TEM on-line help 156
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Calibrate
Pressing the calibrate button starts the calibration procedure selected in the drop-down list, if the button
is gray. If a procedure is already running (the button is yellow), the procedure is canceled. Calibrations
must be done in the proper sequence and if a procedure is selected that is not yet possible (because
calibrations higher up in the hierarchy have not been done), the list will jump back to the lowermost
procedure possible.
Calibration selection
The drop-down list allows selection of one of the calibration procedures.
Calibration status
The Status field shows information about the currently active procedure, feedback on possible failures,
and instructions to be carried out.
Next
When the user must carry out some instruction (as given in the Status field), the Next button becomes
enabled. Press the Next button to continue (after having carried out the instructions) or the Calibrate
button to cancel further execution.
10.3.1 Calibrations
Calibrations have a set hierarchy (some calibrations can only be done once others have been done).
They are specific to a number of conditions :
• CCD camera used in combination with the microscope lens series (Normal or EFTEM)
• High tension
• Microscope mode (LM, Microprobe, Nanoprobe, Lorentz)
For the microscope modes, only the Nanoprobe mode does not require full calibrations. For that mode
only the Focus/Stigmator calibration must be done separately (the rest of the calibrations if the same as
in the Microprobe mode).
Calibrations can only be done by TEM Experts (private calibrations for these users) and Supervisor,
Service or Factory (dependent on availability, the se calibrations are what basic microscope Users get.
Calibration is done on the basis of a standard specimen, a cross-grating. This specimen has squares on
it with a spacing of 463 nm.
TEM on-line help 157
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Magnification calibration
The software will acquire an image of the cross-grating and analyse that to find the basic spacing. The
analysis is done using an auto-correlation (at high magnifications) or an FFT (at low magnifications) in
which the two basic vectors will be outlined by circles.
Image-shift calibration
The image-shift calibration procedure performs a calibration of the image shift on the CCD. This
calibration must be done for all magnifications in the required range (up to magnifications of ~150kx).
Normally the whole range is calibrated in one procedure, but it also possible to (re)calibrate the image
shift for an individual magnification (e.g. when it appears that the calibration in the complete procedure
went wrong for one magnification, that magnification can be redone later).
TEM on-line help 158
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Note: At low magnifications the grid bars may come into the field of view. The software will
remove the grid bars from the images and replace them with random noise. This greatly
improves the success rate of the shift measurement (especially if features like the central "A" in
the cross-grating or large holes in the foil are in the field of view).
Stage calibration
The stage calibration calibrates the stage x and y shifts. This calibration is needed for consistency
checks of the eucentric height procedure.
See the note above on the removal of grid bars.
Stigmator alignment
The stigmator alignment ensures that image shifts caused by changes of the stigmator (objective in HM
image and Nanoprobe; diffraction in LM image) are minimised. This procedure performs the same as the
stigmator alignment procedures themselves (in the Alignment Control Panel) except in AutoAdjust the
alignment is done automatically. It should be noted that the focus/stigmator calibration is dependent on
this alignment and a change in the alignment will interfere with proper operation of the AutoAdjust
functions.
Focus/Stigmator calibration
The focus/stigmator calibration procedure performs the calibration of beam tilt, focus/stigmator and
image shift. Once this calibration has been done, the focus/procedure can be run for any magnification
that is smaller than ~150kx (above the beam-tilt induced image-shift method doesn't work anymore
because random fluctuations of image position start to play an important role and interfere too much with
the focus/astigmatism measurement).
TEM on-line help 159
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
11.1 Introduction
The TrueImage™ suite of software provides the tools for the PAL-MAL focus series reconstruction of
HRTEM images. The software consists of two parts, one for the acquisition and the other for the
reconstruction. The acquisition on the TEM microscope is covered by the Focus series acquisition
automated experiment. This software is the only reliable way for acquiring HRTEM through-focus series
wherein the focus steps are kept the same throughout the series.
Active
When the Active button is pressed the Automated Experiment currently selected is switched on (the
button becomes yellow) or off. DigitalMicrograph must be running before the Focus Series Acquisition
experiment can be activated.
Euc Height
Not available in Focus series acquisition.
Auto Focus
Not available in Focus series acquisition
Start
When the Start button is pressed, the function currently selected is started. The button remains yellow
during execution of the function selected. When the button is pressed again while it is yellow, further
execution of the current function is canceled.
Next
During some procedures, the user must set some conditions (specimen area, illumination, etc.) on the
microscope, then press the Next button for the procedure to continue.
TEM on-line help 160
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Define File
When the Define File button is pressed, the software brings up the standard Save File dialog in which
you select a folder and file name for the focus series data. The images are saved in separate files, with
the file name followed by an underscore ( _ ) and then a three-digit number (001, 002, etc.; for example
test_001.ebn). If you collect another series without changing the file name, the second series is saved
under the file name followed by an underscore, then a serial number (e.g. 02) followed again by the
underscore and then the three-digit number (for example test_02_001.ebn).
Experiment
The Experiment drop-down list contains a list of all experiments available on the system. Select the
experiment required and press Active to get started.
Function
For Focus series acquisition the only function currently available is Acquire series.
Instructions
The instructions field will display instructions on how to proceed or a status description of the function
currently running or finished.
Flap-out button
The flap-out button leads to the Settings tabs of the Automated Experiments Control Panel.
Each Automated Experiment will typically have a number of associated functions, each of which will
have its own settings. The settings are controlled on the Settings tab of the Automated Experiments
Control Panel.
Settings list
From the drop-down list, a function can be selected, whose settings will then be listed in the property
editor underneath. The settings list for tomography contains the following:
Acquisition parameters
Reconstruction parameters
Settings
The settings are displayed in a so-called property editor. This is a two-column grid, listing the setting on
the left-hand side and its value on the right-hand side. The settings in the property editor are sorted
alphabetically. You can change the settings by clicking on the value. Sometimes you have to type in a
TEM on-line help 161
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
number or other setting. In the case where a limited selection is possible (for example with the boolean
operators true or false) a small down arrow on the right-side allows selection of the one of the
possibilities. Setting changes are updated as soon as you move to another setting value (e.g. by
pressing the down or up arrow). If the new setting is not allowed, it will be switched back to a proper
value.
Tip: To change the settings for the function selected back to their default values, click on the property
editor with the right-hand mouse button and select Reset to defaults in the popup menu. All settings of
the current set will be restored to their software default values.
Note: The property editor does not allow having some properties as read-only, but the Focus series
acquisition has several such values that are either used for information display or which definition is
restricted to some users. In practice this means that the value can be changed, but it will jump back to its
original value.
11.4 Settings
Below is given a description of the groups of settings used for Focus series acquisition and their
meaning.
When you change values, the software will do check on suitable values and if necessary, adjust the
values. Note that you can change the values even when no experiment is currently active, but you will
not see any update if the values you entered were incorrect. The update in the user interface is only
done when the experiment is active.
Check Drift Before Drift can spoil the reconstruction of a focus series because there is not enough
overlap area between the first and last images. When the Check Drift Before
option is switched on (true), the software will check the drift before acquiring the
series, by recording two images with about 30 seconds between them and
measuring the shift. When the drift exceeds a certain value, dependent on an
estimate of the time needed to acquire the focus series, a warning is given and
you can cancel further acquisition. Otherwise the value of the drift measured is
given.
Data Path The path where the data will be stored. Define this path through the Define File
function on the main control panel.
Exposure Time The exposure time (in seconds) used for the acquisition of the focus series
images.
Filename The filename under which the data will be stored. Define this name through the
Define File function on the main control panel. If the name has already been
used in the same session, the software will automatically use the same name
but with an additional serial number (02, 03, ..) to avoid overwriting the
previously acquired focus series.
TEM on-line help 162
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
File Type Images from the tomography tilt series can be saved as native server format
(either DigitalMicrograph or TIA), as one of a series of binary formats, or both. In
the latter case each image is saved in binary and native server format. Note that
for TrueImage reconstruction the file format must be one of the binary formats,
with the extended binary advised.
Focus Increment The true minimum focus step on the microscope, corresponding to a single step
of the finest DAC available. This value is as currently set as calibration on the
microscope. This value is read-only (you can change it, but it will jump back to its
previous value).
Focus Step The number of focus increments you want to use as step between images.
Image Binning The binning value used for the acquisition of the focus series.
Image Height The height of the image in pixels for the acquisition of the tilt series. This number
is adjusted for the binning used, so that at binning 1 a value of 1024 pixels
becomes 512 at binning 2, etc. The only allowed values are 1024 or 2048. For a
2048x2048 camera both 2048 and 1024 are allowed. The latter can be binning 1
(center area of CCD) or binning 2.
Image Server A choice of DigitalMicrograph (DM) or TEM Imaging and Analysis (TIA).
Image Width The width of the image in pixels for the acquisition of the tilt series. This number
is adjusted for the binning used, so that at binning 1 a value of 1024 pixels
becomes 512 at binning 2, etc. The only allowed values are 1024 or 2048. For a
2048x2048 camera both 2048 and 1024 are allowed. The latter can be binning 1
(center area of CCD) or binning 2.
Last Image At A parameter used together with Start At Current Focus. If the latter is false, the
series acquisition will not start at the focus you have currently set, but instead it
will aim to have the last image of the series recorded at the value specified
(usually this would be the Lichte or Alpha Null focus). In order to estimate where
at which focus to start acquisition, the software assumes that the focus you have
currently set is at the Minimum Contrast setting (~0.4 * Scherzer focus). The
reason for using Minimum Contrast rather than any other value (such as 0
defocus) is that Minimum Contrast focus can be recognized reasonably well,
whereas any other defocus cannot.
Start At Current This parameter defines whether you want to start the series at the focus as you
Focus have it currently set or whether the software should aim at recording the last
image at the value specified for the last image (see Last Image At, above).
TEM on-line help 163
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
Astigmatism 2 and The values for two-fold and three-fold astigmatism. For future use.
3 X and Y
Focus Spread The values for the focus spread of the microscope. For future use. Value can
only be set by Supervisor, Service or Factory.
Reconstruction The effective reconstruction limit to be used for focus-series reconstruction. This
Limit value is one of the factors determining the Lichte focus. It is in nanometer units.
Lichte focus A value calculated by the software from the value for the reconstruction limit and
high tension on the microscope. Generally the focus series is aimed at ending at
the Lichte focus value. Reference: H. Lichte (1993) Ultramicroscopy 51, 15.
Alpha Null focus A value calculated by the software from the value for the reconstruction limit and
high tension on the microscope. The focus series can be aimed at ending at the
Alpha Null focus value. Reference: M.A. O'Keefe (2001) 59th Ann. Proc. MSA
916.
Semi Convergence The measure of the incidence angle, relevant for the spatial-coherence
envelope. For future use.
Spherical The value of the spherical aberration of the microscope's objective lens.
Aberration
TEM on-line help 164
Options Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan 1.1
double Astigmatism 2 Y
double Astigmatism 3 X
double Astigmatism 3 Y
double Camera type serial number
double Camera position (WA, MSC, GIF)
double Magnification
double Camera length
double STEM magnification
double Lens series
double Lorentz
double Spot size
double Microscope mode
double Objective lens value
three doubles Currently undefined
double Image shift X (m)
double Image shift Y (m)
double Image shift X (pixels)
double Image shift Y (pixels)
double Stage X (m)
double Stage Y (m)
double Stage Z (m)
double Stage A (rad)
double Stage B (rad)
double Image minimum level
double Image maximum level
double Image real (0) or reciprocal space
further doubles undefined
Many of the values stored in the extended header are used by the TrueImage reconstruction software as
a first guess to optimize the reconstructed wave function.
Please note: Some values have rather odd numbering. That is because prior usage determined that
certain values were fixed too low and the addition of more types dictated the necessity for numbers
below, while 0 is generally avoided. The 0 is typically an undefined number.
Many of the values stored in the extended header are used by the TrueImage reconstruction software as
a first guess to optimize the reconstructed wave function.
TEM help 1
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
1 TEM Scripting...................................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 4
1.1.1 Tem objects .............................................................................................................................. 4
1.1.1.1 The ‘Instrument’ object .................................................................................................. 4
1.1.1.2 The secondary microscope objects ............................................................................... 4
1.1.1.3 The utility objects ........................................................................................................... 4
1.1.2 TEM Scripting Features: ........................................................................................................... 4
1.1.2.1 Synchronous functions .................................................................................................. 4
1.1.2.2 Events ............................................................................................................................ 5
1.1.2.3 TEM constants ............................................................................................................... 5
1.1.2.4 TEM error codes ............................................................................................................ 5
1.2 A first example ............................................................................................................................. 5
1.3 A second example (using utility objects) ...................................................................................... 5
1.4 TEM modes .................................................................................................................................. 6
1.5 Remote Scripting.......................................................................................................................... 7
1.5.1 Specifying the microscope server............................................................................................. 7
1.5.2 Receiving events from a remote microscope server................................................................. 7
2 The TEM Object Model ....................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 The microscope objects ............................................................................................................... 9
2.2 Utility objects .............................................................................................................................. 10
3 The Instrument object........................................................................................................................ 11
4 The microscope objects .................................................................................................................... 13
5 The Gun object.................................................................................................................................. 14
5.1 Gun object constants ................................................................................................................. 14
5.1.1 Enum HTState ........................................................................................................................ 14
6 The InstrumentModeControl object ................................................................................................... 15
6.1 InstrumentModeControl object constants:.................................................................................. 15
6.1.1 Enum InstrumentMode: .......................................................................................................... 15
7 The Illumination object ...................................................................................................................... 16
7.1 Illumination object constants ...................................................................................................... 17
7.1.1 Enum IlluminationMode .......................................................................................................... 17
7.1.2 Enum CondenserMode (Titan only)........................................................................................ 17
7.1.3 Enum DarkFieldMode............................................................................................................. 18
7.1.4 Enum IlluminationNormalization ............................................................................................. 18
8 The Projection object......................................................................................................................... 19
8.1 Projection object constants ........................................................................................................ 22
8.1.1 Enum ProjectionMode ............................................................................................................ 22
8.1.2 Enum ProjectionSubMode...................................................................................................... 22
8.1.3 Enum LensProg...................................................................................................................... 22
8.1.4 Enum ProjectionDetectorShift ................................................................................................ 22
8.1.5 Enum ProjDetectorShiftMode ................................................................................................. 22
8.1.6 Enum ProjectionNormalization ............................................................................................... 23
9 The BlankerShutter object................................................................................................................. 24
10 The Vacuum object ........................................................................................................................... 25
10.1 Constants: .................................................................................................................................. 25
10.1.1 Enum VacuumStatus:............................................................................................................. 25
TEM help 2
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
1 TEM Scripting
The TEM scripting adapter enables communication between a script and the TEM microscope (Tecnai or
Titan).
To make use of TEM scripting, it is not necessary to have a deeper understanding of the internal
structure of the TEM software. The adapter's functionality should be understandable to somebody who is
able to use a TEM microscope.
Most scripting or programming languages (VBScript, JScript, Visual Basic, C++, Delphi, ...) are
supported. The examples you find in the various chapters of this help file use JScript syntax, but the help
also includes chapters that adress the peculiarities of other languages. You can also inspect the
example programs that are delivered with TEM scripting (the default installation directory is
tecnai\scripting or titan\scripting).
1.1 Introduction
The TEM Scripting adapter supports its clients (in other words: your scripts) with a number of software
objects that correspond to the various parts of the microscope. These objects are the main components
of the adapter. The adapter further provides some other features such as User Button events and TEM
constants for convenience.
Please note: Because of the introduction of the Titan microscope, the TEM scripting object (previously
called "Tecnai") has become more generic : it is now called TEMScripting. Because of this change you
may have to recompile any existing code. Functions previously present have not changed.
1.1.2.2 Events
The adapter supports the usage of the six User Buttons L1..L3, R1..R3 (on the TEM control pads) and
can, if desired, generate events when they are pressed. These events can be handled by the script.
Thus a user can interact with the script via the control pads of the microscope.
Please note: Because of the introduction of the Titan microscope, the TEM scripting object (previously
called "Tecnai") has become more generic : it is now called TEMScripting.
Proj.MagnificationIndex = Proj.MagnificationIndex + 1
is essentially the same as increasing the magnification by turning the button on the TEM control pad by
one click clockwise.
Suppose we want to shift the image in x-direction to +500nm, leaving the y-position at 0:
The first statement creates a ‘Vector’ object that is already initialized with the desired the image shift.
(Since the ‘Vector’ object is TEM-specific, its creation is also handled by the main ‘Instrument’ object.)
The second line uses the ‘Vector’ to set the image shift. The described way of creating a utility object
currently only seems to work in JScript.
Alternatively, if you read the image shift you will of course also get a ‘Vector’ returned:
Note that setting the image shift x (changing the value of MyImageShift.X alone) to a different value does
not do anything on the microscope itself. You have to set the modified vector as a whole back (in other
words, in the previous example it is the third line of code that does it).
Certain microscope parameters such as the intensity setting, the focus value, the spotsize, etc., are
dependent on the optical "mode" of the microscope. A "mode" is characterized by a specific setting of
the lenses that interact to form the image and the beam. As such, the optical mode is determined by the
following parameters that you probably know from working with the microscope:
• the probe setting (microprobe/nanoprobe)
• the projector mode (diffraction/imaging)
• the range of magnification or diffraction (LM, Mi, SA, Mh, LAD, D)
• the lens program (Regular or EFTEM)
• the high tension range (there are three ranges named high, medium and low for microscopes with
maximum high tension greater or equal than 200kV)
Some parameters of the optical system change on a transition between modes (i.e., internally, they exist
‘per mode’). For example, when you switch from low LM to Mi magnification, the focus setting will
change. It will return to its old ‘LM-value’, if you lower the magnification again. Such parameters are
called ‘mode dependent’.
The same will happen with the corresponding properties of the TEM scripting adapter's microscope
objects. If you change a mode dependent property, this will only affect the current mode and thus will not
affect its values in the other modes. Only the values of the active mode can be accessed and,
consequently, switching between modes changes the exposed values of properties.
TEM help 7
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
The adapter objects that possess such mode dependent properties are of course the ones that have
something to do with lens settings, i.e. the ‘Illumination’ and the ‘Projection’ objects.
In order to be able to install the TEM Scripting adapter you have to install the regular TEM software on
the same PC (many of the regular software files are used during the registration of the scripting adapter
and without proper registration the software will not run). You can install the regular software on two
ways:
1. Use the TEM software CD-ROM to install the software. In this case the software itself is not switched
to simulation and cannot be run (it expects the hardware to be present).
2. Request a simulation CD-ROM from FEI (contact Dr. Max T. Otten, FEI Electron Optics, P.O.Box
80066, 5600 KA Eindhoven, The Netherlands, Tel. +31-40-2356655, Fax +31-40-2356550, e-mail
max.otten@fei.com). In this case the software will run in simulation, which allows you to test your
script. Please specify the type of microscope you need the simulation for.
From now on, every application that uses TEM Scripting will connect to the remote microscope server. If
you have a microscope server installed on your local machine as well, and you want to make contact to
the latter again, then you have to set the name of the server in the registry value "RemoteHost" in the
registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FEI\Scripting to an empty string or delete the whole
key again.
allow it, you have to call a function named 'CoInitializeSecurity'. This function call has to be made, before
COM does this itself underwater, because this function can only be called once per application. Since
the details of how and when to call 'CoInitializeSecurity' has to be called are language dependent, we
refer here to the chapter 'Scripting in various languages'.
Applications that rely on a browser to run (for example scripts written in JScript or VBScript, or ActiveX
components written in any language), cannot do that. They will probably work anyway (because we are
able to handle security issues from the microscope server side in this case). Workaround: if 'temserver'
service and remote application run under the same user account, then there is no problem. You would
have to create a special account for remoting.
TEM help 9
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Instrument
Gun
InstrumentModeControl
Illumination
Projection
BlankerShutter
Vacuum
Stage
AutoLoader
TemperatureControl
(Plate) Camera
Acquisition
UserButtons
TEM help 10
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Vector
SizeLong
SizeDouble
StagePosition
Gauge
TEM help 11
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Property Description
AutoNormalizeEnabled [Boolean], read/write
Enables/disables the automatic normalization procedures performed by
the TEM microscope. Normally they are active, but for scripting it can be
convenient to disable them temporarily.
Gun [Object]
Interface to the gun deflection and high tension functionality.
InstrumentModeControl [Object]
Interface to the instrument control functions that allow checking whether
the microscope has STEM and, if so, switch between TEM and STEM
modes.
Illumination [Object]
Interface to the ‘Illumination’ system that comprises the condenser lenses,
the mini condenser lens, the beam deflection coils and the condenser
stigmator. Responsible for beam (or ‘probe’) properties.
Projection [Object]
Interface to the part of the instrument that forms the image, comprising the
objective, diffraction and projection lenses, the corresponding stigmators
and the image deflectors.
BlankerShutter [Object]
Interface to the BlankerShutter ShutterOverrideOn property.
Vacuum [Object]
Int
erface to the vacuum system.
Stage [Object]
Interface to the stage / goniometer functions.
AutoLoader [Object]
Interface to the Autoloader.
TemperatureControl [Object]
Interface to the temperature controlller.
Camera [Object]
Interface to the camera module. Also gives access to control of the
fluorescent screens.
Acquisition [Object]
Interface to the acquisition of CCD and STEM images.
UserButtons [Collection of UserButton objects]
UserButtons interface to the user buttons L1..L3, R1..R3 of the TEM hand
panels.
TEM help 12
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Methods Description
NormalizeAll() [Void]
Normalizes all lenses. To normalize portions of the microscope, refer to
the subsystems.
TEM help 13
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
gives you an instance of the ‘Projection’ object (supposing your ‘Instrument’ is named ‘MyTem’).
Object Description
Gun Interfaces to the functionality of the gun and the high tension.
InstrumentControlMode Interfaces to the TEM/STEM switch
Illu mination Interfaces to the illumination system that forms and manipulates the beam
Projection Interfaces to the imaging system
BlankerShutter Interface for the shutter override function
Vacuum Interfaces to the vacuum system
Stage Interfaces to stage and specimen holder
AutoLoader Interfaces to the Autoloader
TemperatureControl Interfaces to the temperature controller
Camera Interfaces to the plate camera and the fluorescent screens
Acquisition Interfaces to the CCD and STEM acquisition
UserButton(s) Interface(s) to the user button(s), can receive events
TEM help 14
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Property Description
Tilt [Vector], read/write
The gun tilt alignment values. Range from -1.0 to +1.0 in x and y
directions (logical units). The beamblanker changes the gun tilt. Therefore
changing the gun tilt alignment is blocked as long as the beamblanker is
active.
Shift [Vector], read/write
The gunshift alignment values. Range from -1.0 to +1.0 in x and y
directions (logical units).
HTState [HTState], read/write
The state of the high tension. (The high tension can be on, off or
disabled). Disabling/enabling can only be done via the button on the
system on/off-panel, not via script. When switching on the high tension,
this function cannot check if and when the set high tension value is
actually reached.
Value Description
htOff The high tension is off
htOn The high tension is on
htDisabled The high tension is disabled, cannot be switched on by software command
TEM help 15
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Property Description
StemAvailable [Boolean], read only
Returns whether themicroscope has a STEM system or not.
InstrumentMode [InstrumentMode], read/write
Switches between TEM and STEM modes.
Value Description
InstrumentMode_TEM TEM mode
InstrumentMode_STEM STEM mode
TEM help 16
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Note that the illumination system is independent of the projection system and thus insensitive to
diffraction or imaging mode; hence the mixture of diffraction and imaging submodes. If a transition
between two of these three modes occurs, then the properties will seem to have changed their values,
which reflects their existence per mode.
Property Description
mode independent
Mode [IlluminationMode], read/write
Mode of the illumination system (either nanoprobe or microprobe).
(Nearly) no effect for low magnifications (LM).
DFMode [DarkFieldMode], read/write
Holds information about whether microscope is in dark field mode and if
so, which coordinates are used.
BeamBlanked [Boolean], read/write
Activates/deactivates the beamblanker.
mode dependent
CondenserStigmator [Vector], read/write
The condenser stigmator setting. Units: logical, range: -1.0 to +1.0.
SpotsizeIndex [Long], read/write
The spot size index (usually ranging from 1 to 11).
Intensity [Double], read/write
Intensity value of the current mode (typically ranging from 0 to 1.0, but on
some microscopes the minimum may be higher.)
IntensityZoomEnabled [Boolean], read/write
Activates/deactivates the intensity zoom in the current mode. This function
only works, when it has been initialized by means of the microscope
alignments (it needs to know at which intensity setting the spot is
focused).
IntensityLimitEnabled [Boolean], read/write
Activates/deactivates the intensity limit in the current mode. This function
only works, when it has been initialized by means of the microscope
alignments (it needs to know at which intensity setting the spot is
focused).
Shift [Vector], read/write
Beam shift relative to the origin stored at alignment time. Units: meters.
Tilt [Vector], read/write
Dark field beam tilt relative to the origin stored at alignment time. Only
operational, if dark field mode is active. Units: radians, either in Cartesian
(x,y) or polar (conical) tilt angles. The accuracy of the beam tilt physical
units depends on a calibration of the tilt angles.
Corresponds to the alignment beam tilt value. Units are radians, range is ±
0.2-0.3rad. Do not confuse RotationCenter with dark field (Tilt). Be aware
that this is an alignment function.
Property Description
CondenserMode [CondenserMode] read/write
Mode of the illumination system, parallel or probe.
IlluminatedArea [Double] read/write
The size of the illuminated area (in meters). Accessible only in Parallel
mode.
ProbeDefocus [Double] read/write
The amount of probe defocus (in meters). Accessible only in Probe mode.
ConvergenceAngle [Double] read/write
The convergence angle (in radians). Accessible only in Probe mode.
Method Description
Normalize [Void]
([in] Normalizes the condenser lenses and/or the minicondenser lens,
IlluminationNormalization dependent on the choice of ‘Norm’.
Norm)
Value Description
imMicroprobe Microprobe mode
imNanoprobe Nanoprobe mode
Value Description
imParallelIllumination Parallel illumination mode
imProbeIllumination Probe illumination mode
TEM help 18
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Value Description
dfOff microscope is in bright field mode
dfCartesian dark field mode, beam tilt angles are given in x and y tilt directions
dfConical dark field mode, beam tilt angles are given as radial tilt and rotation angles
Value Description
nmSpotsize normalize lens C1 (spotsize)
nmIntensity normalize lens C2 (intensity) + C3
nmCondenser normalize C1 + C2 + C3
nmMiniCondenser normalize the minicondenser lens
nmObjectivePole normalize minicondenser and objective
nmAll normalize C1, C2, C3, minicondenser + objective
TEM help 19
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Type B differentiates between 2 modes (irrespective, of whether microscope is switched into diffraction
or imaging):
• low ‘magnification’ (LM, LAD)
• higher ‘magnification’ (Mi...Mh, D)
If a transition between modes occurs, then the properties will seem to have changed their values, which
reflects their existence per mode.
Property Description
mode independent
Mode [ProjectionMode], read/write
Main mode of the projection system (either imaging or diffraction).
SubMode [ProjectionSubMode], read only
Submode of the projection system (either LM, Mi, ..., LAD or D). The
imaging submode can change, when the magnification is changed.
SubModeString [String], read only
Submode of the projection system, given as a string. To be used as
alternative to ‘SubMode’.
LensProgram [LensProg], read/write
The lens program setting (currently EFTEM or Regular). This is the third
property to characterize a mode of the projection system.
TEM help 20
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Method Description
ResetDefocus() [Void]
Resets the current ‘Defocus’ to 0 nm. This does not change the ‘Focus’
value (the focussing lens current). Use it when the image is properly
focussed to adjust the ‘Defocus’ scale.
ChangeProjectionIndex Changes the current Index by ‘Steps’.
([in] Long Steps)
Normalize ([in] [Void]
ProjectionNormalization Normalizes the objective lens or the projector lenses, dependent on the
Norm) choice of ‘Norm’.
TEM help 22
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Value Description
pmImaging Projector in imaging mode
pmDiffraction Projector in diffraction mode
Value Description
psmLM Imaging mode, low magnification
psmMi Imaging mode, lower intermediate magnification range
psmSA Imaging mode, high magnification
psmMh Imaging mode, highest magnification range
psmLAD Diffraction, LAD mode (the mode entered from LM imaging)
psmD Diffraction mode as entered from higher magnification imaging modes
Value Description
lpRegular The default lens program
lpEFTEM Lens program used for EFTEM (energy-filtered TEM)
Value Description
pdsOnAxis Does not shift the image/diffraction pattern
pdsNearAxis Shifts the image/diffraction pattern onto a near-axis detector/camera
pdsOffAxis Shifts the image/diffraction pattern onto an off-axis detector/camera
Value Description
pdsmAutoIgnore The 'DetectorShift' is set to zero, when the fluorescent screen moves
down. When it moves up again, what happens depends on what detector
TEM thinks is currently selected. Take care!.
pdsmManual The detectorshift is applied as it is chosen in the 'DetectorShift'-property
pdsmAlignment The detector shift is (temporarily) controlled by an active alignment
procedure. Clients cannot set this value. Clients cannot set the
'DetectorShiftMode' to another value either, if this is the current value.
They have to wait until the alignment is finished.
TEM help 23
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Value Description
pnmObjective Normalize objective lens
pnmProjector Normalize Diffraction, Intermediate, P1 and P2 lenses
pnmAll Normalize objective, diffraction, intermediate, P1 and P2 lenses
TEM help 24
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Property Description
ShutterOverrideOn [Boolean], read/write
Determines the state of the shutter override function.
WARNING: Do not leave the Shutter override on when stopping the script. The microscope
operator will be unable to have a beam come down and has no separate way of seeing that it is
blocked by the closed microscope shutter.
Suggested procedure:
1. Blank the beam using the BeamBlanked property of the Illumination object.
2. Switch the shutter override on.
3. If necessary, wait for a short delay (one second) to allow the system to execute the shuttering.
4. Unblank the beam (the CCD no longer has control).
5. Wait for the time necessary to burn off the ice (sleep, Windows timer, ...)
6. Blank the beam.
7. Switch the shutter override off.
8. If necessary, wait for a short delay (one second) to allow the system to switch the shuttering back to
normal.
9. Unblank the beam (the CCD now has control again).
TEM help 25
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Property Description
Status [VacuumStatus], read only
Status of the vacuum system (see below).
ColumnValvesOpen [WordBool], read/write
The status of the column valves.
PVPRunning [WordBool], read only
Checks whether the prevacuum pump is currently running (consequences:
vibrations, exposure function blocked or should not be called).
Gauges Collection of gauge objects, giving information about the actual pressures.
Method Description
RunBufferCycle() [Void]
Runs a pumping cycle to empty the buffer. This function may take quite
some time, so be careful when using it in a single-threaded application
with user interface. (The program appears to be hanging while it waits for
the function to return.)
10.1 Constants:
Value Description
vsUnknown Status of vacuum system is unknown
vsOff Vac uum system is off
vsCameraAir Camera (only) is aired
vsBusy Vacuum system is busy, that is: on its way to ‘Ready’, ‘CameraAir’, etc.
vsReady Vacuum system is ready
vsElse Vacuum is in any other state (gun air, all air etc.), and will not come back
to ready without any further action of the user
TEM help 26
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Property Description
Status [StageStatus], read only
The current state of the stage. Check this to determine the whether the
stage is ready to perform a ‘GoTo’ or a ‘MoveTo’.
Position [StagePosition], read only
The current position of the stage. (Changing the position can be done in
various ways. Use the ‘GoTo’ and ‘MoveTo’ Methods described below.)
Holder [StageHolderType], read only
The current specimen holder type.
AxisData ([in] mask StageAxes)
[StageAxisData], read only
Interface to a StageAxisData object that contains the minimum and
maximum values available for the particular axis.
Method Description
GoTo [Void]
([in] StagePosition Makes the holder move to the position given by ‘NewPosition’.
NewPosition, ‘AxesBits’ contains information about which axes are to be used to
[in] StageAxis AxesBits) perform the movement. This is useful to suppress unnecessary
movements of the holder due to fluctuations in position measurement.
Also, you do not have to bother to give the correct parameters for axes-
settings that you do not want to change. (In Delphi, this function is
automatically renamed to GoTo_, because GoTo is a reserved keyword.)
MoveTo [Void]
([in] StagePosition Makes the holder move in a way that all possible positions can be reached
NewPosition, without touching the objective pole. Actually, the following sequence of
[in] StageAxis AxesBits) movements is performed (a, b denote alpha and beta tilts, x,y,z the x,y
and height positions, large letters the new position):
Property Description
MinPos [Double], read only
The lowermost value of the stage position allowed on the axis.
MaxPos [Double], read only
The uppermost value of the stage position allowed on the axis.
UnitType [MeasurementUnitType], read only
The unit (meters or radians) of the MinPos and MaxPos values
Methods Description
stReady The stage is ready (capable to perform all position management functions)
stDisabled The stage has been disabled either by the user or due to an error.
stNotReady The stage is not (yet) ready to perform position management functions for
reasons other than already accounted for by the other constants
stGoing The stage is performing a ‘GoTo()’
stMoving The stage is performing a ‘MoveTo()’
stWobbling The stage is wobbling
Value Description
axisX (= 1) Use X-axis
axisY (= 2) Use Y-axis
axisXY (= 3) Use X- and Y-axis
axisZ (= 4) Use Z-axis
axisA (= 8) Use alpha tilt-axis
axisB (=16) Use B-axis, usually the beta tilt, but on Dual-Axis Tomography holders this
is the second (rotation or flip-flop) axis.
TEM help 28
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Value Description
hoInvalid The ‘invalid’ holder. No holder has been selected yet or the current
selection has become invalid
hoSingleTilt Single tilt holder
hoDoubleTilt Double tilt holder
hoNone Holder is removed
hoPolara Non-removable Polara holder
hoDualAxis Dual-axis tomography holder
Value Description
MeasurementUnitType_Unknown Unknown unit type
MeasurementUnitType_Meters Unit type is meters (linear axes)
MeasurementUnitType_Radians Unit type is radians (tilt axes)
TEM help 29
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Property Description
AutoLoaderAvailable [Boolean], read only
Returns whether the AutoLoader is available on the microscope.
Numb erOfCassetteSlots [Long], read only
The number of cassette slots in a cartridge.
SlotStatus [CassetteSlotStatus], read only
([in] slot Long) The status of the slot specified.
Method Description
LoadCartridge Loads the cartride in the given slot into the microscope.
([in] fromSlot Long)
UnloadCartridge() [Void]
Unloads the cartridge currently in the microscope and puts it back into its
slot in the cassette.
PerformCassetteInventory() [Void]
Performs an inventory of the cassette (determines which slots are empty
or occupied).
Value Description
CassetteSlotStatus_Unknown Cassette slot status has not been determined
CassetteSlotStatus_Occupied Cassette slot contains a cartridge
CassetteSlotStatus_Empty Cassette slot is empty
CassetteSlotStatus_Error Cassette slot generated an error
TEM help 30
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Property Description
TemperatureControlAvailable [Boolean], read only
Returns whether the Temperature controller is available on the
microscope.
Method Description
ForceRefill [Void]
Forces a refill of the refrigerant.
Notes:
1. This function takes considerable time to execute.
2. If the refrigerant level in the dewar specified is above 70% then
ForceRefill will not do anything and return almost immediately.
Value Description
RefrigerantLevel_AutoLoaderDewar The dewar of the AutoLoader
RefrigerantLevel_ColumnDewar The dewar on the microscope column
RefrigerantLevel_HeliumDewar The liquid-Helium dewar
TEM help 31
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Property Description
MainScreen [ScreenPosition], read/write
The position of the main screen. Setting the main screen to the
upward position also moves the small screen up (out).
IsSmallScreenDown [Boolean], read only
The Position of the small screen. It cannot be moved down (in) by
a software command. It moves up (out) with the main screen.
Stock [Long], read only
The number of plates still on stock.
MeasuredExposureTime [Double], read only
The measured exposure time (identical to the time displayed in
the UI, given in seconds).
ManualExposureTime [Double], read/write
The time setting used for ‘manual exposures’, in seconds.
ManualExposure [Boolean], read/write
Flag that specifies whether ‘ManualExposureTime’ time will be the
time used for an exposure (if set to "true") or the automatic time (if
set to "false").
FilmText [String], read/write
The text printed on the next exposure(s). Maximum 96 characters
are accepted. If the string is longer, it is truncated.
ExposureNumber [Long], read/write
Contains the sum of a five digit Long (accounting for a five digit
image number) and 100000 times the ASCII code of one of the
following characters: 0 to 9, A to Z (accounting for the first number
or identifier). Use integer division and modulo to separate these
components. Setting of of this property may be blocked by a
supervisor.
UserCode [String], read/write
A three-letter usercode that will be shown on the plate exposure.
PlateLabelDateType [PlateLabelDateFormat], read/write
Specifies whether the date is shown on the plate exposure and
which format will be used.
ScreenDimText [String], read/write
The text shown on the screen when it is dimmed. The string may
contain carriage return - linefeeds to distribute text over the three
lines that are available for screendim text.
ScreenDim [Boolean], read/write
Dims/undims the screen of the computer on which the TEM server
is running (for example useful during exposures).
ScreenCurrent [Double], read only
The current measured on the fluorescent screen (units: Amperes).
TEM help 32
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Method Description
TakeExposure() [Void]
Triggers a single plate exposure, using the actually selected time
type. The function will start the same process as does the
exposure button on the control pad. For example, if necessary it
will move the screen up, make the exposure and move the screen
down again.
Value Description
spUnknown Position of main screen is not known, for example during
movement
spUp Main screen is up (in which case the small screen will also be up)
spDown Main screen is down
Value Description
dtNoDate No date is displayed
dtDDMMYY The date is displayed as day-month-year (two numbers for each),
separated by hyphens
dtMMDDYY The date is displayed as month/day/year, separated by slashes
dtYYMMDD The date is displayed as year.month.day, separated by periods
TEM help 33
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Notes:
• In order for acquisition to be available TIA (TEM Imaging and Acquisition) must be running
(even if you are using DigitalMicrograph as the CCD server).
• If it is necessary to update the acquisition object (e.g. when the STEM detector selection on
the TEM UI has been changed), you have to release and recreate the main microscope object.
If you do not do so, you keep accessing the same acquisition object which will not work
properly anymore.
Acquisition
Detector ...
AcqParams
The Acquisition object exposes the CCDCameras and STEMDetectors together with a number of
general methods.
The main entry point to the acquisition functionality is the Acquisition interface. From this interface, it is
possible to query all available (i.e. installed on the system) acquisition devices: CCD cameras and STEM
detectors. For each of these devices it is possible to retrieve an information object, which tells something
about (hardware) parameters of the device, for instance, the dimensions of the CCD chip (in pixels).
For each of the CCD cameras, an acquisition parameters object can be retrieved to change the default
acquisition settings (i.e. exposure time). In contrast, the STEM acquisition parameters are not device-
specific but instead apply to all detectors.
TEM help 34
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
In order to acquire an image from an acquisition device (CCD or STEM detector), the following steps
need to be taken:
• TIA (TEM Imaging and Acquisition) application must be running.
• Get the Acquisition object from the main instrument interface of the Standard Scripting component.
• Query available CCD cameras and STEM detectors, looking for the device from which you would like
to acquire an image. Note: in the current version of Standard Scripting only devices which are
selected in the Microscope User Interface will be available in the query. In future versions of the
Standard Scripting we envision the possibility to query and select any acquisition device available in
the system, without the need for human interaction with the Microscope User Interface. The software
interfaces of the Acquisition objects are already prepared for such extensions.
• Add the queried acquisition device to the list of devices in the Acquisition object. Internally, the
Acquisition object maintains a list of acquisition devices on which is has to perform image acquisition
when AcquireImages() method is called. You can manipulate this list of devices through Acquisition
object interface.
• Acquire images by calling AcquireImages() method on the Acquisition object. The method will
acquire the images from all the devices currently found in its internal list of acquisition devices
(acquisition is performed sequentially). When acquisition is finished, the method returns an array of
acquired images.
• Each of the acquired images has a name property which returns the device name the image was
acquired from. The actual image data can be retrieved as a safe-array from the Image object.
Property Description
Cameras [Object]
Interface to the CCD cameras.
Detectors [Object]
Interface to the STEM detectors.
Method Description
AddAcqDevice [Void]
([in] pDevice ) Adds an acquisition device to the list of active acquisition devices.
AddAcqDeviceByname [Void]
([in] deviceName String) Adds the acquisition device with the name specified to the list of active
acquisition devices.
RemoveAcqDevice([in] [Void]
pDevice) Removes the acquisition device from the list of active acquisition devices.
RemoveAcqDeviceByName [Void]
([in] deviceName String) Removes the acquisition device with the name specified from the list of
active acquisition devices.
RemoveAllAcqDevices [Void]
Clears the list of active acquisition devices.
AcquireImages [AcqImages]
Acquires the image or images using the currently set list of acquisition
devices and returns an interface to the image collection.
15.2 CCDCameras
CCDCameras contains all available CCD cameras on the microscope.
Note: In order for a camera to be "available" it must be selected in the microscope user interface.
Currently it is not possible to do this selection through scripting.
15.2.1 CCDCamera
Property Description
Info [Object]
Interface to the information on the CCD camera.
AcqParams [Object]
Interface to the acquisition parameters of the CCD camera.
TEM help 36
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
15.2.1.1 CCDCameraInfo
Property Description
Name [String], read only
A string with the name of the CCD as it appears in the
microscope's user interface.
Height [Long], read only
The height of the CCD camera in pixels.
Notes:
• Generally the binning values and exposure time are related (quadratically). If you increase the
binning from 1 to 4, you normally have to decrease the exposure time by 4² in order to prevent CCD
saturation. This relation does not exist for the Eagle CCD camera, which uses an optimised scheme
where the ratios are as given in the table below.
• The ShutterMode of the CCD camera refers to the shutter(s) being used. The availability of different
shutters is dependent on the type of CCD camera (e.g. SIS cameras have none, Gatan cameras
typically have pre- and post-specimen, the Eagle has pre- and post-specimen and can also use both
shutters simultaneously). The shutter mode is a global microscope setting, so if this is changed in
a script, you will see the change back in the TEM User Interface (CCD/TV General flap-out). Make
sure to retrieve the setting befor running a script and setting it back when closing down, so the user
is not confronted with unintended changes to the microscope settings.
15.2.1.2 CCDAcqParams
Property Description
ImageSize [AcqImageSize], read/write
The size of the image to be collected.
ExposureTime [Double], read/write
The exposure time in seconds.
Binning [Long], read/write
The binning value to be used for the image acquisition. Make sure
the value is one of the supported binning values.
ImageCorrection [AcqImageCorrection], read/write
The type of correction to be applied. Bias/gain correction can only
be applied if this has been done in the CCD server prior to
scripting.
ExposureMode [AcqExposureMode], read/write
The currently selected exposure mode of the CCD.
MinPreExposureTime [Double], read only
The minimum available pre-exposure time in seconds.
MaxPreExposureTime [Double], read only
The maximum available pre-exposure time in seconds.
MinPreExposurePauseTime [Double], read only
The minimum available pre-exposure pause time in seconds.
MaxPreExposurePauseTime [Double], read only
The maximum available pre-exposure time in seconds.
PreExposureTime [Double], read/write
The pre-exposure time in seconds.
PreExposurePauseTime [Double], read/write
The pre-exposure pause time in seconds.
Note: Pre-exposures can only be be done when the shutter mode is set to "Both". This is only available
for Eagle CCD cameras. When pre-exposure is used, the specimen is illuminated for the pre-exposure
time defined. The pre-exposure is done by opening the pre-specimen shutter while the post-specimen
shutter remains closed to prevent electrons from falling on the CCD. A pre-exposure may help to
stabilize specimens (e.g. when charging). When a pre-exposure pause is used, there is a delay (of the
defined pause time) inserted between the pre-exposure and the actual CCD exposure. During this delay
both shutters are closed.
The exposure mode is NOT a global microscope setting, so if this is changed in a script, you will NOT
see the change back in the TEM User Interface (CCD/TV General flap-out).
TEM help 38
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
15.3 STEMDetectors
STEMDetectors contains all available STEM detectors on the microscope.
15.3.1 STEMDetectors
Property Description
AcqParams [Object]
Interface to the acquisition parameters of the STEM detectors.
Acquisition parameters for STEM are generic and not bound to a
particular detector.
Note: In order for a detector to be "available" it must be selected in the microscope user
interface. Currently it is not possible to do this selection through scripting.
15.3.2 STEMDetector
Property Description
Info [Object]
Interface to the information on the STEM detector.
15.3.2.1 STEMDetectorInfo
Note: The maximum size of the unbinned STEM image is 2048² pixels.
Property Description
Name [String], read only
A string with the name of the STEM detector as it appears in the
microscope's user interface.
Brightness [Double], read/write
The brightness setting of the STEM detector.
Contrast [Double], read/write
The contrast setting of the STEM detector.
Binnings [SafeArray], read only
An array with the binning values supported by the STEM detector.
Technically speaking these are "pixel skipping" values, since in
STEM we do not combine pixels as a CCD does, but other than
that these values work the same way as in CCD acquisition (e.g.
half frame with binning 4 gives a 256² image on a 2k CCD as well
as on the STEM).
TEM help 39
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
15.3.2.2 STEMAcqParams
Property Description
ImageSize [AcqImageSize]
The size of the image to be collected.
DwellTime [Double]
The pixel dwell time in seconds. The frame time equals the dwell
time times the number of pixels plus some overhead (typically
20%, used for the line flyback).
Binning [Long]
The binning value to be used for the image acquisition. Make sure
the value is one of the supported binning values.
15.4 AcqImages
The AcqImages contains all images acquired (through the AcquireImages; it does not contain a backlist
of all previous recordings).
15.4.1 AcqImage
Property Description
Name [String], read only
The name of the detector (CCD camera or STEM detector) used
to acquire the image.
Width [Long], read only
The width (in pixels) of the image.
Height [Long], read only
The height (in pixels) of the image.
Depth [Long], read only
The maximum number of bits in the image. The image as
retrieved always has 16 bits, but the original - CCD - image may
have had less depth, dependent on the CCD camera used.
AsSafeArray [SafeArray] read only
A SafeArray with the pixel values (Long) of the image.
Value Description
AcqImageSize_Full Image size covers the whole CCD or STEM range
AcqImageSize_Half Image size covers half of the CCD or STEM range, centered
AcqImageSize_Quarter Image size covers one quarter of the CCD or STEM range,
centered
TEM help 40
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Property Description
AcqImageCorrection_Unprocessed CCD images are uncorrected
AcqImageCorrection_Default CCD images are bias- and gain-corrected
Property Description
AcqShutterMode_PreSpecimen The pre-specimen shutter (blanking before the specimen) is used)
AcqShutterMode_PostSpecimen The post-specimen shutter (blanking after the specimen) is used
AcqShutterMode_Both Both pre- and post-specimen shutters are used together
Property Description
AcqExposureMode_None Default setting
AcqExposureMode_Simultaneous The pre- and post-specimen shutter are used together
AcqExposureMode_PreExposure Same as previous but before the actual CCD exposure the
specimen is illuminated for the duration of the pre-exposure
time set
AcqExposureMode_PreExposurePause Same as previous but after the pre-exposure and before the
actual CCD exposure is a pause fro the duration of the pre-
exposure pause time set.
C++
Very important: Make sure the declaration for the image array is _variant_t, otherwise you run the risk
that C++ clears the data before you can access them. The code snippet below gives an example on how
you can access the pixels.
if (m_pCamServer) {
HRESULT hr = m_pCamServer->AcquireImages(&m_pAcquisition);
if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
int n = m_pAcquisition->Count;
if (n == 0)
ShowMessage(_T("No images here"));
else {
m_pAcqImage = m_pAcquisition->Item[0];
if (m_pAcqImage) {
int h = m_pAcqImage->get_Height();
int w = m_pAcqImage->get_Width();
TEM help 41
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
CComSafeArray<short> data;
data.Attach(img.Detach().parray);
ATL::CWindow pWindow = NULL;
pWindow = GetDlgItem(IDC_EDIT1);
CString txt,txt2;
txt = "";
for (int i = 0; i<25; i++){
short pixel = data[i];
txt2.Format(_T("%s,%i"),txt,pixel);
txt = txt2;
}
pWindow.SetWindowText(txt);
}
} else
ShowMessage(_T("Cannot acquire image(s)"));
}
TEM help 42
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
retrieves an object that represents -and references to- the user button L1 (supposing that ‘MyTem’ is an
instance of an ‘Instrument’ object).
Property Description
Name [String], read only
The name of the button (i.e. "L1", "L2", etc.).
Label [String], read only
The current label that is assigned to the button (not necessarily assigned
by your script)
Assignment [String], read/write
The script-assigned label of the button. Setting this property directs the
events generated by use of the button to the script. If the script has made
an assignment, then ‘Assignment’ will equal ‘Label’, if not temporarily
overwritten by somebody else, for example an alignment procedure. (In
that case, no events will be received.) Default value = "". Setting this
property to an empty string or a string consisting only of blanks (that would
be invisible in the UI) restores the situation that was there, before the
script took control over the button.
Event Description
Pressed() Event that is raised when the button is pressed.
TEM help 43
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
This code creates a TEM vector object MyVector that is initialized with (2.0,3.0).
Of course, reading a compound property, for example
will also return an instance of an utility object, in this case a vector containing the actual gun shift.
retrieves the latest pressure and status information for the vacuum buffer. (‘P1’ is the name of the
measurement device associated with the buffer, as you can see from the TEM vacuum overview. ) Note:
On the Tecnai pressures that are read out through IGPcurrents are also accessible through ‘virtual’
gauge-elements named ‘Pxx’, where xx represents a number. Currently the following assignments are
used on Tecnai: IGP1=P4; IGP2=P6, IGP4=P8. On the Titan the gauges have the same name as the
pump itself.
Property Description
Name [String], read only
Name of the gauge.
Status [GaugeStatus], read only
The status of the gauge. It is important for the interpretation of the
pressure values.
Pressure [Double], read only
Last measured pressure for this gauge. Units: Pascal
PressureLevel [GaugePressureLevel], read only
Indicates, in which range the pressure lies. Actions of the vacuum system
depend on this property.
TEM help 44
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Method Description
Read [Void]
Forces a read of the pressure level. Execute before retrieving the
pressure, otherwise the pressure may not be up-to-date.
Value Description
gsUndefined No information on the gauge available
gsUnderflow Underflow, pressure is lower than can be measured with this gauge, the
measurement is not interpretable
gsOverflow Overflow, pressure is higher than can be measured with this gauge, the
measurement is not interpretable
gsValid Valid, the pressure measurement is valid and interpretable
gsInvalid Invalid, the pressure measurement is invalid and not interpretable
Value Description
plGaugePressurelevelUndefined Gauge is not active
plGaugePressurelevelLow Lowest pressure range
plGaugePressurelevelLowMedium Low to medium pressure range
plGaugePressurelevelMediumHigh Medium to high pressure range
plGaugePressurelevelHigh Highest range
TEM help 45
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Property Description
X [Double], read/write
Position of X-axis, in meters.
Y [Double], read/write
Position of Y-axis, in meters.
Z [Double], read/write
Position of Z-axis, in meters.
A [Double], read/write
Position of A-axis (alpha-tilt), in radians
B [Double], read/write
Position of B-axis (beta-tilt), in radians
Method Description
GetAsArray [void]
([out] Double[5] Position) Returns the properties of the StagePosition as an array of 5 doubles. The
ordering is [X,Y,Z,A,B].
SetAsArray [void]
([in] Double[5] Position) Sets the properties of the StagePosition from an array of 5 doubles. The
ordering is [X,Y,Z,A,B].
The vector object must be used for tilt, shift, and stigmator properties. X and Y must then be given in the
appropriate units (ie radians, meters or logical).
Property Description
X [Double], read/write;
The x value.
Y [Double], read/write;
The y value.
TEM help 46
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
18 TEM constants
TEM-specific constants are defined in the following enumerations that are used by the objects in the
right column of the table:
enum object
AcqImageCorrection CCDAcqParams object
AcqImageSize CCDAcqParams object,
STEMAcqParams object
CassetteSlotStatus AutoLoader object
DarkFieldMode Illumination object
GaugeStatus Gauge object
GaugePressureLevel Gauge object
HightensionState Gun object
IlluminationMode Illumination object
IlluminationNormalization Illumination object
InstrumentMode InstrumentModeControl object
LensProg Projection object
MeasurementUnitType StageAxisData object
MinicondenserMode Illumination object
PlateLabelDateFormat Camera object
ProjDetectorShiftMode Projection object
ProjectionDetectorshift Projection object
ProjectionMode Projection object
ProjectionNormalization Projection object
ProjectionSubMode Projection object
RefrigerantLevel TemperatureControl object
ScreenPosition Camera object
StageHolderType Stage object
StageStatus Stage object
StageAxes Stage object
TEMScriptingError All
VacuumStatus Vacuum object
TEM help 47
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Value Description
E_VALUE_CLIP a parameter exceeded its possible range, it is clipped to its highest or
lowest allowed value
E_OUT_OF_RANGE a parameter exceeded its possible range. The command is ignored.
E_NOT_OK another error occured. Query the error object for more information.
Only a few functions return these error codes. Mostly, standard Microsoft OLE-error codes are returned.
However, they are used in a specific way. These standard codes are displayed below in hexadecimal
format.
Scripting languages may translate the standard error values into others, as indicated in the table below.
In Delphi apparently the error codes cannot easily be retrieved, but the standard describing string is well
available. These descriptions are pretty much the same for all languages and close to what the meaning
of the error in the TEM-context is. Only for E_UNEXPECTED you will get a message like "catastrophic
failure", which does not quite fit to the error description given in the table.
20 TEM-specific issues
When writing scripts for the TEM, it is of course important to keep in mind that there is a physical
microscope involved. Changing a property of an adapter object mostly results in a physical action on the
actual TEM. This also means that no matter how many objects of one type are created, be it in one or
also in several scripts running in parallel, they finally all correspond to the same thing. And if somebody
sitting at the microscope or another script decides to change microscope parameters, the properties of
your objects may change without you knowing. Apart from this perhaps trivial -but easily forgotten-
aspect there are some details about the TEM's inner structure that may be necessary to know when
programming.
These are situations in which the microscope, or rather parts of it, sometimes behave as independent
users themselves. This hampers the use of synchronous functions. But there are remedies. For the first
situation they are explained in the section on Normalizations, the second situation can often be avoided
by using ‘MoveTo’ in place of ‘GoTo’ in case you want to reach extreme positions of the stage.
20.2 Normalizations
Many actions that change excitations of optical elements trigger normalization procedures to ensure
reproducibility of the settings (since the optics contain magnetic lenses). You can examine the
‘Normalizations’ control panel in the TEM user interface to get information about when normalization
procedures are automatically initiated (see image below).
TEM help 49
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
On the Tecnai these settings are user-dependent (note the checkboxes in the control cluster that allow
individual settings to be made). The example in the image shows that -for this user- automatic
normalizations are invoked for C1 and C2 condenser lenses, if the spotsize is changed.
The automatic normalization procedures are done independently from any other action. They take about
two seconds on Tecnai and five seconds on Titan. This disturbs the adapter's concept of using
synchronous functions in order to allow a simple order of commands.
Remedy: In scripting applications it can be helpful to disable automatic normalizations and invoke the
necessary normalizations via the script, using the (synchronous) ‘Normalize()’ methods of the
‘Illumination’ and ‘Projection’ objects. Do not forget to enable autonormalizations again before ending the
application!
Example:
MyTem.AutoNormalizeEnabled = FALSE
var Illum = MyTem.Illumination
Illum.SpotsizeIndex = 3
Illum.Normalize(nmCondenser)
MyTem.AutoNormalizeEnabled = TRUE
Please note that entering the alignment procedures via the TEM user interface overrides the setting of
the ‘AutoNormalizeEnabled’-property.
You may have noticed, that already without a session started, that is without the TEM user interface
running, your script can communicate with the TEM server. But because of the facts mentioned above,
you may run into problems. So, for every application that does more than passive protocolling tasks, it is
strongly recommended that a TEM session is initialized before the script is executed!
TEM help 50
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
This behavior is not yet implemented consistently in the microscope server. You will probably find
properties that will not react at all, if you feed out of range parameters. To make things a little more
difficult, it is not always easy to tell what the allowed range of values for a property is, because it may
depend on the alignment settings of the microscope.
One of the more complicated cases is the beam-deflection setting, for example. One single set of coils
executes two different kinds of actions: beam shift and beam tilt. Both shift and tilt are further divided into
an alignment-value (shift not accessible through the TEM scripting adapter; tilt = rotation center) and a
user value (also accessible via the ‘Illumination’ object). Additionally the beam-deflection coils are
affected by the alignment of the condenser stigmator. Shifts, tilts and stigmator adjustments are
translated through pivot points into settings on the upper and lower deflection coils. These coils
ultimately trigger an out-of-range response. This complexity makes it very difficult to predict what the
actual limit is for a specific value. To determine the actual limit for a parameter that does not change on
an attempt to set it to an out-of-range value, the following procedure can be used (in JScript code):
It is advisable to rather check a property's value before relying on the success of an attempt to set it.
Anyway, another script or human user could also in principle interfere at all times, so checking can never
harm.
TEM help 51
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
The above statement assumes that the typelib is in the same directory as your source files. From the
typelib, the compiler will generate the stdscript.tlh and .tli files that contain all necessary definitions and a
number of wrapper-functions. You will then also get the full support of the ClassView and the IntelliSense
mechanism.
In C++, the names of the ‘objects’ can be different from what was written in the remainder of this help,
because unlike most scripting languages, C++ knows the difference between objects and interfaces
implemented by them. Due to details in the adapter's implementation that are meant to make its use
consistent in scripting languages, you see that most interfaces are named as are the ‘objects’ in the
remainder of this help file, but that, as a C++ user, you have to replace ‘Instrument’ by
‘InstrumentInterface’ and Userbutton by ‘IUserButton’.
Your application must also initialize the COM-libraries. Using MFC, this is typically done by the following
code
if (!AfxOleInit())
{
AfxMessageBox(IDP_OLE_INIT_FAILED);
return FALSE;
}
that you have to add to your Applications ::InitInstance() if you did not check the ‘automation’-check box,
when creating it.
22.2 Create an ‘Instrument’ and get the secondary microscope object that you need
The following piece of code shows one possible way to get access to the projection system and the
stage:
InstrumentInterfacePtr MyInstrument;
ProjectionPtr MyProjection;
StagePtr MyStage;
MyInstrument.CreateInstance(_T("TEMScripting.Instrument.1"));
MyProjection = MyInstrument->Projection;
MyStage = MyInstrument->Stage;
Here we used smart, _com_ptr_t-derived pointers that are defined in the stscript.tlh and stdscript.tli files.
(Their names all end with the postfix ‘Ptr’.) These pointers will do the interface reference-counting for
you. We also made use of the ‘property-way’ of writing, as do most scripting languages. A ‘property’
appears in the ClassView as a public member variable. In effect it can be used as such, except that for
example it may be ‘read only’, i.e. setting may not be permitted.
TEM help 53
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
The above code is entirely equivalent to the use of the wrapper functions that is shown in the following
piece of code:
MyProjection = MyInstrument->GetProjection();
MyStage = MyInstrument->GetStage();
In fact these functions are also called under water in the first example. The advantage of the wrapper
functions is a convenient treatment of errors. If an error occurs, these functions will raise an exception (of
type _com_error) that you can catch (see below) and that allows easy access to detailed error
information. The wrapper functions also encapsulate BSTR (and VARIANT) types into _bstr_t-(and
_variant_t-)objects that are easier to handle. You can of course also choose to go the hard way and
use the ‘raw’ functions, that finally implement the properties:
HRESULT hr;
hr = MyInstrument->get_Projection(&MyProjection);
hr = MyInstrument->get_Stage(&MyStage);
For handling of errors you would then have to check the value of hr. If there is extended error
information, you could query it via the IErrorInfo-interface. (See any book on COM on how to do
this).
In this last example, it does not matter, whether you use intelligent pointers or not, while in the first two
examples you have to use them, otherwise you will experience difficulties with the reference count. Your
objects might be destroyed due to the fact that the wrapper functions are designed in a way that results
in a hidden Release()-call for the interface in question. This call is used to compensate for the
AddRef() that is connected to the use of the ‘=’-operator for intelligent pointers. (This also implies, that
you have to use ‘=’ and not the .Attach() method of the smart pointer class).
MyProjection->MagnificationIndex = 5;
This statement will set the magnification index to a new value (=5).
long MyLong;
MyLong = MyProjection->MagnificationIndex;
reads the current value of the magnification index into the variable MyLong.
‘Compound’ properties are read and set by using the TEM scripting adapter's ‘utility objects’. Thus
IlluminationPtr MyIllumination;
VectorPtr MyShift;
double MyShiftX;
MyIllumination = MyInstrument->Illumination;
MyShift = MyIllumination->Shift;
MyShiftX = MyShift->X;
would read the full 2D-beam shift first and then store its x-component into the variable MyShiftX. Be
aware that MyShift contains a copy of the actual beam shift. Thus, if you want to get the new actual
TEM help 54
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
beam shift at a later moment in time, you have to ask for MyIllumination->Shift again! Setting compound
parameters then works as follows:
VectorPtr MyNewShift;
MyNewShift = MyIllumination->Shift;
MyNewShift->X = 0;
MyNewShift->Y = 0;
MyIllumination->Shift = MyNewShift;
The codes first gets a Vector-object by reading a 2D-property, assigns new values (0,0) and then copies
it back, thus setting the beam shift to zero.
GaugesPtr MyGauges;
GaugePtr g;
CString sMsg;
MyGauges = MyInstrument->Vacuum->Gauges;
loops over all gauges of the vacuum system and shows for each gauge the name and the pressure
measured with it on a message box.
In C++, you cannot use Item as a property (although other languages use it as such), i.e.
does not work. Some scripting languages allow the use of the handy abbreviation MyGauges(i), because
‘Item’ is the default property of a collection. This is also not allowed in C++.
Probably you will often not know the index of the gauge, but its name, that you can read from the
vacuum display of the microscope. GetItem therefore also accepts the gauge name as identifier, for
example it is possible to write
g = MyGauges->GetItem(_T("P1"));
g now contains the information about the buffer tank pressure. Remember that the ‘gauge’ objects are
utility objects, so to get the new actual values, you have to ask for a new collection again, thus to repeat:
MyGauges = MyInstrument->Vacuum->Gauges;
TEM help 55
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
EnableAutomation();
Also you should use the following macros to your classes header file:
DECLARE_DISPATCH_MAP()
DECLARE_INTERFACE_MAP()
a) In the dispatch map macro, you have to assign the button event Pressed to a function (called
OnPressed in this example) of your CCmdTarget-derived, event- receiving class (which is called
CMyButton here).
BEGIN_DISPATCH_MAP(CMyButton, CCmdTarget)
DISP_FUNCTION(CMyButton, "Pressed", OnPressed, VT_EMPTY, VTS_NONE)
END_DISPATCH_MAP()
VT_EMPTY indicates that the function has no return parameter and VTS_NONE specifies that it does
not take any data.
b) The interface that contains the user button event has to be included into the INTERFACE_MAP
macro:
BEGIN_INTERFACE_MAP(CMyButton, CCmdTarget)
INTERFACE_PART(CMyButton, DIID_UserButtonEvent, Dispatch)
END_INTERFACE_MAP()
Furthermore you have to include code that handles the connection point mechanism used to receive
COM-events. This might look as follows:
And, in the end (for example in the destructor of your event-receiving class), you have to disregister with
the connection point again. (For this reason you had to remember MyCookie):
MyConnectionPoint->UnAdvise(MyCookie);
TEM help 56
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
In order to make the above code work, you further have to overwrite the connection point's GetIID()
function to retrieve the ID of the user button event-interface:
IID CMyButton::GetIID ()
{
return DIID_UserButtonEvent;
}
void CMyButton::OnPressed()
{
// Do whatever you want
}
will be called, whenever the corresponding button (the button "pointed to" by pMyButton) is pressed,
provided you have activated it. Activation is done by assigning a string that will then also be displayed in
the TEM UI:
HRESULT sc = ::CoInitializeSecurity(
NULL,
-1,
NULL,
NULL,
RPC_C_AUTHN_LEVEL_NONE,
RPC_C_IMP_LEVEL_IMPERSONATE,
NULL,
EOAC_NONE,
NULL);
if (FAILED(sc))
{
TRACE1("CoInitializeSecurity failed! (returned 0x%X)\nno remote events will be
received", sc);
}
Also, the compiler switch _WIN32_DCOM has to be defined. Otherwise the relevant function declarations
may not be included into your project. Thus if you get a compiler error, you might have to add the
following line of code, preferably in stdafx.h:
#define _WIN32_DCOM
are out of range (in that case the stage for example would not move either). Generally, calls to another
process (i.e. from your script to the TEM server) may fail occasionally. So be aware and do the error
handling - otherwise your application might die!
If an error is raised, then some global object may be filled with detailed information about the error. (In
case of TEM errors that will be done for versions >1.0). The minimal information, that is always available,
consists of an HRESULT error code and a system generated standard error message. Usually you will
get an error code, a textual description and some more information as described below. The easiest way
to obtain this information is to use the smart pointer classes and the wrapper functions that are defined in
the stdscript.tli/tlh-files and that are automatically generated when the typelib or the dll is imported into
your project. You can then use the C++ try/catch mechanism to catch the errors, as shown below.
Suppose you want to move the stage to a new position that is calculated from the old one -just as an
example, you could invent some code here:
try
{
StagePositionPtr OldPos;
StagePositionPtr NewPos;
StagePtr MyStage;
MyStage = MyInstrument->Stage;
OldPos = MyStage->Position;
CalculateNewPosition(OldPos, &NewPos) // some function
MyStage->Goto(NewPos, axisXY);
}
catch ( _com_error E)
{
CString sDescription;
if (E.Description().length() > 0)
{
sDescription.Format(E.Description());
}
else if (E.ErrorMessage() != NULL)
{
sDescription.Format(E.ErrorMessage());
}
AfxMessageBox(Description);
}
In case of an error, a message-box will show a description of the error that ocurred. This will be either
the application-delivered one, if available, or the standard message for the error code in question.
Among others, the exception object supports the following handy methods:
23.2 Events
Delphi (at least up to version 4.0) provides no direct handling of events. Instead you either have to write
your own handler or (to keep it simple) use the EventSinkImport utility written by Binh Ly, which was
used here (can be found on the world wide web). The Event Sink Import utility creates two files, a
standard TLB (as obtained when using the Delphi Import Type Library function) and a separate Events
unit. The Events unit for TEM Scripting was compiled into a package that can be installed, creating a
non-visual component under ActiveX.
Important note: The declaration of the Events component under the uses clause must always precede
the declaration to the TLB itself.
To install the Scripting Events component for Delphi 3.0 (or Delphi 5.0) and higher:
• Copy the TemScriptingEvents.pas and TemScriptingEvents.dcr file to the Imports folder of the
Borland\Delphi 3 or 5 folder.
• Start Delphi.
• Select Component, Install Component.
• Select the Into new package tab.
• For unit file name, Browse to TemScriptingEvents.pas.
• For Package file name Browse to the Imports folder and enter TemScripting.dpk.
• For Package description enter Tem Userbutton Events
• Press OK. The package will be compiled and installed. Save the package.
• In the ActiveX tab of Delphi you will now find the UserButtonEvent component.
The connection with the microscope is done in FormCreate for instrument and then per tab (checked
against previous connection through the nil). This method makes startup faster and eliminates
unnecessary connections.
Some units, such as GetVersion are very small and can easily be combined into a program itself. Since
they may be used repeatedly for more than one application, they are separated off for easy importing.
To correct for this, you can change the settings dependent on the font setting read at start up. The font
size can be determined at run time by inspecting the PixelsPerInch property. It is 96 for Small Fonts and
120 for Large Fonts.
Note: The font in a statusbar may come out bold on Large Fonts when compiled in Small Fonts. Make
sure you have the ParentFont property of the statusbar set to true and it will come out normal.
FTem : Instrument;
FProj : Projection;
FStage : Stage;
In a section accessed before any calls to the microscope are made (e.g. the FormCreate). In the
example program the subunits (Projection, Stage, etc.) are connected per tab of the PageControl (the
connections take time, so this reduces the number of connections to those necessary and reduces start-
up time).
try
if FTem = nil then FTem := CoInstrument.Create;
try { no sense in trying this if the previous didn't work }
if FProj = nil then FProj := FTem.Projection;
except
on E : Exception do
Application.Messagebox(
pchar('Error - No connection to projection - '+E.Message),
'Error',mb_OK);
end;
try
if FStage = nil then FStage := FTem.Stage;
except
on E : Exception do
Application.Messagebox(
TEM help 60
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
FTem.MagnificationIndex := 5;
‘Compound’ properties are read and set by using the TEM scripting adapter's ‘utility objects’. Thus
var
FShift : Vector;
FX : double;
In the code:
FShift := FProj.ImageShift;
FX := FPos.X;
would read the full 2D-image shift and then store the x-component in the variable FX. Be aware that
FShift contains a copy of the image shift. If you want to get the new actual image shift at a later
moment in time, you have to ask for FProj.ImageShift again! For setting the multidimensional
properties, you have to create an instance of the utility object first (by reading it, as above), then put the
right coordinate values into it and then assign it to the property. Example:
var
FShift : Vector;
In the code:
FShift := FStage.ImageShift;
FShift.X := 1e-6; { image shift is in meters }
FShift.Y := -1e-6;
FProj.ImageShift := FShift;
creates a new Vector object that is initialized with the coordinates as given and is then used to set the
image shift to these values. (An exception here is the position of the stage, that is read only, because for
moving the stage you have to use the Goto_ and MoveTo functions. The underscore on Goto is added
by Delphi automatically because Goto is a reserved word).
var
FTem : Instrument;
FVacuum : Vacuum;
FGauges : Gauges;
FGauge : Gauge;
indx : integer;
td : double;
OleVar1 : OleVariant;
In the code:
try
if FTem = nil then FTem := CoInstrument.Create;
try { no sense in trying this if the previous didn't work }
if FVacuum = nil then FVacuum := FTem.Vacuum;
if FGauges = nil then FGauges := FTem.Vacuum.Gauges;
for indx := 0 to FGauges.count-1 do
{ fill labels, see example program - better }
begin
OleVar1 := indx;
FGauge := FGauges.Item[OleVar1];
Label1.caption := FGauge.Name;
td := FGauge.Pressure;
with Label2 do
if td > 100 then caption := RealToStr(td,0)
{ for RealToStr see example program }
else if td > 10 then caption := RealToStr(td,1)
else if td > 1 then caption := RealToStr(td,2)
else if td > 0.001 then caption := RealToStr(td,4)
else caption := RealToStr(td,8);
with Label3 do
case FGauge.Status of
gsUndefined : caption := 'Undefined';
gsUnderflow : caption := 'Underflow';
gsOverflow : caption := 'Overflow';
gsInvalid : caption := 'Invalid';
gsValid : caption := 'Valid';
end;
end;
except
on E : Exception do
Application.Messagebox(
pchar('Error - No connection to vacuum - '+E.Message),'Error',mb_OK);
end;
except
on E : Exception do
Application.Messagebox(
pchar('Error - No connection to instrument - '+E.Message),'Error',mb_OK);
end;
loops over all gauges of the vacuum system. You can access single gauges via the ‘Item’-property of the
collection (thus as MyGauges.Item[3] for example). Probably often you will not know the index of the
gauge, but you can find out its name from the vacuum display of the microscope.
TEM help 62
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
The ‘Item’ property therefore also accepts the gauge name as identifier, for example it is possible to write
OleVar1 := 'P1';
FGauge := FGauges.Item[OleVar1];
{ in Delphi you cannot use the name as in VB or JScript-
thus you cannot write FGauges[OleVar1] }
FTem : Instrument;
FUserButtons : UserButtons;
F_UB_L1 : UserButton;
try
if FUserButtons = nil then
begin
FUserButtons := FTem.UserButtons;
F_UB_L1 := FUserButtons.Item[1];
UserButtonEvent1.Connect(IUnknown (F_UB_L1) );
end;
except
...
end;
When you double-click on the UserButtonEvent control, the following procedure will be added to the
code:
The procedure UserButtonEvent1Pressed will be invoked when User button "L1" is pressed,
provided you have activated the events by using the assignment-property of F_UB_L1.
where
TEM help 63
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
RPC_C_AUTHN_LEVEL_NONE = 1
RPC_C_IMP_LEVEL_IMPERSONATE = 3
EOAC_NONE = 0
When you are using the functionality from Binh Ly (comlib) you simply call
InitializeComSecurity (alNone,ilImpersonate);
If an error is raised, then Exception.Message will be filled with detailed information about the error, if
available. You can use this information for your error handling. See the error handling in the code
examples above.
TEM help 64
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
24.1 Create an ‘Instrument’ and get the secondary microscope object that you need
The following code demonstrates how to get access to the projection system and the stage. In this
example, the code is included into the HTML page (you could also specify the source-file using the SRC
attribute of the <SCRIPT>-tag) and will be triggered, when the body of the HTML page is loaded:
<HTML>
...
<BODY ONLOAD="Connect()">
...
<SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">
<!--// Variables used throughout the script
var MyTem;
var MyProjection;
var MyStage;
...
function Connect()
{
MyTem = new ActiveXObject("TEMScripting.Instrument");
MyProjection = MyTem.Projection;
MyStage = MyTem.Stage; ...}
...
-->
</SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>
MyProjection.MagnificationIndex = 5;
This statement will set the magnification index to a new value (=5).
reads the current value of the magnification index into the variable MyLong.
Compound properties are read and set by using the TEM scripting adapters ‘utility objects’. Thus
would read the full 2D-beam shift first and then store its x-component in the variable MyShiftX. Be
aware that MyShift contains a copy of the actual beam shift. Thus, if you want to get the new actual
beam shift at a later moment in time, you have to ask for MyIllumination.Shift again! Setting
compound parameters then works as follows:
var MyNewShift;
var MyVector;
yVector = MyTem.Vector;
MyNewShift = new MyVector(0,0);
// or alternatively:
// MyNewShift = new MyTem.Vector(0,0);
MyIllumination.Shift = MyNewShift;
The above code is specific for JScript and works in the same fashion for the ‘StagePosition’ object. It first
defines a ‘(My)Vector’ type by retrieving a ‘Vector’ constructor function object, then actually constructs a
new ‘(My)Vector’-object, that is initialized with (0,0) and then uses this newly created object to set the
beam shift to zero.
MyNewShift = MyIllumination.Shift;
MyNewShift.X = 0;
MyNewShift.Y = 0;
MyIllumination.Shift = MyNewShift;
would do the same, using the ‘Vector’-object retrieved by reading the beam shift first.
var MyGauges;
var g;
var sMsg = "";MyGauges = MyTem.Vacuum.Gauges;
for (i=0; i < MyGauges.Count; i++)
{
g = MyGauges(i);
sMsg = sMsg + g.Name + ": " + g.Pressure;
}
alert(sMsg);
loops over all gauges of the vacuum system and then shows a message box containing the names of all
gauges and the pressures measured with them.
You can also access single gauges via the ‘Item’-property of the collection (thus as
MyGauges.Item(3)) for example), but since ‘Item’ is the default property, you can use the array-type
syntax (MyGauges(i)) as demonstrated in the above example.
Probably often you will not know the index of the gauge, but its name, that you can read from the
vacuum display of the microscope. The ‘Item’ property therefore also accepts the gauge name as
identifier, for example it is thus possible to write
g = MyGauges("P1");
g now contains the information about the buffer tank pressure. Remember that the ‘Gauge’ objects are
utility objects, so to get the new actual values, you have to ask for a new collection again:
TEM help 66
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
MyGauges = MyTem.Vacuum.Gauges;
This maybe strange looking code is necessary to convince the script-interpreter that MyL1 is indeed a
‘UserButton’ object and that the subsequent definition of MyL1::Pressed() makes sense and implements
the ‘UserButton’-event. The main point is, that after assigning a ‘UserButton’ object to MyL1 a function
(here named DefineEventHandlers()) is called that then contains the definition of the event handler.
Simply defining MyL1::Pressed() inside or outside the Connect() function would yield an error
("MyL1 not an object" or "MyL1 undefined").
MyL1::Pressed() will be called, whenever the corresponding TEM user button L1 is pressed,
provided you have activated it for the script. Activation is done by assigning a string that will then also be
displayed int the TEM UI, as it is done in:
If an error occurs an ‘Error’ object will be thrown. It contains an error code (a number) and a textual
description. You can then use the JScript try/catch mechanism to catch the errors, as shown below.
TEM help 67
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Suppose your HTML page contains a form with a button named ‘cmdGoto’, and a text area named
‘TextErrors’. Pressing the button triggers movement of the stage to a new position that is calculated from
the old one -just as an example, you could invent some code here:
<FORM ID="theForm">
...
<INPUT TYPE=BUTTON NAME="cmdGoto" VALUE="Go" ONCLICK="OnGoto()">
...
<TEXTAREA NAME="TextErrors" COLS=.. ROWS=.. READONLY>
</TEXTAREA>
...
</FORM>
...
...
function OnGoto()
{
try
{
var NewPos;
var OldPos;
var MyStage;
MyStage = MyTem.Stage;
OldPos = Mystage.Position;
NewPos = new MyTem.StagePosition(0,0,0,0,0);
CalculateNewPosition(OldPos, NewPos) // some function
MyStage.Goto(NewPos, axisXY);
}
catch (Err)
{
var n;
var sn; //transform error code into hexadecimal string representation
n = new Number(Err.number);
sn = (n + Math.pow (2,32)).toString(16);
with (theForm.TextErrors)
{
value = value + sn + "\n";
value = value + Err.description + "\n";
}
}
}
In case of an error, the error code (in hexadezimal format) and the error description will be added to the
text in the text area. In some cases, for example when the creation of the ‘Instrument’ object fails, JScript
insists on its own error code and error message, overwriting any description given by for example by
TEM scripting.
Note: For example JScript will miss the description "TEM scripting: Protection key missing!", that
indicates that the protection dongle is missing.
TEM help 68
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
25.1 Create an ‘Instrument’ and get the secondary microscope object that you need
The following code demonstrates how to get access to the projection system and the stage. In this
example, the code is included into the HTML page (you could also specify the source-file using the SRC
attribute of the <SCRIPT>-tag) and will be triggered, when the body of the HTML page is loaded:
<HTML>
...
<BODY ONLOAD="Connect()">
...
<SCRIPT LANGUAGE="VBScript">
<!--Option Explicit// Variables used throughout the script
Dim MyTem
Dim MyProjection
Dim MyStage
...
Sub Connect()
MyTem = CreateObject("TEMScripting.Instrument")
Set MyProjection = MyTem.Projection
Set MyStage = MyTem.Stage
...
End Sub
...
-->
</SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>
MyProjection.MagnificationIndex = 5
This statement will set the magnification index to a new value (=5).
reads the current value of the magnification index into the variable MyLong.
Compound properties are read and set by using the TEM scripting adapters ‘utility objects’. Thus
would read the full 2D-beam shift first and then store its x-component in the variable MyShiftX. Be
aware that MyShift contains a copy of the actual beam shift, although it seems to be passed as a
reference (using "Set"). The reason is, that the copy is made by the adapter and is then passed. Thus, if
TEM help 69
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
you want to get the new actual beam shift at a later moment in time, you have to ask for
MyIllumination.Shift again! Setting compound parameters then works as follows:
The code first gets a ‘Vector’ object by reading a 2D-property, then assigns new values (0,0) and then
copies it back, thus setting the beam shift to zero (you cannot use "Set" here).
Dim MyGauges
Dim g
Dim sMsgs
Msg = ""Set MyGauges = MyTem.Vacuum.Gauges
For Each g In MyGauges
sMsg = sMsg & g.Name & ": " & g.Pressure & vbcrlf
next
Msgbox sMsg
loops over all gauges of the vacuum system and then shows a message box containing the names of all
gauges and the pressures measured with them. You can access single gauges via the ‘Item’-property of
the collection (thus as MyGauges.Item(3) for example), but since ‘Item’ is the default property, you
can more easily use the array-type syntax
Set g = MyGauges(3)
Probably often you will not know the index of the gauge, but its name, that you can read from the
vacuum display of the microscope. The ‘Item’ property therefore also accepts the gauge name as
identifier, for example it is possible to write
Set g = MyGauges("P1")
g now contains the information about the buffer tank pressure. Remember that the ‘Gauge’ objects are
utility objects, so to get the new actual values, you have to ask for a new collection again:
CreateObject("TEMScripting.TEMScriptingEvents")
TEM help 70
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
does not work! This function does not connect to the events. You have to use the <object>-tag in your
HTML-code:
<object id="MyTemEvents"
classid="clsid:5E896A91-A0BF-11d3-A688-00C04F9D480A" >
</object>
The name of the id-parameter can be choosen arbitrarily and is the name under which you later
address the ‘TEMScriptingEvents’-object in your script. The ‘TEMScriptingEvents’-object does not have
any properties or methods, it only supplies one event: Pressed(ButtonName). This function has to be
implemented in your script and will be called, whenever one of the User Buttons on the TEM handpanels
is pressed. In contrast to the ‘normal’ way of receiving the events via the ‘UserButton’-objects of TEM
scripting, the VBScript-client will have to check whether the event is actually meant for him. He cannot
make use of the intelligence that is built into the ‘UserButton’-objects of TEM scripting. The following
example shows how to do it:
Remember: The ‘UserButton’-Label is the Label of the Button as it is shown in the TEM user interface. If
your script did an assignment to a button, then assignment and label coincide. Your assignment can
(hopefully temporarily) be overwritten by another application (for example by the alignment procedures).
You would then probably not want to react on the events.
If an error is raised, then a global Error object (Err) will be filled with detailed information about the error,
if available. You can use this information for your error handling. Usually you will get an error code (a
number), a textual description and maybe a text string with the name of the source that raised the error.
If you want to do the error handling, you have to insert the following statement into the code:
This statement makes VBScript ignoring errors and is valid for the code to follow until the end of the
function or subroutine. You then got the chance to ask the error object for its content.
An example:
Suppose your HTML page contains a form with a button named ‘cmdGoto’, and a text area named
‘TextErrors’. Pressing the button triggers movement of the stage to a new position that is calculated from
the old one -just as an example, you could invent some code here:
<FORM ID="theForm">
...
<INPUT TYPE=BUTTON NAME="cmdGoto" VALUE="Go" ONCLICK="OnGoto()">
...
<TEXTAREA NAME="TextErrors" COLS=.. ROWS=.. READONLY>
</TEXTAREA>
...
</FORM>
...
...
Sub OnGoto()
Dim NewPos
Dim OldPos
Dim MyStage
On Error Resume Next
Set MyStage = MyTem.Stage
CheckError
Set OldPos = MyStage.Position
CheckError
CalculateNewPosition(OldPos, NewPos) // some function
MyStage.Goto(NewPos, axisXY)
CheckError
End Sub
Sub CheckError()
If (Err.Number <> 0) Then
With theForm.TextErrors
.Value = .Value + "Error:" &
Hex(Error.Number) & vbCrLf _
& "Source: " & Error.Source & _
vbCrLf & Error.Description & vbCrLf
End With
End If
Err.Clear 'Clears the error object
End Sub
In case of an error, the error code (in hexadezimal format), its source (if available) and the error
description will be added to the text in the text area. If we would not clear the error object by using
Err.Clear, we would handle the same error with the next check again.
In some cases, for example when the creation of the ‘Instrument’ object fails, VBcript insists on its own
error code and error message, overwriting any description given by TEM scripting.
Note: For example you will miss the description "Tecnai scripting: Protection key missing!", that indicates
that the protection dongle is missing.
TEM help 72
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Find the TEMScripting and check it. Now that the adapter is included into the project, you will see its
objects, their properties and their methods appear in the object browser (click View – Object Browser or
press F2):
TEM help 73
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
For every item you will find a small description in the lower gray part of this window. Context sensitive
help (try pressing F1) is also available, if you are working with VB6.0
26.2 Create an ‘Instrument’ and get the secondary microscope object that you need
The following piece of code shows how to get access to the projection system and the stage:
MyProjection.MagnificationIndex = 5
This statement will set the magnification index to a new value (=5).
reads the current value of the magnification index into the variable MyLong.
‘Compound’ properties are read and set by using The TEM scripting adapters ‘utility objects’. Thus
would read the full 2D-beam shift first and then store its x-component into the variable MyShiftX. Be
aware that MyShift contains a copy of the actual beam shift, although it seems to be passed as a
reference (using "Set"). The reason is, that the copy is made by the adapter and is then passed. Thus, if
you want to get the new actual beam shift at a later moment in time, you have to ask for MyIl.Shift
again! Setting compound parameters then works as follows:
The codes first gets a ‘Vector’ object by reading a 2D-property, then assigns new values (0,0) and then
copies it back, thus setting the beam shift to zero (you cannot use "Set" here).
loops over all gauges of the vacuum system and prints their names and the pressures measured with
them to a file named "TESTFILE". You can access single gauges via the ‘Item’-property of the collection
(thus as MyGauges.Item(3) for example), but since ‘Item’ is the default property, you can more easily
use the array-type syntax
Set g = MyGauges(3)
Probably often you will not know the index of the gauge, but its name, that you can read from the
vacuum display of the microscope. The ‘Item’ property therefore also accepts the gauge name as
identifier, for example it is possible to write
Set g = MyGauges("P1")
TEM help 75
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
g now contains the information about the buffer tank pressure. Remember that the ‘Gauge’ objects are
utility objects, so to get the new actual values, you have to ask for a new collection again:
The procedure MyButton_Pressed will be invoked whenever the user button "L1" is pressed.
Option Explicit
'see example VB application for more constants
Private Const RPC_C_AUTHN_NONE As Long = 0
Private Const RPC_C_AUTHN_LEVEL_NONE As Long = 1
Private Const RPC_C_IMP_LEVEL_IMPERSONATE As Long = 3
Private Const EOAC_NONE As Long = &H0
' Import function from ole32.dll
Private Declare Function CoInitializeSecurity Lib "OLE32.DLL" ( _
pSD As Any, _
ByVal cAuthSvc As Long, _
asAuthSvc As Long, _
pReserved1 As Any, _
ByVal dwAuthnlevel As Long, _
ByVal dwImpLevel As Long, _
ByVal pAuthInfo As Long, _
ByVal dwCapabilities As Long, _
pvReserved2 As Any _) As Long
TEM help 76
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
Sub Main()
' following code will fail in the IDE (debug mode).
Now, in Project--Properties--General tab, change the startup object to Sub Main. Note that Sub Main has
to have code to make your forms visible (such as frmYourframe.Show). The call to
CoInitializeSecurity will fail, when you are working in the VB development environment (IDE), debugging
your application. In that case, the IDE has already initialized COM security. This means, you will receive
events only, if you run the compiled executable.
So be aware and do the error handling - otherwise your script might die!
If an error is raised, then a global Error object (Err) will be filled with detailed information about the error,
if available. You can use this information for your error handling. Usually you will get an error code (a
number), a textual description and maybe a text string with the name of the source that raised the error.
(Suppose you have a form with at least a button named ‘cmdGoto’ and a textbox named ‘txtDisplay’. As
reaction on a button-click a new stage position is calculated -just as an example, you could invent some
TEM help 77
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
code here- and the stage is requested to move to that position. In case of an error the content of the
error object is shown in the textbox):
At the end of the error handling you can either do nothing (as in the above example), that is leave the
function or add either
Resume
which jumps back to the line in your code where the error occurred or
Resume Next
Goto MyLabel
statements. This allows you either to ignore errors or ask for the contents of the Err object after each
relevant statement and do the error handling ‘in place’. If you handled an error you should then clear the
content of the error object, using Err.Clear.
For more information see the Visual Basic documentation.
1) From a VB application it is not allowed to do more than one out-of-process call at a time. You might
think that this is a rare situation, but you can easily encounter this case. Imagine the following: You have
a timer running in your application that polls for certain microscope parameters of interest in regular time
intervals. (Maybe you want to protocol the vacuum pressures or the stage position.) At the same time
TEM help 78
Scripting Version Tecnai 4.0 / Titan1.1
your application has a user interface, through which the user can request actions by pressing a button
(maybe start a pumping cycle or an exposure of some kind). Then, especially when you use functions
that take a long time to complete, there is a chance that your application tries to issue a call from your
timer loop while a first one (issued via a button command) did not yet return. This second call will then
fail (error description: "illegal to call out while inside message filter"). The reason is the way the
apartment threading and message loop are implemented in VB.
2) A right click on the applications button in the Windows button list will also cause the out of process
calls to fail, as long as the small "Restore, Move, Size etc."-menu is open (see image below). We did not
do any further research why this happens, but it may be related to 1).